JP2019092969A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of easily distinguishing between a display mode of setting (set value, probability set value) and display related to a game.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises control means capable of generating a special game state for applying a game value to a player when a display result of a variable display game for variable displaying identification information becomes a special result. The game machine comprises: a first display device capable of displaying a display related to a game; setting change means capable of changing a set value related to a game condition; a second display device capable of displaying a set value; and external information output means capable of outputting a prescribed signal as external information to an external device provided on outside of the game machine. The control means displays the set value on the second display device in a mode different from a mode of the display related to the game, corresponding to becoming in a setting variable state in which the set value can be changed by the setting change means, and the external information display means outputs a prescribed signal corresponding to becoming in the variable setting state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 101

Description

The present invention is provided with a game control means capable of displaying on the display unit a variable display game in which the identification information is variably displayed, and when the stop result of the variable display game is a special result, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. It relates to the game machine which makes

Conventionally, there are gaming machines that can change settings (setting values, probability setting values) related to gaming conditions (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2004-135843 A

However, in the conventional gaming machine, settings relating to gaming conditions (setting values, probability setting values)
The setting (setting value, probability setting value) displayed in the setting variable state (setting changing) in which the change of is possible can not be easily distinguished from the display regarding the game.

An object of the present invention is to make it possible to easily distinguish between display of setting (setting value, probability setting value) and display regarding game in a gaming machine.

In a typical embodiment of the present invention, a game is provided with a control means capable of generating a special gaming state for giving a player a game value when a display result of a variable display game for displaying variable identification information is a special result. The first display device capable of displaying a display relating to a game, setting change means capable of changing a setting value relating to gaming conditions, a second display device capable of displaying the setting value, and provided outside the gaming machine An external information output unit capable of outputting a predetermined signal as external information to the external device, and the control unit corresponds to the setting changeable state in which the setting value can be changed by the setting changing unit And the second display device displays the setting value in a mode different from the display relating to the game, and the external information display means outputs the predetermined signal in response to the setting changeable state. Gaming machine and performing.

According to one aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine, the display of the setting (the set value, the probability setting value) and the display regarding the game can be easily distinguished.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of a package display apparatus. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of an effect control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of main processing. It is a figure which shows the structure of RAM of the game microcomputer of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an output process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of winning a prize mouth switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of game state check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of probability setting value change processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of probability setting value confirmation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure starting opening switch common process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure reservation information determination processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big winning a prize mouth switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure usual process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 change start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 change start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of small hit judging processing. It is a figure which illustrates the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the special figure fluctuation display game to each setting (each setting value). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing. It is a figure which illustrates the big hit design distribution (big hit breakdown) of the special figure fluctuation indicatory game vis-a-vis each setting. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during a special figure change. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of design change control processing. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of common drawing game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of gate switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a common drawing normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of an external information edit process. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the package display apparatus in process of probability setting change (the 1). It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the package display apparatus in process of probability setting change (the 2). It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the package display apparatus in process of probability setting change (the 3). It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the package display apparatus in process of probability setting change (the 4). It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the package display apparatus in process of probability setting change (the 5). It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the package display apparatus in process of probability setting change (the 6). It is a figure which shows the other structural example of a package display apparatus. It is a figure which shows another structure of a package display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a receiving command check process. It is a flowchart which shows a receiving command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a one-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows pre-reading symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch change type | system | group command processing. It is a flowchart which shows symbol system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows change type command processing. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows big hit system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows stop symbol setting processing concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the chance eye stop symbol aspect in the chance eye-reading effect concerning 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example which selects the chance eye stop symbol aspect which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a screen transition figure (the 1) concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a screen transition figure (the 2) concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a reverse view of the gaming machine concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a production control system of a game machine concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a front view when the board production apparatus of the game board which concerns on 3rd Embodiment operate | moves. It is a front view when the frame effect device of the glass frame which concerns on 3rd Embodiment operate | moves. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the movable body control processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of timing of initial operation control processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of timing of initial operation control processing concerning a comparative example of a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process at the time of the setting value reception which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a table for determining the light emission mode of the initial stage of setting suggestion effects of a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fanfare production setting process which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for determining the promotion lottery color of the setting suggestion production of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the ending production setting process which concerns on the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of processing at the time of out sphere number reception concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of RTC reading processing concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of count information setting processing concerning a 4th embodiment. In 4th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display apparatus at the time of becoming a big hit. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing another example of the display screen of the display device at the time of a big hit in the fourth embodiment. In 4th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the table for determining the display mode of a setting suggestion effect. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of hall / player setting mode processing concerning a 4th embodiment. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device in the hole setting mode in the fourth embodiment. In 4th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a display apparatus when it is in player setting mode. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the customer waiting demo setting process which concerns on 4th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in time series in the fifth embodiment, which is an example of the screen transition of the entire game when the hold display during the special figure change of the hold region changes. In 5th Embodiment, it is a screen transition figure which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series, and is an example of the screen transition of the whole game when a predetermined | prescribed effect is generate | occur | produced in a production | presentation display area. In the fifth embodiment, is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in time series, another example of the screen transition of the entire game when a predetermined effect is generated in the reserve digestion area or the effect display area It is. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the timer interrupt process which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the LED driver which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the lighting pattern of the character code (character code) concerning a 6th embodiment, and the character corresponding to it. It is a figure which shows the relationship of the initialization command and latch which are transmitted to the LED driver which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the LED driver initialization process which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship of the LED command and latch which are transmitted to the LED driver which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the LED data transmission process which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the detail of the cascade connection of the LED driver which concerns on the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. FIG. 78 is a view showing the details of the state display device according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 78 (A) is a view showing the details of the character ratio display unit that constitutes the state display device and displays the ratio FIG. 78 (B) is a view showing details of a discharged ball number display unit that configures the state display device and displays the discharged ball number and a pop rate display unit that displays the pop rate. It is a timing chart which shows the initial setting command sent to the driver for the duty ratio according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment, and the driver for the rate of balls out / number of balls discharged. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the procedure of the initialization process of the driver for the duty ratio which concerns on the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment, and the driver for ball ratio / ball number for discharge | emission. It is a timing chart which shows the LED command sent to the driver for duty ratio concerning the 1st modification of a 6th embodiment, and the driver for ball ratio / ball number for discharge. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the LED data transmission process which concerns on the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control system of a game machine concerning the 2nd modification of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the detail of the cascade connection of the LED driver which concerns on the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the initial setting command sent to the driver for batch, the driver for duty ratio, and the driver for the ball out rate / the number of discharged balls according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of initial setting processing of a driver for package, a driver for ratio ratio, and a driver for ball out rate / discharge ball number according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the LED command sent to the driver for package, the driver for duty ratio, and the driver for the rate of balls out / number of balls discharged according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the LED data transmission process which concerns on the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the probability setting value change process which concerns on 7th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram at the time of setting the lighting pattern data transmitted to a probability setting value display apparatus at the time of the setting change of 7th Embodiment, and the test injection test signal transmitted to a test injection test device. It is a schematic diagram at the time of setting the lighting pattern data transmitted to a probability setting value display apparatus at the time of setting change of the 1st modification of a 7th embodiment, and the test shot test signal sent to a test shot test device. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the probability setting value change process which concerns on the 2nd modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram at the time of setting the lighting pattern data transmitted to a probability setting value display apparatus at the time of setting change of the 2nd modification of a 7th embodiment, and the test shot test signal sent to a test shot test device. FIG. 68 is a block diagram showing a configuration example (No. 1) of a game control system according to an eighth embodiment. FIG. 35 is a block diagram showing a configuration example (No. 2) of a game control system according to an eighth embodiment. Timing chart which shows an example of the timing of external information output at the time of setting change concerning a 9th embodiment It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the timing of the external information output at the time of setting change concerning a 9th embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of external information output at the time of setting decision concerning a 9th embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the timing of the external information output at the time of setting check concerning a 9th embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of external information output at the time of setting change concerning a modification of a 9th embodiment. It is another example which changed the timing of the external information output at the time of the setting change which concerns on the modification of 9th Embodiment. In 10th Embodiment, it is a figure which illustrates the lighting pattern of the 1st special figure fluctuation display part 51 of the package display corresponding to the said symbol number, and the lighting pattern of probability setting value in 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the detail of the state display apparatus which displays the information regarding the payout rate which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the detail of the state display apparatus which displays the number which shows the probability setting value which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which illustrates the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the special figure change display game which concern on 11th Embodiment with respect to each setting (each setting value). It is a figure (the 2) which illustrates the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the special figure change display game which concern on 11th Embodiment with respect to each setting (each setting value). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process which concerns on 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process which concerns on 11th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the open mode (small hit open pattern) of the special fluctuation winning device in a small hit state. In 11th Embodiment, it is a figure which illustrates the hit probability of a common drawing fluctuation display game to each setting (each setting value). In 11th Embodiment, it is a figure which illustrates the display screen (customer waiting screen) of the display apparatus in customer waiting. In 11th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows the light emission aspect of a special figure fluctuation display part. It is a figure which shows the external device which concerns on 11th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows a mode that the detachable parts which concern on 12th Embodiment are attached to the game machine. It is a figure showing roughly the example of composition of the game board concerning a 12th embodiment, and parts. It is a figure which shows the game board which concerns on 12th Embodiment, and another example of parts. It is a figure which shows the structure of the parallel serial conversion part of the identification board | substrate which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 1st modification of the identification board | substrate (especially parallel serial conversion part) which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification of the identification board | substrate (especially parallel serial conversion part) which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 3rd modification of the identification board which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main process of the presentation control apparatus which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the parts collation process which concerns on 12th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a reference table that associates a model specification command with model identification information in the twelfth embodiment.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described based on the drawings. Note that the front, rear, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to the direction viewed from the player in the game.

[General view of gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining a gaming machine.

The gaming machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame attached to the frame 11 fixed to the island facility so as to be openable / closable and pivotable via a hinge. The opening and closing frame is constituted by a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

While the game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is disposed on the front frame 12, a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game visual recognition area that enables visual recognition of the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. Also, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, access to the game control device (main substrate) 100 (see FIG. 7) and the like disposed on the back side of the game board 30 Can.

Various frame components are disposed at the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

In the upper center and left side of the glass frame 15, a decoration device 1 capable of emitting light depending on the game state
8a and 18b are provided. The decoration devices 18a and 18b accommodate therein illumination members such as LEDs, and perform light emission effects according to the game state. The illumination members disposed inside the decoration devices 18a and 18b constitute a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper speaker 19a is disposed at the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the glass frame 15, respectively. Two lower speakers 19 b are provided below the gaming machine 10 separately from the upper speakers 19 a. The lower speaker 19 b is disposed at the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds and the like.

In the right side portion of the glass frame 15, a projection effect unit 13 which is extended in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and which protrudes toward the front (player side) is disposed. Outstanding production unit 1
Reference numeral 3 denotes an effect device that performs light emission effects and the like according to the progress of the game. Projection effect unit 13
The illumination member disposed in the interior also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper tray unit having an upper tray 21 capable of storing gaming balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape whose upper surface is open. The game balls stored in the upper tray 21 are supplied one by one to a ball launcher (not shown).

The upper unit further includes a rendering operation device for receiving an input operation from a player, a ball lending operation device for receiving an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 for performing a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. .

The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 25 b is incorporated in the effect button 25,
It is provided in the upper center of the upper tray unit so that the player can easily operate it.

By the player operating the effect operating device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the special view variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select a rendering pattern (rendering mode) or to execute a preview rendering for previewing in advance the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special view variable display game, and in the case where the variable display game is simply used, this specification refers to the special view variable display game.

Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only during the execution of the variable display game but also when the player operates the effect operating device during the non-execution.

The gaming state when the variable display game is executed is composed of a plurality of gaming states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. In addition, the special gaming state is, for example, a time saving state as a specific gaming state or a state in which the probability of generating a special result (for example, a big hit) in the variable display game is high (certain change state, probability change state), a big hit state (
Special game state), small hit game state (small hit state).

Here, the definite change state (specific game state) is continued until the next big hit occurs (loop type), and is continued until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (count cut type, ST), and There are things (continuation lottery type) etc. which continue until it wins a predetermined probability fall lottery.

Furthermore, it is possible to always generate a positive change state when a big hit occurs, without deciding whether or not to generate a positive change state by a big hit symbol random number, or by providing a winning device etc. provided with a specific area If the gaming ball passes through the area, a definite change state may be generated.

The ball lending operating device is an operating device operated when a player borrows a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper tray unit. The ball lending operating device includes a ball lending button 27 and a return button 28.
And a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when borrowing a game ball, and the return button 28 is a card unit (not shown) disposed adjacent to the gaming machine 10 for discharging a prepaid card or the like. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area in which the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed.

The decoration device 22 accommodates an illumination member such as an LED, etc., and is a device that performs light emission effects and the like according to the game state, and is provided on the front portion of the upper tray unit. The illumination member disposed inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball emitting device (not shown) and a gaming ball can be stored under the glass frame 15 provided with the above-described upper tray unit etc. and under the front frame 12 A lower plate 23 is provided.

The operation handle 24 is disposed at the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19 b on the right side. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game ball supplied from the upper tray 21 to the game area 32 of the gaming board 30. The firing speed of the gaming ball to be fired from the ball launching device is set to be faster as the turning operation amount of the operation handle 24 is larger. In other words, the ball launcher is a force (speed) to launch the game ball to the game area
The firing force can be changed in response to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game ball can be fired in various firing modes with different firing forces. The firing modes include a left strike (normal strike) in which the gaming ball is made to flow down on the left side of the game area 32 and a right strike in which the game ball is made to flow down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower tray 23 is disposed below the upper tray unit at a predetermined distance from the upper tray unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball removing hole 23a penetrating the bottom of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an open / close operation unit 23b for opening and closing the ball removing hole 23a. The player operates the opening / closing operation unit 23b to open the ball removing hole 23a, whereby the gaming balls stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball removing hole 23a.

[Play board]
Subsequently, the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 2A. FIG. 2A is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10. FIG.

As shown to FIG. 2A, the game board 30 is provided with the flat form game board main body 30a used as the attachment base of various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wooden or synthetic resin, and the game board main body 30 is
A play area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is provided on the front of a. The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a ball launch device into a game area 32 surrounded by the guide rails 31. A windmill, an obstacle nail or the like is disposed in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case (front structure) 40 forming a window serving as a display area of the variable display game is attached substantially at the center of the game area 32. At the back of the window formed in the center case 40, an effect display device (variation display device) that variably displays (variable display) a plurality of identification information
The display device 41 as shown in FIG. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is disposed such that display contents can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to one having a liquid crystal display, and may have a display such as an EL or a CRT.

A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbol) and characters for producing a variable display game are displayed in each of the variable display areas. In addition, an image (a big hit display, a fanfare display, an ending display, etc.) based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen.

Also, in the center case 40, the game balls flowing down the game area 32 are
An inflow port 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding it to the inside of the stage, and a stage portion 40b on which gaming balls having passed through the warp passage 40e can roll. The stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is disposed above the start winning hole 36 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37,
The game balls rolled on the stage unit 40b are more likely to win the start winning hole 36 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37.

An upper rendering unit 40c and a side rendering unit 40d are provided on the upper portion and the right side of the center case 40, respectively. Upper effect unit 40c and side effect unit 40d
These constitute a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol start gate (common view start gate) 34 is provided. Inside the drawing start gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting the gaming ball having passed through the drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the gaming ball driven into the gaming area 32 passes the common drawing start gate 34, the common drawing variation display game is executed.

A general winning opening 35 is disposed in the left lower gaming area 32 of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also disposed in the right lower gaming area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball to these general winning a prize opening 35, the winning a prize opening switch (SW which is equipped to general winning a prize opening 35)
) 35a-35n (see FIG. 3).

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a start winning opening (first start winning area) 36 for giving a start condition of the special view variation display game, and a second start winning opening (second A normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 having a start winning area) is provided. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member (movable piece) 37b that converts the gaming ball into a state in which the game ball easily flows in by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side. When the movable member 37 b is in the closed state, the gaming ball can not normally win the fluctuation prize device 37. When the gaming ball wins the start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, the special view variation display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

The movable member 37b is a so-called Vello-type ordinary motorized symbol, and is rotated via the common electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the common view variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode. The game ball is changed to the open state (the easy-to-win prize state advantageous to the player) in which the game ball is likely to flow into the normal variable winning device 37.

The movable member 37b is controlled by the game control apparatus 100 described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state by shortening the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation display game or making the hit probability of the common drawing fluctuation display game higher than usual, or the normal gaming state The time-saving state (general power support state) is generated as the above-mentioned specific gaming state by lengthening the generation time of the easy-to-win state more than the easy-to-win state generated in. In addition, positive change state (
Also in the latent probability change state), the short time state (general power support state) occurs redundantly.

In the game area 32 to the lower right of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the big winning opening solenoid (39b) (
According to FIG. 3), a special variation winning device 39 is provided having an open / close door 39c of the attacker type which opens the big winning opening by pivoting in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side. The special variation winning device 39 converts the state where the special winning opening is closed (blocked state disadvantageous to the player) to the open state (special gaming state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variable display game, By facilitating the flow of gaming balls into the mouth, a predetermined gaming value (winning balls) is given to the player. In the special winning opening, a count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) is disposed as a detection means for detecting the gaming ball having entered the special winning opening. In addition, in the special winning opening of the special variation winning device 39 and in the vicinity of the special winning opening (around the special winning opening), illuminate the special winning opening 1
One or more big winning opening LED 39d (full color LED) is disposed.

The general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the special fluctuation winning device 39
When the gaming ball has won in the big winning opening of, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) discharges the winning balls from the payout device to the upper tray 21 in the number according to the type of winning opening that has won. Also, the normal fluctuation winning device 3
In the lower game area 32 of 7, the out-port 30 for collecting the game balls that did not win in the winning port etc.
b is provided.

In addition, the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game, special figure 2 fluctuation display game) and the common drawing fluctuation display game are executed outside the gaming area 32 and in the lower right corner of the gaming board main body 30a. A collective display device 50 is provided. Batch display device 50 includes display portions 51 to 60 for displaying information such as the current gaming state (see FIG. 2B).

FIG. 2B is a diagram showing the configuration of the batch display device 50. As shown in FIG. The collective display device 50 is a first special view fluctuation display unit 5 for a fluctuation display game configured of a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like.
1 (special figure 1 indicator, lamp D1) and second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 (special figure 2 indicator, lamp D
2) and the fluctuation display unit 53 for the common drawing fluctuation display game (common drawing indicator, lamp D8, D10, D
18) and a memory display unit (special figure 1 reserve display 54, special figure 2 reserve display 55, general view reserve display 56) for starting (pending) storage number notification of each variable display game ing. The special view 1 suspension display 54 is constituted by lamps D11 and D12. Special figure 2 reservation indicator 55, lamp D
13, composed of D14. The common view holding display 56 is constituted by the lamps D15 and D16.

In addition, the first display unit 57 (first game state indicator, lamp) informs the collective display device 50 that it is right-handed (when right-handed) or left-handed (normally hit). D7),
Second game state display unit 58 (second game state indicator, lamp D17) that lights up when time saving state occurs and notifies time saving state occurrence, probability state of big hit when powering on gaming machine 10 becomes high probability state Round display to display the third gaming state display unit 59 (third gaming state indicator, probability state display unit, lamp D9) to display the number, the number of rounds at the big hit (number of times of opening and closing of the special variation winning device 39) The part 60 (lamps D3-D6) is provided.

In the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52, the variable display game is executed by the variable display which repeatedly turns on and off (flickers) identification information (for example, the central segment). The special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment type display unit, but
It may be configured by an assembly of a plurality of LEDs, or when performing variable display, all LEDs provided as a display all lights all off (all LEDs are simultaneously blinked), and cyclic lighting (any one It may be performed by turning on and off (flashing) or cyclic lighting by a predetermined number of LEDs among the plurality of LEDs). Also in the common map display 53, the variable display game is executed by the variable display (flashing) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. Also, the common drawing indicator 53 is also a special drawing 1 indicator 5
1. Special figure 2 It is possible to constitute suitably similarly to indicator 52.

The lamp display device 80 executes lamp display portions 1 and 2 (LEDs) that execute variable display (flashing) that repeats lighting display and light-off display as a symbol (fourth special symbol described later) and start of each special view fluctuation display game (Holding) A lamp display section 3-6 (LED) for notifying of the number of memories is provided. The lamp display device 80 is controlled by the effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display portions 1 and 2 blink in a predetermined blink cycle (for example, 200 msec (milliseconds)) as a variable display. While the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the special view 1 display 51, the special view 2 display 52, and the general display 53 of the collective display 50 is measured by the game control apparatus 100, the lamp of the lamp display 80 The fluctuation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by the effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp displays 3 and 4 (special figure 1 reserve LED 1 and special figure 1 reserve LED 2) display the special figure 1 reserve number (the first start memory number) according to the combination of the light off state, the lighting state and the blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (special figure 2 reserve LED 1 and special figure 2 reserve LED 2) display the special figure 2 reserve number (second start memory number) by the combination of the light off state, lighting state and blinking state. Do. The lamp display unit 3-6 terminates the display of the number of reservations due to the occurrence of a big hit, but displays the number of reservations in cases other than in the big hit state (including the case where the reach described later occurs in the display device 41). Do.

Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, and the details of the common view variation display game and the special view variation display game will be described.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by striking a gaming ball from a ball launch device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The shot game balls run down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails or windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the common drawing start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, or the special fluctuation winning apparatus 39, or flows into the out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32, and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the start winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, or the special fluctuation winning device 39, the number of winning balls according to the type of winning opening won through the payout device. It is discharged to the upper tray 21.

The common drawing start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting the gaming ball having passed through the common drawing start gate 34. When the gaming ball passes through the common drawing start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the common drawing fluctuation display game is executed based on the judgment result of the hit judgment random number value extracted at this time.

A state in which a common drawing fluctuation display game can not be started, for example, when a common drawing fluctuation display game has already been played and the common drawing fluctuation display game has not ended, or the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is hit and it is normal When the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, when the gaming ball passes the common drawing start gate 34, the number of common drawing start memories is added (+1) if the number is lower than the upper limit number.

A hit determination random number value is stored in the hit map start memory to determine hit hit of the hit game variation display game, and when the hit judgment random number value matches the decision value, the hit map change display is performed. The game is hit and a specific result aspect (specific result) is derived.

The common drawing variation display game is executed by the common drawing indicator 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The common drawing indicator 53 is composed of an LED which indicates a hit in the case of the lighting state as normal identification information (general drawing), and shows a deviation in the case of the light-off state, and this LED blinks to indicate fluctuation of the normal identification information. The display is performed, and the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED after a predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed.

When the common drawing random number value extracted at the time of passing the common drawing start gate 34 is a hit value, the normal symbol displayed on the common drawing display 53 is stopped in the hit state and becomes the hit state. At this time, the movable member 37b is converted to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) by driving the common voltage solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), and the game ball to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is Winning is acceptable.

The winning on the starting winning opening 36 of the gaming ball and the winning on the normal fluctuation winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
The game ball that has won in the start winning opening 36 is detected as a start winning ball of the special view 1 variation display game,
A predetermined upper limit number is stored as the upper limit, and a game ball winning a prize in the normal variation winning device 37 is detected as a start winning ball for the special view 2 variation display game, and is stored within the predetermined upper limit number.

When detecting the start winning balls of the special view variation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, each variation pattern random number value, etc. are extracted. These random number values are stored in the special view reserve storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control apparatus 100 as a special view start winning storage, each for a predetermined number of times (for example, at a maximum of eight times). The storage number of the special figure start winning memory is displayed on the special figure 1 hold indicator 54 or the special figure 2 hold indicator 55 for notifying the start winning number of the collective display unit 50, and the display unit 4
It is also displayed on the display screen of 1.

The game control device 100 executes the special view 1 variation display game with the special view 1 display 51 based on the winning on the start winning hole 36 or the first start storage. In addition, the game control device 100, the special figure 2 indicator 52 based on the winning a prize to the normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 or the second start memory 52
Run a variable display game.

The special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) and the special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game) are identification information (special figure 1 display 51 and special figure 2 display 52) It is carried out by stopping and displaying a predetermined result mode after changing and displaying the special symbol and the special figure). Also,
In the display device 41, a decorative special view variation display game is executed in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special view variation display game.

In the decorative special figure variation display game in the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numerals etc. is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol) The variable display (scroll display) is started in the order of d), and symbols which are changed after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped to display the result of the special figure change display game. In addition, in the display device 41, various effect display such as appearance of a character is performed to improve interest. Furthermore, in the decorative special figure variation display game, as the other decorative special symbols (identification information), in the lamp display portions 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80, the fourth special symbol is displayed repeatedly (flashing) on and off. fluctuate. The variable display of the lamp display portions 1 and 2 is stopped at a predetermined time after the start, at "off" in the case of outliers, and at "on" in the case of big hit or small hit.

As a result of the special figure fluctuation display game, when the winning of the game ball to starting starting winning a prize opening 36 or normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 is done at specified timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is big hit value) The specific result aspect (special result aspect) is derived by the display symbol, and the big hit state (
It becomes a special gaming state). Corresponding to this, the display mode of the display device 41 is a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

At this time, the special variation winning device 39 is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) by energization to the special winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3). That is, the special winning opening provided in the special variation winning device 39 opens widely until a predetermined time or a predetermined number of gaming balls win, and during this time, a bonus is given that the player can acquire many gaming balls. Ru.

When the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the small hitting value), the special figure fluctuation display game A specific result aspect (small hit result aspect) is derived | led-out by display design as a result of, and it will be in a small hit state. Corresponding to this, the display mode of the display device 41 is a small hit result mode. In the present embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the small hit determination, but the small hit value (small hit determination value) is different from the big hit value (big hit determination value).

At this time, in the special variation winning device 39, the big winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state only for a predetermined short time by energization to the big winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3). In addition, since the small hit state (small hit gaming state) is shorter than the big hit state (special gaming state), the entire opening time of the big winning opening is a game in which the player can obtain more than the big hit state in the small hit state. Value (number of balls won)
Less is. In both the small hit state and the big hit state, the big winning opening is opened, but the big hit state may be called a first special game state, and the small hit state may be called a second special game state.

  Here, the difference between the big hit and the small hit will be described.

A big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and a small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special view variation display game (big hit symbol stop display). When the condition device is activated, for example, a big hit occurs and it is special as a special motorized role. It means that a specific flag for operating the fluctuation winning device 39 continuously is set. If the condition device does not operate, it means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set as in the case of winning a small hit lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag turned on / off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch turned on / off electrically. In addition, "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is required for continuous operation of a motorized accessory, and the same applies in this specification as well. It is used as a term that has the meaning of

Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special fluctuation winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, while in the case of a small hit, the small hitting flag is set, the special fluctuation winning device Is released.

In addition, although the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be comprised as a separate display, and may be comprised as the same display, each special figure fluctuation display game is not performed simultaneously Is set as

With regard to the decoration special figure variation display game in the display device 41, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may be executed on different display devices or separate display areas, or the same indication It may be executed in the device or the display area. In this case, the special-figure variation display game corresponding to the special-figure 1 variation display game and the special-figure 2 variation display game is prevented from being simultaneously executed. The special figure 2 variation display game is to be executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, and there are special figure 1 variation display games and start figures of the special figure 2 variation display game. When it becomes possible to execute the figure variation display game, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed.

In the following description, when the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display game are not distinguished from each other, they are simply referred to as a special view change display game.

In addition, although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36 in the starting winning opening 36
a, The starting opening 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the count switch (39a) in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 have a coil for detecting magnetism and the magnetic field changes when metal approaches the coil. A non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) which detects a game ball using a phenomenon is used. In addition, a glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or a front frame opening detection switch 64 (main frame opening detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 etc. It is possible to use a microswitch having various contacts.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a game control system of the game machine 10. The gaming machine 10 is a gaming control device 10
The game control device 100 is a main control device (main substrate) that has 0 (main substrate) and controls the game in an integrated manner, and is a CPU unit having a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and a data bus 140 for connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

The CPU unit 110 is a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generating a clock serving as a reference of an operation clock or timer interrupt of the CPU and a random number generation circuit. The game control apparatus 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control apparatus 100 include DC 32 V, DC 12 V, DC 5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as V, is supplied and enabled.

The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32 V from an AC power supply of 24 V, and a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of lower levels such as 12 V DC and 5 V DC from a voltage of 32 V DC. , Gaming microcomputer 11
Control signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or reset signal that has a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage at the time of a power failure to the internal RAM of 1, and a power failure monitoring circuit And a control signal generation unit 430 that outputs the generated signal.

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but
The backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 may be configured to be provided on separate substrates or integrally with the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the main substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control apparatus 100 are subject to replacement at the time of model change, as in the embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 43 are mounted on a substrate different from the power supply 400 or the main substrate.
By providing 0, it can be removed from the target of replacement and cost reduction can be achieved.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 (see FIG.
In particular, the data is supplied to the built-in RAM, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or even after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it falls below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. Output Also, at the time of power on or recovery from a power failure, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

In addition, the game control apparatus 100 (main board) is turned on by the rotation operation of the operator or the like, and the setting key switch 93 for making it possible to change the set value regarding the game condition (game). Setting value change switch 102 capable of changing the setting value regarding the game condition
And. In the present embodiment, the setting value regarding the game condition (game) is the probability setting value of the jackpot probability, but other game conditions (small hitting probability, probability change rush rate, etc.) other than the jackpot probability also depend on the probability setting value. It can be changed. Setting key switch 93 and setting value change switch 102 are
The setting change means (setting change device 42) capable of changing the setting (setting value) relating to the game condition is configured. In the present embodiment, the touch switch signal of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 is used as the determination signal for determining the set value, but the operable determination button switch (operation means, operation unit) is used. The game control device 100 may be provided, and the signal from the confirmation button switch may be used as a confirmation signal for confirming the setting value.

The setting key switch 93 and the setting value changing switch 102 are provided on the game control apparatus 100 inside the gaming machine 10, and are arranged at positions (inaccessible positions) which can not be operated unless the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened. Be done. That is, a general player can not access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102. In the present embodiment, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are provided to be assembled on the game control device 100, but the front frame 1 such as on the power supply substrate of the power supply device 400.
You may provide in the position which can not be accessed if 2 (body frame) is open | released.

When the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 9
When 3 is in the ON state, the operator changes the set value switch 102 (set value change button)
By operating, it is possible to change the setting (setting value) regarding gaming conditions such as the probability of big hit and the probability change rate. That is, when the power is turned on, the state in which the front frame 12 is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on is the setting variable state in which the setting (setting value) can be changed. In the normal procedure, when the operator opens the front frame 12 and rotates the setting key switch 93 to turn it on to turn on the power, the setting variable state corresponding to the setting change state is entered. The setting variable state may be notified by voice from the speaker. When power is turned on, the glass frame 15 may be opened and the setting key switch 93 may be turned on as the setting variable state, or both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 may be opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on. The state may be set to be settable.

In the present embodiment, the setting values related to the game conditions are defined in six steps, setting value 1 (setting 1), setting value 2 (setting 2), setting value 3 (setting 3), setting value 4 (setting 4), There are setting value 5 (setting 5) and setting value 6 (setting 6). Setting value 1 is the most disadvantageous setting for the player, setting value 6
Is the most advantageous setting for the player. The setting values 1 and 2 are low settings, the setting values 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (middle setting), and the setting values 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the setting value change process, the operator changes the setting value change switch 102 (setting value change button)
Every time the is operated, the setting value (setting) is as setting value 1 → setting value 2 → setting value 3 → setting value 4 → setting value 5 → setting value 6 → setting value 1 → setting value 2 → ... Change to and select. The setting value may be changed by rotating the setting key switch 93 to a predetermined position instead of operating the setting value change button. Also, the setting value is not limited to six levels. Then, the selected setting values of 1 to 6 are displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 or the like which is a 7-segment display. In addition, the probability setting value display device 143 is a setting value change switch 102 via an electric circuit.
You may change the display directly in conjunction with the operation of. As will be described later, the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 and / or the second special view fluctuation display unit 52 for the variable display game of the collective display device 50 displays the selected setting values 1 to 6 It is also good.

When the operator touches the operation handle 24, a touch switch signal is transmitted to the game control device 1.
When 00 is input, the selected (changed) setting value (i.e., setting) is determined and stored in the probability setting value area in the RWM (storage means), and the setting value changing process ends. It should be noted that regardless of the touch switch signal, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off after changing the setting value, or when a predetermined time has elapsed after the setting variable state, the game control apparatus 100 determines and stores the setting value (ie setting). Configuration is also possible.

On the other hand, when the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned to turn on from the off state after powering on the gaming machine 10, the setting value confirmation mode (setting confirmation state)
become. In the setting value confirmation mode, the setting value displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 can be confirmed. You may display and confirm the setting value of 1 to 6 selected on the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 and / or the second special view fluctuation display unit 52 for the variable display game of the collective display device 50. . The setting value confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) may be notified by voice from the speaker.

The set value change switch 102 (set value change button) is a RAM initialization switch (RA
It can also be used as an M clear switch, and an initialization switch signal is generated when the initialization switch is on when the power is turned on (power recovery), and based on this, the gaming microcomputer 11
A process of forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111c in 1 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

The gaming microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a.
, Read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111 b and RA which can be read and written any time
M (random access memory) 111 c is provided.

The ROM 111b stores unchanged information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a non-volatile manner, and the RAM 111c stores a working area of the CPU 111a and storage areas of various signals and random values during game control. It is used as ROM 111 b or RAM 11
As 1c, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111 b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special view variation display game, the contents of the effect, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start storage to determine the fluctuation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a falling fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a falling, a big hit fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, tables for determining a second half fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state A table (a first half fluctuation group table, a first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half fluctuation pattern which is a pattern is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device capable of changing the display state, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. A game state (special game state) in which the game state is advantageous to the player when it becomes a special result mode
In the gaming machine 10 that is
This refers to a display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In addition, the reach state is deviated from the display condition which is the special result mode even when reaching the stage before the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. Then, for example, the reach state includes a state (so-called all-rotation reach) in which variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result mode is uniform. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. This refers to the display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition to be the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special view fluctuation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special view fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right fluctuation display areas in the display device. When displaying the result mode by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle and displaying the result mode, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display areas of all the variable display areas are temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle and right variable display areas is satisfied (for example, the same identification information It is also possible to set the state (1) except that the special result aspect is a reach state, and display the remaining one variable display area from the reach state.

Then, the reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result aspect (big hit aspect) is different (expected value is different) as a line of reach effects, the normal reach (
N reach), Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. In addition, the degree of expectation (expected value) of the big hit is designed to become higher in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach.
In addition, the reach state is at least a special result variation game derived in the special figure variation display game (
In the case of a big hit) is included in the variation display mode. That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special view variable display game (when it is out of alignment). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is a state in which the possibility of a big hit is high as compared with the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices. 10 Take control of the whole. Also, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the big hit of the special pattern variation display game, a big hit random number for determining the big hit symbol, and a small hit for determining the small hit symbol. Random number generation circuit for generating a variation pattern random number, etc. for determining a pattern random number, a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (including an execution time of the variation display game in various reach and variation display without reach) And a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) to the CPU 111a based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock giving update timing of the random number generation circuit. ing.

In addition, the CPU 111a controls the ROM 111b in the processing relating to the special figure variation display game.
One of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the table is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111a is a game result (big hit or break) of the special figure fluctuation display game, a probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state, the number of starting memories One of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired based on the above. Where CPU 11
1a forms a variation distribution information acquisition unit that acquires one variation pattern table among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when the special view variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Control to pay out.
Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the rental ball request signal from the card unit 600, and performs control for dispensing the rental balls.

A radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the common view starting gate 34, and a starting opening 1 in the first starting winning opening 36 Switch 36a, start opening 2 switch 37a in the second start winning opening 37
, Winning opening switch 35a, is connected to the special winning opening switch 39a of the special variation winning device 39,
An interface chip that receives signals of negative logic such as high level 11V and low level 7V supplied from these switches and converts them into 0V-5V positive logic signals (proximity I
/ F) 121 is provided.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Proximity I / F 1
Among the outputs of 21, the detection signal of the gate switch 34a, the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 39a is the third input port 1
It is input to 24.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, a detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected is input to the second input port 123.

In addition, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor switch 61 for detecting fraud which is provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10 in the second input port 123, a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 A signal from a front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) provided on the switch 63 and the front frame 12 (main frame) or the like is input. Note that a vibration sensor switch that detects vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the second input port 123.

Also, the second input port 123 (input port 3) takes in the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch signal from the setting value change switch 102 and Supply to 111.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control apparatus 100 to the non-illustrated test shot test apparatus via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals from the start opening 1 switch 36a and the start opening 2 switch 37a are input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for the operation of a normal IC from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the third input port 124 is the enable signal CE by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124.
It can be read out by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 includes a frame radio wave illegal signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout, and an overflow. An overflow switch signal, a touch switch signal based on an input of a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, an out sphere detection switch signal from the out sphere detection switch are taken in and the microcomputer 1 for gaming via the data bus 140
A first input port 122 is provided to supply the power supply 11. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that the game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 for a predetermined amount or more (full). The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio sensor provided on the front frame 12 (body frame), and the payout busy signal is a state in which the payout control device 200 can receive a command It is a signal which shows whether or not. In the present embodiment,
The out ball detection switch (not shown) is for detecting all the game balls which have been fired to the game area and finished the game. The out ball detection switch (not shown) may detect only gaming balls passing through the out port 30b.

In addition, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. Has a function to remove noise from the
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST, from which noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125, is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, and the output unit 13
It is supplied to each port of 0. Further, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test injection test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for outputting to the test injection test device. Is configured as.

In addition, the reset signal RST may be configured to be able to be output to the test irradiation test apparatus via the relay substrate 70. The reset signal RST is input to each port 122, 123 of the input unit 120.
, 124 is not supplied. It is necessary to reset the data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input, but it is necessary to reset the data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is set as one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal from the side of the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test shot test device of a recognized organization (not shown) via a relay board 70 etc. An output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control apparatus (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as a real machine (mass-produced article for sale) installed in a game arcade. A detection signal of a switch which does not need to be processed, such as a starting opening switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the test injection test apparatus through the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, detection signals that can not be supplied to the test shooting test device as they are like the magnetic sensor switch 61 or the radio wave sensor 62 are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial shot test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that it can not be done.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test shot test device, and a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass the buffer. There is. In the port on the relay board 70, the gaming microcomputer 11 is
The chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the propulsive test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 is opened / closed data of a solenoid (general power solenoid) 37 c connected to the data bus 140 to open the normal fluctuation winning device 37 and a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 39 b opening the special fluctuation winning device 39. A second output port 134 for output is provided.

The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. Of the digit line connected to the cathode terminal of the LED
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting the off data.

In addition, the output unit 130 may include information on the gaming machine 10 such as the big hit information as the external information terminal 71.
A fifth output port 137 is provided to output the signal. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or a game arcade internal management device (hall computer) etc.) installed in a game arcade. It can be supplied to the device. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a release permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a sixth output port 141 (probability setting value display output port) for outputting information of the setting value (probability setting value) to the probability setting value display device 143.
In the present embodiment, the probability setting value display device 143 is a 7-segment display (LED lamp), but the information of the setting value (probability setting value) is transmitted from the sixth output port 141 to the driver (
It may output to the probability setting value display device 143 via the LED driver).

In addition, the output unit 130 receives the common voltage solenoid 37 output from the second output port 134.
and the first driver (drive circuit) 138a that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal in response to the open / close data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 39b, and the segment on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135 Driver 1 that outputs line on / off drive signal 1
38b, third driver 138c for outputting on / off driving signal of digit line on current lead-in side of collective display device 50 output from fourth output port 136, supplied from fifth output port 137 to external device such as management device A fourth driver 138 d is provided to output an external information signal to the external information terminal 71.

The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32 V as a power supply voltage from the power supply apparatus 400 in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32 V. In addition, collective display unit 50
The DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment line of Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to the display data, the power supply voltage may be 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system is achieved by flowing a current into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12 V and extracting the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in step S1 and is turned on. The fourth to output the external information signal to the external information terminal 71
The driver 138d is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the relay board 70 side, not on the main board of the game control apparatus 100, that is, the main board.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 250. Photocoupler 13
9 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data with the inspection device 250 by serial communication. Since such transmission and reception of data are performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, no ports like the input ports 122, 123, 124 are provided.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 receives the serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code), etc.) output from the second output port 134, and the driver 150 for driving the status display device 152 It is provided. In the present embodiment, the status display device 152 is composed of a plurality (four) of 7-segment type (8-segment types including point portions) indicators (LED lamps), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. It is not limited to

Although the status display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main substrate),
It may be provided at another place. For example, the status display device 152 is a four-digit seven-segment type (
It is an indicator of 8 segment type) including a point part, and it can display an item ratio, a popping rate, and a discharged ball number. In addition, the status display device 152 is not limited to the one that directly displays the character ratio, the popping rate, and the number of discharged balls, but also indirectly displays the number of discharged balls, the popping rate, and the character ratio. Good.
That is, the state display device 152 may be able to display information related to the character ratio, the payout rate, and the number of discharged balls.

Here, the discharged ball number is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 (also referred to as the out ball number).
That is, it is the total of the number of gaming balls that have passed through the winning opening (winning number) and the number of gaming balls that have passed through the out port 30b. The number of balls discharged is basically the same as the number of balls which is the number of gaming balls shot from the ball launcher to the game area 32. The number of discharged balls can be obtained by counting the signal of the out ball detection switch. In the present embodiment, the winning opening is a general winning opening 35,
The start winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and the special fluctuation winning device 39 (big winning opening) are included. The number of discharged balls is displayed as a countdown, (100-number of discharged balls) is displayed, and only 100 (predetermined number) are counted. The number of discharged balls may be displayed by counting up from "00" to "99".

The payout rate is a ratio (ratio) of the total number of winning balls to the number of discharging balls (or the number of firing balls),
It is calculated by acquired ball number / discharged ball number) × 100 (%). That is, the payout rate is the number of obtained balls per 100 discharged balls (the total number of winning balls).

In the present embodiment, the pop-out rate is easily obtained from the number of acquired balls between 0 and 100 discharged balls every time the number of discharged balls reaches 100. That is, the number of discharged balls is only counted up to 100 (predetermined number). In addition, every time the number of discharged balls reaches 100 (predetermined number), the payout rate is updated to the latest payout rate until the number of discharged balls changes from 1 to 100. As a result, if the number of acquired balls (total number of balls) is displayed on the status display unit 152 as it is, the payout rate is displayed.

For example, the character ratio is a big hit among the total number of balls (total number of balls) obtained by winning in the winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present). It is a ratio (%) (= so-called continuous character ratio) of the number of winning balls (number of balls obtained by character) obtained by winning in the large winning opening. In addition, the prize ratio may be the ratio (= big winning opening ratio) of the number of winning balls (in big hit state and small hit state) obtained by winning in the big winning port among the total winning balls number Or the ratio of the number of winning balls obtained by winning in the large winning opening and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) (= commonly used so-called prize ratio (total prize ratio) ) May be.

[Effect control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub substrate) will be described using FIG. 4. Figure 4
Is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

The effect control device 300, like the gaming microcomputer 111, uses an amusement chip (IC
And a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying an image on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A sound source LSI 314 is provided to control the output of sound in order to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
Program ROM 321 consisting of ROM (Programmable Read Only Memory), RAM 322 for providing a work area, Fe that can hold stored contents even when power is not supplied at the time of power failure
A RAM 323 and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 serving as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (date, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the effect, and instructs the VDP 312 the contents of the output video, or the sound source LSI 314
Execute processing such as indication of playback sound to turn on, decoration lamp lighting, drive control of motor and solenoid, management of presentation time, etc.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area, and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. In addition, the VDP 312 is an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to expand and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) Is connected.

Although not particularly limited, transmission / reception of data is performed between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the serial case.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30 from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311
C, a synchronization signal STS which gives data transmission timing is input. Note that VDP 312
The main control microcomputer 311 receives an interrupt signal INT0 to n and a wait for notifying that it is in a state of waiting for reception of a command or data from the main control microcomputer 311 to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. Signals such as WAIT are also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Command I / F 3
31 receives an ornament special drawing reservation number command, an ornament special drawing command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300 as an effect control command signal (effect command) . The gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 is DC5.
Since it operates with V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates with DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a function of level conversion of signals.

In the effect control device 300, a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15 Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18 etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, game board 3
0 (including the center case 40), a panel effect device 44 (for example, the display device 41)
A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control a movable character etc. which enhances the effect effect in cooperation with the effect display in the above. The above-mentioned lamp display device 8 is provided to the panel decoration device 46.
0 may be included.

These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling the lamp, the motor, the solenoid and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. In addition, you may provide the frame production movable body control circuit which drive-controls frame production apparatuses, such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15. As shown in FIG.

Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, an effect button switch 25a incorporated in the effect button 25 provided in the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, a motor in the panel effect device 44 A function to detect the on / off state of the effect combination object switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting an initial position etc. and input a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume control switch provided in the effect control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 for detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the effect control device 300 having the configuration as described above.
And DC 32 V for driving a motor or a solenoid to supply a DC voltage of a desired level to electronic components controlled thereby, a display device 41 comprising a liquid crystal panel, DC 12 V for driving a motor or LED, DC5 to be the power supply voltage of command I / F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC voltage of 15 V for driving a motor, an LED, and a speaker.

Furthermore, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC − for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. DC-
The DC converter may be normally provided in the power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. In addition, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal) and the sound source LSI 314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
The signal is supplied to an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor and the like, and these are reset. In addition, in the effect control device 300, a cooling FA for cooling various places of the gaming machine 10
In the state where N 45 is connected and the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on, the cooling FAN 45 is driven.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. Game control device 1
In the CPU 111 of the gaming microcomputer 111 of 00, a random value for hit determination of the common drawing is extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the gaming ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the common drawing start gate 34 and stored in the ROM 111b It compares with the judgment value which it has, and judges the hitting out of the common drawing fluctuation indicatory game.

Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time, the generic image fluctuation display game in which the identification symbol is stopped and displayed is displayed. If the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is a hit, the common drawing indicator displays a special result mode, and the common power solenoid 37c is operated to move the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) control to open as described above. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the common drawing variation display game is out of control, control is performed to display a result mode of the deviation on the common drawing display.

In addition, starting winning combination (starting memory) is remembered on the basis of the input of detection signal of the game ball from starting opening 1 switch 36a which is equipped in starting winning a prize opening 36, big hit judgment of special figure 1 fluctuation indication game on the basis of starting memory The random number value for extraction is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit / off of the special view 1 variation display game.

In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 stores the starting memory, based on the starting memory, special figure 2 random display random number value of the fluctuation display game Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit / off of the special view 2 variation display game.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs, to the effect control device 300, a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special view 1 change display game or the special view 2 change display game. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special view 1 display 51 or the special view 2 display 52, a special view fluctuation display game in which a stop display is performed is displayed. In other words, the game control means performs game progression control of the variable display game based on winning in the start winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 I

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, the effect control device 300 performs processing of setting of effect state, output of sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, control of light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100.
That is, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling an effect on a game (a variable display game or the like).

And, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, and generates the special gaming state. Let In the process of generating the special gaming state, the CPU 111 a
For example, the open / close door 39c of the special variation winning device 39 is opened by the special winning opening solenoid 39b, and control is made to allow the game ball to flow into the special winning opening.

Then, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls win in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 second) elapses from the opening of the special winning opening. One round (R) is to open the big winning opening until a certain condition is achieved, and this is continued (repeatedly) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times) control (cycle game) I do. That is, when the stop result mode is the special result mode, the game control apparatus 100 forms a special winning opening / closing control means that performs control to open and close the special winning opening. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a release, control is performed to display a result mode of the deviation on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability state) is a state in which the probability of being a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. In addition, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result figure of the special figure fluctuation display game of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Both are high probability states.

Further, the game control apparatus 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, control is performed to set the regular drawing fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the time shortening operation state, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is more than when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. In order to control so that the open time of the subtractor increases substantially, it becomes a common charge support state. In addition, even in the high probability state (normal probability change state) excluding the latent probability change state, the general-purpose power transmission support is executed in the short time state repeatedly.

For example, in the time saving state, the execution time of the above-mentioned common drawing fluctuation display game (general drawing fluctuation time)
It is possible to reduce the time to make the second change display time shorter than the normal first change display time (for example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation time) is also shortened than usual, and time shortening fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is also executed.

Also, in the time saving state, the common drawing stop time for displaying the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is the first
Second stop time (eg, 704 msec) shorter than the stop time (eg, 1604 msec)
It is possible to control so that

Also, in the time saving state, when the regular drawing fluctuation display game hits and the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is released, the first opening time (for example, 100 msec) of the opening time (general power release time) is the normal state. It is possible to control so that the second opening time (for example, 1352 msec) that is longer than that is obtained.

Moreover, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 (the number of times of general electric power release) is greater than the number of first open times (for example, 2 times) with respect to one hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game It is possible to set to the 2nd open frequency (for example, 4 times). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to set the probability (popular drawing probability) to be the hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game to be a high probability higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operating state.

In the short time state, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the common drawing fluctuation time, the common drawing stop time, the number of times of common power release, the common power release time, and the common drawing probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Thereby, in the time saving state, winning of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is facilitated more than in the normal gaming state, and the number of times of execution of the special view fluctuation display game per unit time can be increased more than in the normal gaming state. Moreover, it is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states which are different from each other. Also, in the normal operation state, the movable member 3
It may be set so that 7b is not released (the common drawing probability is 0). In addition, either of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be selected in the case of a hit. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be made different. Also, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently of each other, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine which performs such a game will be described. First, control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9 which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main processing will be described. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the main processing by the game control device 100. The main process is started by turning on the power. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the sign (number) of the step is represented as "A ****".

As shown in FIG. 5A, when the main processing is started, the gaming control apparatus 100 first executes processing for prohibiting an interrupt (A1001). Furthermore, a stack pointer setting process is performed to set a stack pointer, which is the top address of the area for saving the values of the register etc. when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the address of the RAM is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control apparatus 100 outputs a signal of release prohibition and sets the release permission signal to a release state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the firing of the gaming ball is prohibited. Thereafter, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 3 (second input port 123) (A1006). Thus, the setting key switch 93,
Setting value change switch 102, glass frame open detection switch 63, front frame open detection switch 6
A signal from 4 (body frame open detection switch) can be read.

Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). Game control device 1 which constitutes the main control means by setting a predetermined initial value in the power supply delay timer
The standby time (for example, 3) for waiting until the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) which performs various controls in accordance with the instruction from 00 starts normally.
Seconds) is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 temporarily rises first and sends a command to the slave control apparatus before the slave control apparatus (for example, the payout control apparatus 200 or the presentation control apparatus 300) boots up, and the slave control apparatus Can avoid dropping commands. That is, at the time of power on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) to be a slave control device (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 3).
The present invention is a standby means for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for activation of 00 etc.).

Further, the power supply delay timer counts time by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register other than the validity determination target) which is not a target of the validity determination (check sum calculation) of the RAM. Thereby, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, a part of R
Since it is not necessary to calculate excluding the AM area, it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power on from becoming complicated.

The setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch signal from the setting value change switch 102 are input to the second input port 123 (input port 3), and the standby time is set. By reading the state of the second input port 123 before the start of the operation of the setting key switch 93 or the setting value change switch 102, the operation can be reliably detected. That is, when the state of the setting key switch 93 or the setting value changing switch 102 is read after the waiting time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 or the setting value changing switch 102 is operated after the waiting time has elapsed, or the power is turned on. It is necessary to continue to operate the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 from the time of the standby time until the elapse of the standby time. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it becomes possible to detect by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such a bothersome operation, and the setting key switch 93 performed at the time of the power on. It is possible to prevent a situation where the operation of the setting value change switch 102 can not be accepted.

When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes counting of the standby time and processing of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (from A1008 to A)
1012).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first checks the number of times the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus (
For example, 2) is set (A1008), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1).
009).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1009 is “Y
It is determined whether the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008 (A1010). Then, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal for the number of checks is not continued (the result of A1010 is "N"), the process returns to the process of determining whether the power failure monitoring signal is on in step A1009.

In addition, when the on state of the blackout monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that the blackout has occurred, the gaming control apparatus 100 is a gaming machine. Wait until the power is turned off. As described above, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period, thereby appropriately coping with a failure at the time of power on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 functions as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to cope with a power failure that has occurred during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that forms the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a problem at the time of power on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power-off are kept, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the waiting time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (if the result of A1009
N ′ ′), that is, when no power failure occurs, the power on delay timer is updated by −1 (A1011), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 or not (A1012). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1012 is "N"), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal in step A1008.

In addition, when the value of the timer is 0, the game control apparatus 100 (the result of A1012 is “Y”
In other words, when the waiting time is over, access to read-write RWM (Read-Write Memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (A1013), and all data output ports are output (no output) (A1014).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets a serial port (a port provided in advance in the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control apparatus 300 and the payout control apparatus 200 in the present embodiment) (A1015). ). Furthermore, the driver 15 for driving the status display device 152
Initialize 0 (A1016).

Here, the game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the content of the initial setting in the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits the command to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED of the status display device 152. Control data corresponding to the duty ratio is used in a duty setting unit of the driver 150 (LED driver). The duty ratio of the driver 150 may be smaller than usual to save power and darken each LED. Next, the game control device 100 sets the number of digits used of the state display device 152 in the initial setting. In the present embodiment, the number of used digits is four. Control data corresponding to the number of used digits is used in the number-of-digits setting unit of the driver 150 (LED driver).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017). And if it is normal (A101
It is determined whether the result of 7 is “Y” and the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1018).

Furthermore, if the value of the blackout inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1018 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 calculates a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, a game control work area) in the RWM. The calculation process is executed (A1019), and it is determined whether the calculated checksum and the checksum at the time of power-off match (A1020). If the checksums match (the result of A1020 is "Y"), the RAM 111c is normal, and the RAM clear start address 2 is set (A1021).

FIG. 5C is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 111 c of the gaming microcomputer 111. As shown in FIG. 5C, the RAM clear top address 2 is set so as to exclude the probability setting value area from the RAM area to be cleared. The RAM area to be cleared becomes the clear area # 2 in FIG. 5C by the RAM clear top address 2. The clear area # 2 includes a random number area, a control information area, and a game control stack area. The random number area is an initial value random number area storing various initial value random numbers,
A variation pattern random number area storing variation pattern random numbers is included. The control information area is an area from the blackout inspection area 1 to the checksum area, and includes a blackout inspection area 1, a blackout inspection area 2, a checksum area, and the like. The random number area may be excluded from the clear area # 2. The clear area # 2 includes a state display work area for storing information to be displayed on the state display device 152, such as a character ratio, and a state display stack area for processing information to be displayed on the state display device 152. I can not.

In FIG. 5C, an unused area may be provided between the game control work area including the probability setting value area, the random number area, and the control information area, and the game control stack area. In addition, an unused area may be provided between the status display work area and the status display stack area. Also,
The status display stack area may be disposed at the end of the address of the RAM 111c, and the last unused area (bottom of FIG. 5C) of FIG. 5C may be eliminated.

Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the probability setting is being changed (during the setting variable state, the setting changing state) (A1022). When the probability setting change is in progress (the result of A 1022 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes the processing in the probability setting change of step A1036-A1041. When the probability setting value changing flag (A1038) is set, it can be determined that the probability setting change is in progress.

If the game control apparatus 100 is not in the process of changing the probability setting (result of A1022 is "N"),
It is determined whether the front frame 12 (body frame) is in the open state (A1023). When a signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main frame opening detection switch) is input, the front frame 1
It can be determined that 2 (body frame) is in the open state. In step A1023, the front frame 1 is
It may be determined whether the glass frame 15 is in the open state instead of 2 or it may be determined whether both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are in the open state. In addition, when the signal from the glass frame open detection switch 63 is input, it can be determined that the glass frame 15 is in the open state.

When the front frame 12 (body frame) is in the open state (result of A1023 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A1024).
When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1024 is “Y”), the setting (setting value) can be changed, so that the initial setting of the RAM in the setting variable state of step A1036-A1041 is possible. Executes the processing during conversion processing (RAM clear processing) and setting change.

When the front frame 12 (body frame) is not in the open state (in the case of the closed state)
(When the result of A1023 is "N") or when the setting key switch 93 is off (A102
It is determined whether the result of 4 is “N”) and the setting value change switch 102 is on (A1).
025). When the setting value change switch 102 is not turned on (the result of A1025 is “N
"), The processing at the time of normal power on (power restoration) of step A1031-A1035 is executed.

On the other hand, when the set value change switch 102 is turned on (A1
The result of 025 is "Y", and the process of RAM initialization (RAM clear) of step A1042-A1045 is executed. Here, since the setting value change switch 102 is operated (pressed) when the power is turned on in the OFF state of the setting key switch 93, the setting value change switch 102 is a RAM initialization switch ( It will be used as a RAM clear switch). In addition, in the closed state of the front frame 12 (the result of A1023 is "N"), there is not a situation where the setting value change switch 102 is turned on actually. The setting value change switch 102, which can also function as an initialization switch, forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100
Function as initialization means for initializing the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit.

In addition, when the game control device 100 determines that the check data of the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1017 is “N”, or the result of A1018 is “N”), the checksums do not match. There is an abnormality in the RAM 111c (the result of A1020 is “N”), and the process shifts to a process for coping with the RAM abnormality after step A1026. First, R
The AM clear start address 1 is set (A1026). As shown in FIG. 5C, since the RAM clear top address 1 is the top address of the game control work area, the probability setting value area is also included in the RAM area to be cleared. R clear target address by RAM clear start address 1
The AM area is set to the clear area # 1 of FIG. 5C. The clear area # 1 includes a game control work area (consisting of a probability setting value area, a random number area, and a control information area), and a game control stack area. The clear area # 1 does not include a state display work area for storing information to be displayed on the state display device 152 and a state display stack area for processing information to be displayed on the state display device 152.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the front frame 12 (main frame) is in the open state (A1027). When a signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main frame opening detection switch) is input, it can be determined that the front frame 12 is in the open state.

When the front frame 12 is in the open state (the result of A1027 is “Y
It is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1028). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1028 is “Y”), the setting variable can be changed so that the setting value can be changed. Thus, the RAM in the setting variable state of step A1036-A1041.
Executes initialization processing (RAM clear processing) and processing during setting change. In this case, RA
The RAM area to be cleared in the M initialization process is the clear area # 1 in FIG. 5C. Therefore,
It is possible to eliminate the RAM abnormality.

When the front frame 12 (body frame) is not in the open state (in the case of the closed state)
(When the result of A1027 is “N”) or when the setting key switch 93 is off (A102
The result of 8 is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1029). The command of the setting change instruction to urge the player to change the setting is “N”) (A1029). The effect control device 300 having received the command of setting change instruction displays on the display device 41 a setting change instruction display prompting the player to change the setting. By the setting change instruction display, the setting key switch 93 is turned on in order for the player to change the setting (the result of A1028 is "Y"), and the RAM clear processing (A1036) at the setting change eliminates the RAM abnormality. it can.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes processing for prohibiting access to the RWM (A10
30) Wait until the power of the gaming machine is shut off.

Next, processing at the time of normal power on (power restoration) of step A1031-A1035 will be described.

The game control device 100 first saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized (
A1031). The area to be initialized is the clear area # 2 (random number area, control information area, game control stack area) of FIG. 5C. Here, in the control information area, a power failure inspection area,
It includes a checksum area and an area related to error fraud monitoring. In addition, the payout control device 200
A busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether the command can be received or not, is also cleared, and the status of the payout busy signal is not determined. After that, the game control apparatus 100 checks the area storing the gaming state in the RWM, and determines whether the gaming state is the high probability state (A1032).

Here, when the gaming state is not in the high probability state (the result of A1032 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 skips the processing of step A1033 and step A1034, and shifts to the processing of step A1035. Also, if the gaming state is a high probability state (A1
The result of 032 is "Y", and the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (A1033),
For example, the on (lighting) data of the high probability notification LED (third gaming state display unit 59, error indicator) provided in the collective display device 50 is saved in the segment area (A1034). And the command at the time of the power failure restoration corresponding to the processing number prepared in order to rationally execute the below-mentioned special figure game processing is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1035), step A1046 Transfer to processing.

Next, RAM initialization processing in the setting variable state of step A1036-A1041 (RAM
The clear process and the process during the setting change will be described.

The game control apparatus 100 first clears the clear target RAM area to 0 (A1036).
. When the RAM 111 c is normal (the result of A 1020 is “Y”), the RAM clear start address 2 is set in the RAM area to be cleared, so clear area # 2 in FIG. 5C.
It becomes. If the RAM 111 c is abnormal (the result of A 1020 is “N”), the RAM clear start address 1 is set, and thus the clear area # 1 in FIG. 5C is obtained. That is, RAM
When normal, the probability setting value area is not cleared, but when RAM is abnormal, the probability setting value area is also cleared.

Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1037). At this point, it is assumed that the front frame 12 is in the open state, the initial value of the security signal control timer (described later) for outputting the security signal is saved, and the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened. Make it possible to output what has been done to an external device (such as a hall computer). When the probability setting value area is cleared when the RAM is abnormal, the default value (for example, setting value 1) may be saved as an initial value in the probability setting value area.

Then, the game control apparatus 100 sets a probability setting value change in progress flag indicating that the setting changeable state in which the setting change is possible (that is, the setting change is in progress) (A1038).
Subsequently, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area as initial data at the time of changing the probability setting value (A1039), and the value of the probability setting value area is loaded. Save in the work probability setting value area as initial data at the time of change (A104
0). Then, the command in the probability setting change indicating that the setting variable state (during setting of the probability) is being transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1041), step A104
Move to processing of 6. By the command during the probability setting change, the effect control device 300 can recognize that the setting variable state (during the probability setting change).

Next, the process of RAM initialization (RAM clear) by the RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch, setting value change switch 102) in step A1042-A1045 will be described.

The game control apparatus 100 first sets the RAM clear start address 2 (A1042),
The RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A1043). Since the clear top address 2 is set, the RAM area RAM to be cleared is the clear area # 2 in FIG. 5C. For this reason, RAM initialization (operation of the RAM initialization switch (setting value change switch 102)
In the processing of RAM clear), the probability setting value area is not cleared.

Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1044). Here, the area to be initialized is, for example, an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the effect mode. And the command at the time of RAM initialization is the effect control device 300
It transmits to (effect control board) (A1045), and it transfers to processing of Step A1046.

It should be noted that the power failure recovery command sent in the process of step A1035 and step A1
The commands at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of 045 are a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, a decoration special drawing 1 reservation number command showing the number of holdings of special drawings 1 and 2, and a decoration special drawing 2 holding number Command, probability information command indicating the state of probability is included. In addition, depending on the state of power off or power on, if the special view variation display game is being executed at the time of power off, the recovery screen command, if it is waiting for the customer at power off, the customer waiting demo command And a power on command indicating that the power is on. Furthermore, a rendering mode information command indicating the state of the rendering mode, a rendering frequency information command, and a high probability frequency information command indicating the number of remaining games in the high probability status are included depending on the model. The command at the time of RAM initialization also includes a command for RAM initialization (a command for RAM clear). For example, the presentation control device 300 that has received the RAM initialization command (RAM clear command) displays a customer waiting demo on the display device 41, and initializes the RAM with the sound of the LED of the panel decoration device 46 or the like and the speaker (RAM Clear notification 3
Do for 0 seconds.

Further, the command at the time of power failure recovery and the command at the time of RAM initialization include a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) indicating setting value information which is information of setting values (probability setting values) of the gaming machine 10 Be The gaming control device 100 only needs to transmit the setting value information command to the effect control device 300 only once at the time of restoration (turning on) of the power supply, and thereafter, the effect control device 300 refers to the setting value information stored by itself. Effect control can be performed.

After the processing of steps A1035, A1041 and A1045, the game control apparatus 100 generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) as a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit. Start up (A104
6). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After executing the CTC activation process of step A1046, the gaming control apparatus 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, a predetermined register (CTC) in the random number generation circuit
Setting of code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in the update permission register
It is performed by the PU 111a. Further, setting of bit transposition pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also performed.

The bit transposition pattern is a method to replace the bit arrangement of the extracted random number (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and store it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after the bit transposition in the lower row) Is a pattern that determines

In the present embodiment, by replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, it may be set arbitrarily by the user.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number register 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and the corresponding various initial value random numbers (random numbers determining the big hit symbol (big hit symbol) Random number 1, big hit symbol random number 2), random number to determine small hit symbol (small hit symbol random number), random number to determine hit of common drawing (random number per hit), random number to determine hit symbol for common drawing (per symbol random number) Etc.) in a predetermined area of RWM (A 1048)
), And enable the interrupt (A1049). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in this embodiment is configured to change the initial value of the soft random number register every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing this, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, and to make it difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number.

Subsequently, the gaming control apparatus 100 executes an initial value random number updating process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated using the random number generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is C
A so-called "high-speed counter" updated based on a clock at a speed equal to or higher than the operating clock of the PU, and a jackpot symbol random number, a random number is CTC output with the same cycle as timer interrupt processing which is a processing unit of a program ( CTC (CTC) other than CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing
It is a "low speed counter" updated based on TC 2)).

In the jackpot symbol random number and the hit symbol random number, so-called "initial value changing method" is employed in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) every round of the random number. Each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or 1, or may be a random-type update in which all values within the range appear apart without overlapping until one round.
That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, the big hit symbol random number, and the hit random number is a random number updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process of step A1050, the game control apparatus 100 operates the power supply device 40.
Set the number of times the power failure monitoring signal input from 0 is read via the port and data bus and checked (A1051), and determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (A10)
52). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1052 is “N”), step A
Return to the initial value random number update process of 1050. That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the check (loop processing) of the power failure monitoring signal are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (A1049) before the initial value random number update process (A1050), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is initially performed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt process by being made to wait by the value random number update process. During the setting change (in the setting variable state), the processes of steps A1046, A1047, A1048, and A1050 related to the update of the initial value random number may not be performed.

In addition to the main processing, there is also a method of performing initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing in addition to the main processing in step A1050, and when such a method is adopted, the initial value random number is used in both. In order to avoid the execution of the update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update it to release the interrupt. On the other hand, when the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. Rather, it has the advantage of simplifying the main processing.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (result of A1052 is “Y”), the game control device 10
0 determines whether the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in the process of step A 1051 (A 1053). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal for the number of checks has not continued (the result of A1053 is "N"), the process returns to step A1052 to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.

In addition, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (result of A1053 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that the power failure has occurred, the game control device 100 interrupts once. (A1054) and outputs off data to all output ports (A105).
5).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection region check data 1 in the power failure inspection region 1 (A 1056), and saves the power failure inspection region check data 2 in the power failure inspection region 2 (A
A1057). Furthermore, a checksum calculation process is performed to calculate a checksum at the time of power supply interruption of the RWM (A1058), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1059).
). Finally, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1060), and the process waits until the power of the gaming machine is shut off.

As described above, by saving check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating a checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shutdown. It can be judged at the time of reinjection.

From the above, main control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and slave control means (disbursement control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. Standby control means for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for activation of the slave control device by delaying activation of the main control device when the power is turned on. And 100) and the blackout monitoring means (game control apparatus 100) for monitoring the occurrence of blackout in the predetermined standby time.

Further, the power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

In addition, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) is a RAM 111c capable of storing data,
An initialization operation unit (an initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization unit (game control device 100) that initializes data stored in the RAM 111c based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. And the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

Also, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111c after the standby time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, the game control apparatus 100 first designates register bank 1 as a register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM top address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main process to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process is equivalent to saving the register used in the main process. When timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 receives inputs from various sensors and switches, takes in signals,
That is, the input processing for reading the state of each input port is executed (A1303). further,
Solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 39b) based on output data set in various processes
And output processing for performing drive control of the actuator, etc. (A1304). When the signal of emission prohibition is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing,
By this output processing being performed, a signal of release permission is output, and the release permission signal can be set to the permission state.

Next, the gaming control device 100 performs random number update processing 1 (A1305) and random number update processing 2 (A1).
Execute 306). The random number update process 1 is a process for updating an initial value (start value) of a big hit symbol random number, a small hit symbol random number, a hit random number, and a hit symbol random number which is an object of the initial value random number update processing. The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Note that the random number updating process 1 and the random number updating process 2 may not be performed when the probability setting is being changed (setting variable state).
Thereafter, monitoring whether or not there is an input of a normal signal from the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 39a, and monitoring of errors (front frame or A winning opening switch / status monitoring process is performed to determine whether the glass frame is opened (A1307).

Next, the game control device 100 executes probability setting value change processing for changing the probability setting value (A1308). Subsequently, it is determined whether the probability setting is being changed (setting variable state) (A1309). Whether or not the probability setting change is in progress is under the probability setting value change flag (A103
It can be judged by 8). Next, it is determined whether or not probability setting confirmation is in progress (setting confirmation state) (A1310). If the flag in the probability setting value confirmation mode described later is set,
It can be determined that probability setting confirmation is in progress.

When the game control apparatus 100 does not change the probability setting or check the probability setting (A131
The result of 0 is “N”), and the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes is the payout control device 2
The payout command transmission process to be output to 00 is executed (A1311). Furthermore, special figure game processing which performs processing concerning a special figure fluctuation display game is executed (A1312), and next, common drawing game processing which performs processing concerning a common drawing fluctuation display game is executed (A1313). Game control device 10
0 is not necessary when the probability setting change is in progress (the result of A1309 is “Y”) or when the probability setting check is in progress (the result of A1310 is “Y”), the payout command transmission process (A
1311) The special figure game process (A1312) and the common drawing game process (A1313) are not executed, and the process proceeds to step A1314.

Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes segment LED editing processing which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying special game variation game display and various information related to the game to display desired content. (A1314).

Further, the game control apparatus 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process to check whether or not there is an abnormality by checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 (A1315). For example, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, when there is an abnormality, the magnet fraud occurrence flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag region. Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) is executed to check whether or not there is an abnormality by checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board (A1316). For example, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, when there is an abnormality, the board radio wave fraud occurrence flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag region.

After that, the game control apparatus 100 executes an external information editing process in which signals output to various external devices are set in the output buffer (A1317). Then, a state display edit output process is performed to edit and output the output data to the state display device 152 (A1318). In the state display editing output process, as the output data to the state display device 152, it is possible to calculate the character ratio, the payout rate, the number of discharged balls, and the like. In the status display edit output process, the checksum of the status display work area is calculated at the time of power on (power recovery), and if it does not match the checksum at power off, the status display work area and the status display You may clear the stack area. after that,
End the timer interrupt process. In addition, when timer interrupt processing returns, restoration of the interrupt disabled state and restoration of specification of the register bank are performed automatically.
Depending on U, processing for permitting an interrupt or processing for returning the specification of a register bank to register bank 0 may be performed after the external information editing processing.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (A1304) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the output process.

The game control apparatus 100 first outputs (resets) off data to the port 135 (see FIG. 3) that outputs segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1601).
Next, the data output to the solenoid output port 134 for outputting data of the special winning opening solenoid 39b is synthesized and output (A1602).

Then, the gaming control device 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit line of the batch display device (LED) 50 (A1603). Further, the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (A1604). The acquired data and external information data are combined (A1605), and the combined data is output to the fourth output port 136 for digit output / external information output (A1606). Thereafter, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (A1607), and the loaded data is output to the third output port 135 for segment output.
Output (A1608).

Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 loads and combines data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1609), and further combines the combined data and the output data of the release permission (A161).
0), the fifth output port 137 for the output of the external information and the release permission signal, of the finally synthesized data
Output to (A1611).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets off output data of probability setting value display (A161
2). The off output data is output data (blank data for turning off) during a period in which the probability setting value display is not performed. Then, it is determined whether the probability setting value display permission flag for permitting the display of the probability setting value is set (A1613). The probability setting value display permission flag is set in probability setting value changing processing described later.

When the probability setting value display permission flag is set (A16
The result of 13 is “Y”), load the probability setting value display data from the probability setting value display data area (A1614), load the loaded probability setting value display data to the probability setting value display output port (sixth output port 141) Output (A1615). When the probability setting value display permission flag is not set (the result of A1613 is “N”), the probability setting value display data is not loaded, and the off output data is output to the probability setting value display output port (sixth output port 141) Output to (A 161
5). Therefore, when the probability setting value display permission flag is set, the probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143, and when the probability setting value display permission flag is not set, the probability setting value display device 143 Turns off (blank display).

Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 (A1616). Thereafter, data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs a test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 (A1617).

Next, the game control device 100 loads and combines data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs a test signal to the test shooting test device, and the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 The synthesized data is output (A1618). Furthermore, the data output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal of the test shooting tester is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 ( A1619
). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 (A1620), the output process ends.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 loads test signal output data of the probability setting value (A1
621). Here, the display data itself of the probability setting value display device 143 (7-segment display), that is, the probability setting value display data of the probability setting value display data area is output as the test signal output data regarding the probability setting value. The test signal output data may be numerical data (1 to 6) representing set values, or may be output data of another form. Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A1622). When setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1622 is "Y"), the loaded data and setting key switch on information are combined (A1623), and the combined data is output to test signal output port 6 (A).
A1624). On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of the A162
N ”), the test signal output data of the probability setting value is output as it is to the test signal output port 6 (
A1624).

[Prize port switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning opening switch / status monitoring process. The winning opening switch / state monitoring process is executed in step A1307 in the timer interrupt process.

The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether probability setting change is in progress (setting variable state) (A2001). When the game control device 100 is not changing the probability setting (A 2001
Result is “N”), and it is determined whether or not the probability setting confirmation is being performed (setting confirmation state) (A20
02). If the probability setting check is not in progress (the result of A 2001 is “N”), the monitoring process from step A 2003 to A 2010 is executed as usual. On the other hand, when the probability setting change is in progress (the result of A2001 is "Y") or when the probability setting confirmation is in progress (the result of A2002 is "Y"), the glass frame 15 may be released. Since there is a possibility that the game ball can be put by hand in any winning opening and there is no point in performing monitoring processing etc., step A20
The process proceeds to step A2011 without executing the monitoring process and the like from 03 to A2010.

When the game control apparatus 100 is not in the process of changing the probability setting (the result of A2001 is “N”),
A winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the winning opening switches 39a (two pieces) in the special winning opening (special variation winning device 39) is prepared (A2003). Then, despite the fact that the special winning opening is not open, it monitors whether there is an incorrect winning at the special winning opening and executes a fraud & prize monitoring process for detecting a normal winning (A2004).

Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 prepares the winning opening monitor table 2 corresponding to the other of the large winning opening switches 39a (two pieces) in the special winning opening (special variation winning device 39) (A2005).
Then, the fraud & prize monitoring process is executed to monitor a fraudulent prize and to detect a proper prize (A2006).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37 (A2007). Then, the fraud & prize monitoring process is executed to monitor the fraud and to detect a proper prize (A2008). Subsequently, a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch for which the fraud monitoring is unnecessary is prepared (A2009). The winning opening switches that do not require fraud monitoring are the starting opening 1 switch 36 a and the winning opening switch (SW) 35 a of the general winning opening 35.

Next, the gaming control device 100 executes a winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number (
A2010). Then, a state scan counter for specifying in order which switch or signal of the plurality of switches whose state should be monitored and which signal is to be the target of the current monitoring is updated (A2011). The status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3.

Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2012). Then, a gaming machine state check process is executed to determine whether or not an error has occurred (A 2013)
. The details of the gaming machine state check process will be described later.

By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection etc. 1) monitoring is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of a state (shoot ball out error) based on a shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. Status scan counter value is 2
In this case, monitoring of the state (overflow error) based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state (disbursing error) based on the dispensing abnormality status signal is set.

Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 prepares a gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting a monitoring state according to the value of the state scan counter (A2014). Then, a gaming machine state check process is executed to determine whether or not an error has occurred (A2015).

By referencing the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 2, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, monitoring of the status (glass frame open error) based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch Is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (body frame open error, front frame open error) based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. Moreover, when the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state (frame radio wave improper) based on the frame radio wave illegal signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal Is set.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2016). And if the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (A2016
The result is “N”), and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is ended. In this case, there is no monitoring target of the state in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next.

In addition, when the value of the error scan counter is 0, the game control device 100 (A2
The result of 016 is "Y", prepares the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 (A 2017), and executes gaming machine status check processing to determine whether or not an error has occurred (A 2018)
.

By referencing the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection etc. (switch abnormality 2) Monitoring is set up. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is 1 to 3.

Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 executes a payout busy signal check process of setting a busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control apparatus 200 can start payout control (A2019) ), And finish the winning opening switch / status monitoring process.

Since the processing from step A2017 to A2019 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated at each timer interrupt is 0, it is executed at a rate of once for four timer interrupts. . That is, if the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, 1
Processing from A2017 to A2019 is performed every 6 ms.

In the fraud & prize monitoring process (A2008), the special winning opening (special variation winning device 39)
And count the number of winnings and the number of winning balls per combination (total number of winning balls) for the normal variation winning device 37, and further set information on the number of winnings and the number of winning balls per piece as a rendering command Good.
In the winning number counter update process (A2010), the winning number and winning ball number (total number of winning balls) for the starting winning hole 36 and the general winning hole 35 are counted and stored, and further, the winning number and bonus Information on the number of acquired balls may be set as a rendering command. In the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (FIG. 8), the out ball detection switch counts and stores the out ball number (discharged ball number), and further, the out ball number information is a rendering command (out ball number command) May be set as The payout rate is a ratio (ratio) of the total number of balls (the number of balls obtained for every role) to the number of discharged balls. The prize ratio is, for example, a ratio (%) of the number of prize balls (the number of earned balls by prize) obtained by winning in the large winning prize port out of the total prize balls (= so-called continuous prize ratio) is there. In the state display edit output process (A1318), as the output data to the state display device 152, it is possible to calculate the combination rate, the ball out rate, the number of discharged balls, and the like.

[Pachislot machine state check process]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gaming machine state check process. In the gaming machine state check process, step A 2013 in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG.
A2015 and A2018 are executed.

First, the game control apparatus 100 acquires a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2201). The status scan counter is set to a value in the range of 0 to 3 corresponding to the gaming status. The relationship between the state monitoring table and the state scan counter is as described in the winning hole switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the signal to be checked is on (
A2202). If the signal to be checked is not on (result of A2202 is "N"), that is, if the signal to be checked is off, prepare a state off flag as a state flag (A2203), and obtain the state off command of the target And prepare (A2204). Further, the target state off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2205). The state off flag indicates a normal state with respect to an error-based signal, and indicates a no touch state with respect to a touch switch signal.

On the other hand, when the signal to be checked is on (result of A2202 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a state on flag as a state flag (A2206), acquires the state on command of the object, and prepares. (A2207). Furthermore, the target state on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2208). The state on flag indicates an abnormal or incorrect state with respect to an error-based signal, and indicates a touch-on state with respect to a touch switch signal.

When the processing of step A2205 or step A2208 is completed, the game control apparatus 100
Determines whether the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the acquired signal (A2
209). If they match (the result of A2209 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2212. If they do not match (the result of A2209 is "N"), the acquired signal state is saved in the target signal control area (A2210), and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (A2209).
A2211).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A2212)
. Furthermore, it is determined whether the value of the updated state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (A2213). If the value of the updated state monitoring timer is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (result of A2213 is "N"), the gaming machine state check processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the value of the updated state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2213 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the state monitoring timer by −1 and the timer comparison value − Stay at the value of 1 (A2214). Furthermore, it is determined whether the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A2215). If they match (A 221
If the result of 5 is "Y", the gaming machine state check process is ended.

On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (the result of A2215 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. (A2216). Finally, an effect command setting process for setting an effect command is executed (A2217), and the gaming machine state check process is ended. The rendering command here is either a state off command or a state on command. If the state on command is an error system command, the effect control device 300 is made to start an error notification. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written to the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Probability setting value change processing
Next, the details of the probability setting value changing process (A1308) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting value change process.

The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not the probability setting value is being changed (setting variable state) (A2401). If the probability setting value is not being changed (the result of A2401 is "N"),
A probability setting value confirmation process for confirming the probability setting value is executed (A2402).

When the game control device 100 is changing the probability setting value (the result of A2401 is "Y")
If the probability setting value extinguishing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (A2403), and it is determined whether the probability setting value extinguishing timer is 0 or not (A2404). If the probability setting value extinguishing timer is 0 (the result of A2404 is “Y”), the probability setting value display permission flag is set (A2405),
It transfers to the process of step A2406. If the probability set value extinguishing timer is not 0 (A24
The result of 04 is “N”), and the process proceeds to step A2406 without doing anything.

Then, in step A2406, the game control device 100 determines whether the probability setting value has been changed (A2406). The probability setting value has been changed when the probability setting value changed flag described later is set. If the probability setting value has already been changed (A2
The result of step 406 is “Y”), and the process of setting change end in steps A 2416 to A 2421 is executed.

When the probability setting value has not been changed (the result of A2406 is “N
It is determined whether or not there is an input from the setting value change switch 102 (A2407). If there is no input from the setting value change switch 102 (the result of A2407 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2411.

When there is an input from the setting value change switch 102 (A240
The result of 7 updates the value of the working probability setting value area by 1 in the range of 0 to 5 (A24).
08). Thus, each time the setting value change switch 102 is operated, the value of the work probability setting value area is increased by one. When the setting value change switch 102 is operated after the value of the work probability setting value area becomes 5, the value of the work probability setting value area may return to 0.
The values 0 to 5 in the work probability setting value area correspond to six levels of probability setting values 1 to 6. The probability setting value is not limited to six levels.

Then, the game control device 100 saves the probability setting value display data corresponding to the operation probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area (A2409). Next, an initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability setting value extinguishing timer area (A2410). This initial value corresponds to a light off period (blank period) in which the probability setting value display device 143 is turned off (blank display).

As described above, when the probability setting value extinguishing timer is 0, by setting the probability setting value display permission flag, the probability setting value display data is the probability as the probability setting value (work probability setting value) during setting change. It is displayed on the set value display device 143, and when the probability set value extinguishing timer is not 0, the probability set value display device 143 is extinguished. The probability setting value extinguishing timer turns off only the predetermined extinguishing period after the setting value change switch 102 (setting value change button) is operated by the timer, so even if the setting is only one step (if the setting value is only 1) The probability setting value display device 143 can visually recognize that the setting value change switch 102 has been operated.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input of a touch switch signal from a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (A2411). If there is no touch switch signal input (the result of A 2411 is “N”), the probability setting value change processing ends. When the touch switch signal is input (the result of A2411 is "Y"), the value of the working probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the probability setting value area (A2412). The touch switch signal is a determination signal for determining the setting value. Then, values 0 to 5 corresponding to the determined probability setting value are stored in the probability setting value area.

A configuration is also possible in which the probability setting value is determined and stored in the probability setting value area when the setting key switch 93 is turned off or when a predetermined time elapses after the setting variable state. In addition, an operable confirmation button switch (operation means, operation unit) may be newly provided in the game control apparatus 100, and a signal from the confirmation button switch may be used as a confirmation signal for fixing the set value. . That is, instead of the touch switch operation, the operation of the newly provided confirmation button switch may be used as the confirmation operation.

Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 saves the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area (A2413). Thereby, the determined probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143. Then, a probability setting value changed flag indicating that the probability setting value has been changed is set (A2414), and a command of probability setting value change indicating that the probability setting value has been changed is the effect control device 300 (effect control Send to the board) (A241
5) End the probability setting value change process.

In the processing of the setting change end of step A2416 to A2421, the game control apparatus 10
First, it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is off (A2416). When the setting key switch 93 is in the on state (the result of A 2416 is “N”), the probability setting value changing process is ended. When the setting key switch 93 is off (result of A2416 is "Y")
Then, the RAM clear start address 3 is set (A2417), and the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A2418). The RAM area to be cleared here is the clear area # 3 in FIG. 5C.
It becomes. The clear area # 3 includes a control information area (area from the power failure inspection area 1 to the checksum area) and a game control stack area, and the probability setting value area and the random number area are excluded. The clear area # 3 is obtained by removing the random number area from the clear area # 2, and the random number updated during the setting change is not wasted. Clearing the RAM area to be cleared to 0 clears the information and flags used to change the settings, such as the information for the working probability setting value area, the probability setting value changing flag, and the probability setting value changed flag. Ru.

Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A2419). In addition, since it is at the end of the setting change, the initial value of the security signal control timer (described later) for outputting the security signal is saved, and the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened. Enable output to a computer etc.). Thereafter, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (A2420). Thereby, the probability setting value at the time of the end of the setting change is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 and maintained.

Next, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a probability setting change end command indicating that the probability setting change has ended to the effect control apparatus 300 (effect control board) (A2421), and the main process (A).
Referring back to FIG. 5B), the process proceeds to step A1049. The commands to be transmitted here are the model specification command described above, the decoration special drawing 1 reservation number command, the decoration special drawing 2 reservation number command, the probability information command, the setting value information command (probability setting value information command), and the probability setting change end Command (RAM initialization command may be used). Depending on the model, a rendering mode information command, a rendering frequency information command, and a high probability frequency information command are transmitted. The presentation control device 300 that has received the command to finish changing the probability setting, for example, displays a waiting for customer demonstration on the display device 41, and notifies of RAM initialization (RAM clear) by the sound of the panel decoration device 46 etc. and the speaker. Do for 30 seconds.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
Next, details of the probability setting value confirmation process (A2402) in the above-described probability setting value changing process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting value confirmation process.

The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode (setting value confirmation enabled state) which is the mode in which the probability setting value can be confirmed (A 2501). When the flag in the probability setting value confirmation mode described later is set, it can be determined that the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress. When in the probability setting value confirmation mode (the result of A 2501 is “Y”), the processing of step A 2509 and subsequent steps is executed.

When the gaming control device 100 is not in the probability setting value confirmation mode (the result of A2501 is “
N "), clear the probability setting value display permission flag (A2502). Then, it is determined whether or not a game is being played (A 2503). For example, if the variable display game is in progress or in the big hit state, it can be determined that the game is in progress. If the game is in progress (the result of A 2503 is “Y”), the probability setting value confirmation process is ended in order to make confirmation of the probability setting value impossible. When not playing (A
It is determined whether the result of 2503 is “N”) and the setting key switch 93 is on (A2)
504). If the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A 2504 is “N”), the probability setting value confirmation process is ended.

When the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A 2504 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets a probability setting value confirmation mode in-progress flag (A 2505). By this,
When the probability setting value is not being changed (setting variable state) (the result of A2401 is "N")
When the setting key switch 93 is turned on, a probability setting value confirmation mode (setting value confirmation enabled state) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed is set. Subsequently, the probability setting value display permission flag is set (A2
506). Thereby, the probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 based on the probability setting value display data loaded from the probability setting value display data area by the output process (FIG. 7).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the initial value in the security signal control timer area to enable the output of the security signal (A2507). When the set value is confirmed, a security signal is output, and it is possible to output the fact that the front frame 12 is opened or the like to an external device (such as a hall computer). The command under confirmation of the probability setting value is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2508), and the probability setting value confirmation processing is ended.

When the gaming control device 100 is in the probability setting value confirmation mode (the result of the A 2501 is “
Y "), it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A2509). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A2509 is “Y”), the probability setting value confirmation mode is continued, and the probability setting value confirmation probability setting value confirmation processing is ended.

When the setting key switch 93 is off (result of A2509 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 clears the probability setting value confirmation mode in-progress flag (A2510). Therefore, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the probability setting value confirmation mode ends. And
In order to prevent the probability setting value from being displayed on the probability setting value display device 143, the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (A2511). Subsequently, a command for ending the probability setting value confirmation indicating that the probability setting value confirmation has ended is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2
512).

Although the set value change switch 102 is configured to be usable also as a RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch) in the above description, a RAM initialization switch may be provided separately from the set value change switch 102. In this case, when the power is turned on (power recovery),
If the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch are on, the setting variable state (setting change state) is set, and if the setting key switch 93 is on and the RAM initialization switch is off, the setting confirmation state (setting value checkable state) If the setting key switch 93 is off and the RAM initialization switch is on, the RAM initialization (RAM clear) becomes possible, and the setting key switch 93
If the RAM initialization switch is off, the normal power on (power recovery) may be established. Furthermore, the setting value (setting) may be determined when the setting key switch 93 is turned off.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (A1312) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure game process. In the special view game process, the monitoring of the input of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the control of the entire processing related to the special view variation display game, and the setting of the display of the special view are performed.

The game control apparatus 100 first executes start opening switch monitoring processing for monitoring winning of the start opening 1 switch 36a and the start opening 2 switch 37a (A2601). In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when the game ball wins in the starting winning opening 36 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers etc.) are extracted, and the special drawing fluctuation display based on the winnings A game result pre-determination is performed in which the game result based on the winning is determined in advance before the start of the game. Note that
Details of the starting opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the gaming control device 100 executes a special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602).
In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the gaming ball with the count switch 39a provided in the special variation winning device 39 is monitored. The details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates −1 if the special feature game processing timer is not 0 (1
Only subtract) (A2603). The special view game processing timer is clocked by an interruption period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by -1 updating. In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to zero. Next, it is determined whether the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). When the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is “N”), it moves to the processing of step A2619.

If the game control device 100, the special figure game processing timer is 0 (result of A2604
Y "), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is set in the register (A2605) . Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606).
Subsequently, a subroutine call according to the special figure game process number is made, and the game branching process according to the special figure game process number is executed (A2607).

When the game processing number is "0" at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100
Special figure usual processing which monitors the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game, sets the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, the setting of information necessary for performing the special figure fluctuation processing, etc. Execute (A2608). The details of the special view ordinary processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game processing number is "1" at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100
The special figure in-process process is executed to set the stop display time of the special figure, the information necessary for performing the special figure display process, and the like (A2609). In addition, about the details of the process during special figure change, Figure 2
8 will be described later.

When the game processing number is "2" at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100
If the game result of the special view variation display game is a big hit, to set the fan fare command according to the type of big hit, set the fan fare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern of each big hit, to perform processing during fan fare / interval The special figure display processing is performed to set the information necessary for (A2610). For example, in the special view display process, if the result of the special view variation display game is a big hit, set necessary information such as a big hit fanfare command (render command), a big hit fanfare time, a probability information command (low probability), The processing number "3" related to the fanfare / in-interval processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area. If the result of the special view variation display game is a small hit, set the necessary information such as small hit fanfare command (render command) and small hit fanfare time, and set the processing number “7” related to the small hit fanfare middle processing Save to the special figure game processing number area. If the result of the special figure variation display game is not a big hit or a small hit, the processing number "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "3" at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100
A fanfare / interval process is performed to set the opening time of the special winning opening and update the number of times of opening, and to set information necessary for performing the special winning opening process (A2611). For example, in the fanfare / interval process, necessary information such as a round command (rendering command) corresponding to a round of round game to be executed and an opening time of a big winning opening is set, and a processing number related to a big winning opening opening process. Set "4" and save in the special figure game process number area.

When the game processing number is "4" at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100
If the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the interval command, if it is the final round, the processing to set the ending command or the big winning opening opening to set the information necessary for performing the big winning opening residual ball processing etc. The middle processing is executed (A2612). For example, in the special winning opening open process, set necessary information such as interval command and ending command as a production command, set the processing number "5" related to the special winning opening residual ball processing, and set the special figure game processing number area Save to

When the game processing number is "5" at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100
If the big hit round is the final round, the process to set the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, the big winning opening residual ball processing to set the information necessary to perform the big hit end processing, etc. Execute (A2613). For example, in the special winning opening residual ball processing, if it is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, and the processing number "3" related to the fanfare / in-interval processing is set to the special figure game processing number area Save. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, and the processing number "6" related to the big hit end process is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "6" at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100
Special figure Executes a big hit end process which performs setting of information required to execute normal process etc. (A
2614). For example, in the big hit end processing, the necessary information such as the probability state after the big hit state end and the general charge support state (short time state) after the big hit state is set, and the probability state and time short state etc. It sets as a command), sets the process number "0" which concerns on a special figure normal process, and it saves in a special figure game process number area | region. The probability information command includes the probability state after the big hit state end (high probability / low probability), and the number of continued games in the general charge support state (short time state) after the big hit state (time reduction fluctuation number, number of times of power support) Information etc. is included.

When the game processing number is "7" at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100
The small hit fanfare medium processing is executed to set the open time of the special winning opening, update the number of open times, set the information necessary for performing the small hit, and the like (A2615). For example, in the small hit fanfare medium process, necessary information such as the small hit opening time of the big winning opening is set, and the process number "8" related to the small hit middle process is set and saved in the special figure game process number area.

When the game processing number is "8" at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100
Perform the small hit and middle hit process to set the information required to perform the small hit residual ball process (A2
616). For example, in small hit middle processing, necessary information such as small hit remaining ball processing time is set, and processing number "9" concerning big winning opening remaining ball processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "9" at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100
Execute the small hit remaining ball processing which performs setting etc. of information necessary to perform the small hit end processing (A
2617). For example, in the small hit residual ball processing, necessary information such as a small hit ending time is set, a processing number "10" related to the special figure small hit end processing is set, and the special figure 1 game processing number area is saved.

When the game processing number is "10" at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a small hitting end process for setting information necessary for executing the special view ordinary process, etc. (
A2618).

When the processing based on the special view game process number is completed, the gaming control apparatus 100 prepares a special view 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special view 1 display 51 (A2619), and then the special view 1 display The symbol variation control process according to 51 is executed (A2620). And after preparing the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A2621), the symbol fluctuation control processing concerning the special figure 2 display 52 is executed (A2622). The details of the symbol change control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special view game process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process.

The game control apparatus 100 first prepares a prize monitoring table for the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), executes hard random number acquisition processing (A2702), and starts the starting winning opening 36.
It is determined whether or not there is a prize winning (A2703). When there is no winning a prize winning opening 36 (
If the result of A2703 is "N", the processing of step A2709 and thereafter is executed. On the other hand, when there is a winning on the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is in the short (in the general power support state) (A2704).

When it is determined that the game control device 100 is not in the special figure time short (in the general power support state) (A
The result of 2704 is “N”), and the processing after step A2707 is executed. On the other hand, if it is in the special view time short (during general power support state) (result of A2704 is "Y"), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared as a rendering command (A2705), and rendering command setting processing is executed ( A2706).

That is, in the case of the universal power support state (time saving state), regardless of the probability state (high probability state / low probability state) of the variable display game, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared and the effect command setting process is executed. . In the case of the present embodiment, the player does not win the prize unless the driver hits the start winning opening 36 left, and does not win the normal fluctuation prize device 37 unless the driver hits the right. In addition, the game ball does not pass through the common view start gate 34 unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the general electric power support state (time saving state), right-handed driving is more advantageous than left-hand driving, but there is a prize in the start winning opening 36 during the general electric power support state (that is, (In the case of left-handed driving), transmits a right-handling instruction notification command to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 instructs the right-handed driving (
Warning) is executed by the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and then executes the special view starting opening switch common processing (A2).
708). Then, a prize monitoring table for the second starting winning opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), hard random number acquisition processing is executed (A2710), and whether or not there is a winning for the second starting winning opening It is determined (A2711). If there is no prize for the 2nd start winning entry (
If the result of A2711 is "N", the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended.

On the other hand, when there is a winning on the second start winning opening (result of A2711 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal electric winning combination (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is in operation. That is, it is determined whether or not the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is activated to be in an open state where winning of the gaming ball is possible (A2712). When the ordinary motorized part is in operation (Result of A2712 is “Y”
), The process proceeds to step A2714.

On the other hand, when the ordinary motorized role is not in operation (the result of A2712 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the common electric charge is in progress (A2713). If the number of incorrect winnings on the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraud occurrence determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that the general electric power is in the process of being created. In the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the gaming ball can not be won in the closed state, and the gaming ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball is in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or injustice occurs, and when there is a game ball which has won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of incorrect prizes. Then, when the number of incorrect winnings thus counted is equal to or more than a predetermined number (upper limit value), it is determined that the fraud is in progress.

After the game control apparatus 100 prepares a table for setting information of suspension by the second start winning opening (normal variation winning device 37) when the common electric power fraud is not occurring (result of A2713 is "N") (A2714) The special view starting opening switch common processing is executed (A2715), and the starting opening switch monitoring processing is ended. Also, when it is determined in A2713 that a common power charge is in progress (the result of A2713 is “Y”), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second
Do not generate more starting memory.

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
Next, the special view starting port switch common processing in the starting port switch monitoring processing (A2708, A
The details of 2715) will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special view starting opening switch common process. The special view starting opening switch common processing is processing that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a.

The game control apparatus 100 first outputs the information on the number of winnings on the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36 a and the starting opening 2 switch 37 a to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The number of starting opening signal outputs is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (A2903). If the number of outputs does not overflow (result of A2903 is "N"),
Save the updated value in the RWM start opening signal output frequency area (A2904), step A
Shift to processing of 2905. On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (the result of A2903 is “Y”), the process of step A2905 is performed. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start opening signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the value after updating becomes “0” by +1 updating, and it is determined that the number of times of output overflows.

Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 determines whether the number of to-be-updated special views (number of starting memories) corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit. It is determined (A2905). If the number of to-be-updated special views is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “N”), the special view starting port switch common processing is ended. In addition, when the number of to-be-updated special views is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of to-be-updated special views (to-special number 1 or special number 2) is updated by 1 Then (A2906), the target starting opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of start ports to be monitored and the number of special drawing reservations (A2908), and stores the big hit random number prepared in step A2805 as the big hit random number of RWM. Save to the area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random numbers of the starting opening switch to be monitored are extracted and prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a winning on the start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2912). When it is not a prize for the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2912 is "N"
), The process proceeds to step A2915. On the other hand, if it is a winning on the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2912 is "Y"), small hit symbol random numbers are extracted and prepared (A2913),
It saves in the small hitting design random number storage area of RWM (A2914).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (A2915), and executes the special view holding information determination process (A2)
916). Then, a decoration special drawing reserve number command corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored and the special figure reserve number is prepared as an effect command (A2917), and an effect command setting process (A291)
8) is executed, and the special view starting opening switch common processing ends.

Here, the game control apparatus 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 and the start winning area of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. A start storage means is provided for storing a predetermined number at the upper limit as start storage. Also,
The start storage means (game control device 100) stores various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) as a first start memory with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball on the second starting winning opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory with a predetermined number as the upper limit.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, the details of the special view holding information determination process (A2916) in the starting opening switch common process will be described. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special map hold information determination process.
The special view reservation information determination process is a prefetching (pre-judging) process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start storage prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game based on the corresponding start storage.

The game control apparatus 100 first checks the starting opening winning flag saved in step A2907, and determines whether or not it is a winning to the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A 300
1). When it is not a prize for the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3001 is “N”), step A3
Transfer to processing of 004. On the other hand, if it is a winning on the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3001 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (in the general public support state) (A300
2).

If the special control time is short (in the power transmission support state) (the result of A3002 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the special view hold information determination process. On the other hand, if it is not in the time of special plot (A3
Whether the result of 002 is “N”) or not is determined whether the jackpot is medium or small (A30)
03). If the jackpot is medium or small (medium as a result of A 3003 is “Y”), the processing for determining the special feature reservation information ends.

On the other hand, when the big game control device 100 is not in the big hit medium or small hit (the result of A3003 is “N”), the big hit decision processing which decides whether it is the big hit depending on whether the big hit random number value matches the big hit decision value. Is executed (A3004). And if the judgment result is a big hit (
The result of A3005 sets the big hit design random number check table which corresponds to the starting opening switch of object (A3006), acquires stop design information which corresponds to the big hit design random number which was prepared at step A2910 ( A3007), The process proceeds to step A3014.

When the determination result is not a big hit (the result of A3005 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not it is a winning to the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (A3008). If it is not a winning on the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3008 is "N"), the stop symbol information of out is set (A3013), it moves to the processing of step A3014.

If the game control device 100 is a winning on the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3008 is “Y
"), A small hit determination process is performed to determine whether the small hit is based on whether the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value (A3009). And if the judgment result is not a small hit (A30
The result of 10 is “N”), set the stop symbol information of the off (A3013), step A3
It shifts to the processing of 014. On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (the result of A3010 is “Y
"), Set the small hit symbol random number check table (A3011), step A143
The stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A is acquired (A3012), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares as a rendering command a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to a target starting opening switch and stop symbol information (A3014), and executes a rendering command setting process (A3015). Next, special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed (A3016), and variation pattern setting process for setting a variation aspect of the special figure variation display game is executed (A3017) ).

Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 prepares as a performance command a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command corresponding to a first half fluctuation number indicating a first half fluctuation pattern and a second half fluctuation number indicating a second half fluctuation pattern in a fluctuation pattern of a special figure fluctuation display game (A3018 ), The rendering command setting process is performed (A3019), and the special map hold information determination process is ended. The special figure information setting process in step A3016 and the variation pattern setting process in step A3017 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure routine process. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written to the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

With the above processing, the prefetch pattern command including the result of the special pattern fluctuation display game based on the start memory of the prefetch target and the prefetch fluctuation pattern command including the information of the fluctuation pattern in the special pattern fluctuation display game based on the start memory are prepared And sent to the effect control device 300. Thereby, the effect control of the result related information (whether or not a big hit or the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is performed before the start timing of the special view fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The player can be notified of the result related information prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game by changing the decoration special view start memory display that can be notified to the device 300, in particular, displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as start storage in the start storage means (game control device 100) before execution of the variable display game based on the start storage (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained) Etc.) make a pre-judging means. It should be noted that the time when the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the starting winning combination where the starting memory is generated but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played Good.

[Big winning opening switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening switch monitoring process.

The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “4”, that is, whether or not the special winning opening is being processed (A3101). When the special winning opening open process is being performed (the result of A3101 is “Y”), the process moves to the process of step A3105. If the special winning opening is not being processed (the result of A3101 is "N"), the value of the special figure game processing number is "5", that is, whether the special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress. Determine (A3102
).

If the game control device 100 is in the process of playing the big winning opening remaining ball (result of A3102 is "Y"
And the process of step A3105. In addition, when the special winning opening remaining ball processing is not in process (A
It is determined whether the result of 3105 is "N" and the value of the special figure game process number is "8", that is, whether the small hit is being processed (A3103). If you are processing during a small hit (A310
The result of 4 moves on to the processing of step A3105. If the small hit is not being processed (the result of A3103 is "N"), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "9", that is, the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress ( A3104). Since the special figure game process number does not shift next until the special figure game process timer becomes 0, it is possible to check the progress of the game by the special figure game process number.

If the game control device 100 is not in the small ball remaining ball processing (result of A3104 is "N")
, The special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. In addition, when small hitting remaining sphere processing is under (A31
The result of 04 is “Y”), and the process moves to the process of step A3105. Then, the winning counter is set to 0 (A3105), and the special winning opening switch 1 (one large winning opening switch 39a
It is determined whether or not there is an input in (A3106).

If there is no input to the large winning opening switch 1 game control device 100 (result of A3106 is "
It is determined whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the other special winning opening switch 39a) (N3). Also, when there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (result of A3106 is "Y"), prepare a special winning opening count command as a rendering command (A3107),
The effect command setting process (A3108) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (
A3109) It is determined whether there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the other special winning opening switch 39a) (A3110).

When the game control device 100 does not have an input on the special winning opening switch 2 (the result of A3110 is "
N "), it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114). When the special winning opening switch 2 has an input (the result of A3110 is "Y"), the special winning opening count command is prepared as a rendering command (A3111), and a rendering command setting process (A3112) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3113), and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114).

When the value of the winning counter is 0 (the result of A3114 is “Y”)
) Ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process. Also, when the value of the winning counter is not 0 (
Whether the result of A3114 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening residual ball processing is under (A311
5). If the special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress (the result of A3115 is “Y”), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended, and the special winning opening residual ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3115 is “N”),
It is determined whether small hit residual ball processing is in progress (A3116).

When the game control device 100 is in the small ball remaining ball processing (result of A3116 is "Y")
Ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process, and the small hit residual ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3116 is "N"), the value (1 or 2) of the winning counter is added to the special winning opening count number (A31
17), the winning opening count number is the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round. For example, “9
") It is judged whether or not it becomes more than (A3118).

In the case where the special winning opening count number is not the upper limit value or more (A31
The result of 18 is "N", and ends the special winning opening switch monitoring processing. If the special winning opening count is equal to or higher than the upper limit (the result of A3118 is "Y"), the special winning opening count is kept at the upper limit (A3119), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (A3120), it is determined whether the small hit is being processed (A3121).

If the game control device 100 is not processing during the small hit (the result of A 3121 is “N”), the big winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended, and when processing during the small hit is in progress (the result of A 3121 is “Y
"), Save the small hit opening end value in the special winning opening control pointer area (A3122)
, The special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. As a result, the special winning opening is closed and one round ends.

[Special figure usual processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process (A2608) in the special figure game process will be described.
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special view ordinary processing.

The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether the number of special views 2 reservations (the second start memory number) is 0 (A3201). If the special figure 2 pending number is 0 (the result of A3201 is "Y"), it is determined whether the special figure 1 pending number (first start storage number) is 0 or not (A3205). Then, when the number of special drawing 1 reservations is 0 (the result of A3205 is “Y”), it is judged whether or not the customer waiting demo is started (A3209), and the customer waiting demo is not started (A3209) The result of “N” sets a customer waiting demonstration flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration state (state waiting for a customer demonstration) is in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (A3210).

Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command as a presentation command (
A3211) A rendering command setting process is performed (A3212), and "0" relating to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (A3213). On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo has been started in step A3209 (the result of A3209 is "Y"), "0" relating to the special processing is also set as the processing number (A3213). Thereafter, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A3214), and the variation symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (A3215). Then, save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3216)
, Special figure usually end processing.

Thus, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted when the special drawing 1 holding number (first start memory number) and the special drawing 2 holding number (second starting memory number) is 0, and the customer waiting demo command is received. The effect control device 300 performs setting for displaying the customer waiting demo on the display device 41 or the like. The game control apparatus 100 may be configured to transmit the customer waiting demo command only when the touch switch signal from the touch switch of the operation handle 24 is an off signal.

In addition, when the game control device 100, special figure 2 reservation number is not 0 (result of A3201 “N
"), Execute special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3202), prepare decoration special figure reservation number command (decorative special figure 2 reservation number command) corresponding to special figure 2 reservation number as presentation command (A3203
), The effect command setting process is executed (A3204), and the special view normal process is ended.

In addition, if the game control device 100, special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (result of A3205 N
), Execute special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (A3206), prepare decoration special figure reservation number command (decorative special figure 1 reservation number command) corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number as a production command (A3207
), The effect command setting process is executed (A3208), and the special view normal process is ended.

As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) is executed when the special figure 2 pending number is not 0 by checking the special figure 2 pending number before the special figure 1 pending number check. The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game. In other words, the game control device 100 is the second start storage means (game control device 100)
If there is a second start memory, the variable control game based on the second start memory is executed as a priority control means for prioritizing the variable display game based on the first start memory.

[Special figure 1 change start processing]
Next, the details of the special view 1 fluctuation start process (A3206) in the special view normal process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special view 1 change start process. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game.

The game control device 100 saves a special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (A3401). Subsequently, the big hit flag 1 setting processing for setting the shift information and the big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a big hit is executed (A3402). Details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (pattern information) (A3403). The details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process will be described later. Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 executes a special figure information setting process of setting special figure information that is a parameter for setting a variation pattern (A3404).

Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A3405 ). After that, the game control apparatus 100 executes a fluctuation pattern setting process of setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the special view 1 fluctuation display game (A3406).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes a fluctuation start information setting process of setting information on the fluctuation start of the special view 1 fluctuation display game (A3407), and ends the special view 1 fluctuation start process. In the variation start information setting process, the variation time value corresponding to the variation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired, and saved in the special view game processing timer area. Then, with regard to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number is prepared as a rendering command, and the effect command setting processing is performed.

Then, the game control apparatus 100 sets "1" related to the special figure variation process as the process number (A3408), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3409).

Then, the game control apparatus 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3410), and saves a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special view 1 in the test signal output data area (A3411). After that, save the in-fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A3412), and select the initial value of the blinking control timer (special figure 1 indicator 51 blink period timer) in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area
For example, 100 ms is set (A 3413). Subsequently, an initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 1 variation start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) in the special figure normal process will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special view 2 change start process. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and the process similar to the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. It is something to do.

The game control device 100 first executes the type of the special view variation display game to be executed (here, the special view 2).
The special figure 2 fluctuation flag which shows is saved in the fluctuation design distinction flag territory (A3501). Subsequently, the big hit flag 2 setting processing for setting the shift information and the big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit is executed (A3502).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process according to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (pattern information) (A 3503). Further, special drawing information setting processing for setting special drawing information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is executed (A3504). Subsequently, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, is prepared (A3505).

After that, the game control apparatus 100 executes a fluctuation pattern setting process of setting a fluctuation pattern of the special view 2 fluctuation display game (A3506). And the fluctuation start information setting processing which sets the information of fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation indication game is executed (A3507). In the variation start information setting process, the variation time value corresponding to the variation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired, and saved in the special view game processing timer area. Then, for the special figure 2 variation display game, prepare the variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number as a rendering command,
Perform rendering command setting processing.

Next, the game control apparatus 100 first sets "1" related to the special figure variation process as the process number (A3508), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3509).

Then, the game control apparatus 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3510), and saves a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area (A3511). After that, save the in-fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A 3512), and select the initial value of the blinking control timer (special figure 2 indicator 52 blink timer) in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area
For example, 100 ms is set (A3513). Subsequently, an initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 2 variation start process is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting processing]
Next, details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special view 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

First, the gaming control device 100 saves misplacement information in the small hit flag area (A360
1) The shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (A3602). Next, load and prepare a big hit random number from RWM special view 1 big hit random number storage area (for number of reservations 1) (A 360
3) Clear the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) to 0 (A 3604). The one for reserve number is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special drawing start storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the first in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a big hit determination process is performed to determine whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not according to whether it is a big hit (A3605).

If the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3605) is a big hit (result of A3606 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 overwrites the big hit information in the big hit flag 1 area where the outlier information is saved in step A3602. Save (A3607), and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3605) is not a big hit (A
A small hit determination process is performed to determine whether the result of 3606 is "N") or a small hit according to whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value (A3608).

When the determination result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is a small hit (the result of A3609 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 performs the small hit information in the small hit flag area where the outlier information is saved in step A3601. Overwrite and save (A3610), and the big hit flag 1 setting process is ended. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the small hit judgment processing (A3608) is not a small hit (A3
The result of 609 ("N") ends the big hit flag 1 setting processing while saving the outlier information in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. Thus, in the present embodiment,
The result of the special view 1 variable display game is one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “deteriorated”.
[Big hit flag 2 setting processing]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special view 2 change start process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process.
In this processing, processing similar to the processing in the big hit flag 1 setting processing shown in FIG. 20 is performed for the second start storage.

First, the gaming control device 100 saves misplacement information in the big hit flag 2 area (A37
01). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) of RWM and prepared (A 3702), the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A3703). It should be noted that the one for reserve number is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special drawing start storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the first in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a big hit determination process is performed to determine whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not according to whether it is a big hit (A3704).

If the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is a big hit (the result of A3705 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 overwrites the big hit information in the big hit flag 2 area where the outlier information is saved in step A3701. Save (A3706), and end the big hit flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is not a big hit (A
The result of 3705 is “N”), and the big hit flag 2 setting processing is ended while the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special view 2 variable display game is either “big hit” or “losing”.

[Big hit judgment processing]
Next, the big hit judgment processing in the big hit flag 1 setting processing and the big hit flag 2 setting processing etc (
The details of A3605 and A3704) will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot determination process. The big hit determination process is a process common to the big hit determination process in the other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3004 of the special view suspension information determination process.

The game control apparatus 100 first sets a table (upper limit determination value table) of upper limit determination values corresponding to the probability setting value (A3801). The upper limit determination value table is for determining the upper limit determination value according to the probability setting value for each of the high probability state and the low probability state. Then, the lower limit judgment value of the jackpot judgment value is set (A3802), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower judgment value (A3803). Note that being a big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit judgment value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is not less than the lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and not more than the upper judgment value which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

If the value of the target jackpot random number of the game control device 100 is less than the lower limit judgment value (A380
The result of 3 is “Y”, and the determination result is set to “outside” (other than the big hit) (A3808), and the big hit determination process is ended.

Also, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (A3
It is determined whether the result of 803 is “N”) and the occurrence probability of the big hit is the high probability state (probability state) (A3804). And when it is a high probability state (the result of A3804 is “Y”
And upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value using the upper limit judgment value table (A3805). On the other hand, when it is not in the high probability state (the result of A3804 is “N”), the upper limit judgment value in the low probability is set corresponding to the probability setting value using the upper limit judgment value table (A
3806).

After setting the upper limit judgment value of the value of the big hit random number, the gaming control apparatus 100 determines whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (A3807). If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3807 is "Y"), a deviation (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A3808). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (
The result of A3807 is “N”), and a big hit is set as the judgment result (A3809). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination process is ended.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the small hitting determination process (A3608) in the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in the other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3009 of the special view suspension information determination process.

The game control apparatus 100 first sets a small hitting upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (A
3901). Then, it is determined whether the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (A 3902). Note that being a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit judgment value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is less than the determination value, it is determined that the small hit.

Naturally, the range of small hit judgment values (between the small hit lower judgment value and the small hit upper judgment value) is the above-mentioned big hit judgment in order to avoid that the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game becomes a small hit and a big hit. It does not overlap with the range of values (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In the present embodiment,
The small hit random number is not uniquely provided, and the big hit random number is used for the small hit determination, but it is also possible to provide a unique small hit random number.

When the value of the jackpot random number of the target (special figure 1) is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (result of A3902 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 sets a gap as a judgment result (A3904),
The small hit determination process ends.

In addition, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (result of A3902 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100, the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) is the small hit upper limit judged value It is determined whether it is larger (A3903). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3903 is “Y”), the deviation is set as the judgment result (A3904)
. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3903 is “
N "), a small hit is set as the determination result (A3905). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process is ended.

[Big hit probability, small hit probability]
24 (A) (B) (C) show the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the special figure fluctuation display game determined as a result of the above-mentioned big hit judgment processing (FIG. 22) and the small hit judgment processing (FIG. 23). Each setting (
It is a table illustrated for each setting value).

The example of FIG. 24A shows the case where the big hit probability and the small hit probability are different for each setting (each set value). The big hit probability (at the low probability and high probability) and the small hit probability become higher as the set value becomes larger (the higher setting), and the larger the set value, the more likely a big hit occurs, which is advantageous to the player. The jackpot probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the upper limit judgment value and the lower limit judgment value in FIG. 22 by the range of the value of the big hit random number. The jackpot probability can be changed according to the set value by changing the lower limit judgment value or the range of the value of the jackpot random number according to the set value in addition to the upper limit judgment value.
Alternatively, only one of the low probability big hit probability and the high probability big hit probability may be configured to increase as the set value increases. By changing the big hit probability and the small hit probability according to the setting (set value), the player has the pleasure of estimating the setting (set value) from the big hit probability and the small hit probability, and the interest of the game is improved.

In the example of FIG. 24B, the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the settings 1, 2, 3 (set values 1, 2, 3) and the settings 4, 5, 6 (set values 4, 5, 6) are the same. It is set. In the settings 1 to 3 or the settings 4 to 6, the big hit probability and the small hit probability become higher as the setting value becomes larger (the setting becomes higher). In the example of FIG. 24 (B), it is more difficult for the player to estimate the setting (setting value) from the big hit probability and the small hit probability than in the case of FIG. 24 (A), and the player can be prevented from getting bored.

In the example of FIG. 24C, the jackpot probability (at the time of low probability and at the time of high probability) regardless of the setting (setting value)
And the small hit probability is the same. In this case, the player estimates the setting (setting value) from other setting determination elements.

Other setting discriminator elements include a probability change rush rate (described later), the number of continuation of general support after a big hit (described later), the number of continued definite change conditions in the ST machine, the number of big hit rounds (round number upper limit), There are a variation pattern (variation time value) of the figure variation display game, various kinds of time (stop display time, fanfare time, etc.) set in the special figure game processing. The player can estimate the setting value from the setting discriminator by changing the probability that the predetermined content of the setting discriminator is selected for each setting value.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3403) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (A4001).
If it is a big hit (the result of A4001 is "Y"), the big hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for number of reservations 1) (A4002). Next, a special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (A4003).

Subsequently, the stop symbol number corresponding to the big hit symbol random number loaded is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4004). The type of special result (big hit type) by this processing
Is selected.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A4
005), The stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4006). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 1 display 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A4007).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires time shortening determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
It saves in the time shortening judgment data area (A4008). The time shortening determination data includes information on the presence or absence of the general-purpose power support state (time saving state) after the end of the big hit state.

Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 saves presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4009). Then, the game control device 100 prepares an ornament special drawing 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4018).

The effect mode shift information is information for shifting the effect mode. The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a big hit (the result of A 4001 is “Y”) and is used in the big hit end process. That is, it is possible to shift the effect mode on the occasion of a big hit by the effect mode shift information. In addition, as described above, the effect mode transition information is set according to the stop pattern pattern of the big hit (probable variation big hit symbol / normal big hit pattern or not etc), so the type of big hit symbol (type of big hit), big hit end The transition destination of the effect mode to be shifted later will change. Further, as described above, the effect mode transition information is set according to the probability state, so
The transition destination of the rendering mode is also affected by whether or not the special figure high probability state (probable change state) is currently underway.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4001 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the small hit flag is a small hit (A4010), and the case of a small hit (A4010)
The result of A4011 loads a small hit symbol random number from the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (A4011). Next, set the special figure 1 small hit symbol table (A4
012) The stop symbol number corresponding to the small hit symbol random number loaded is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4013).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number,
The game is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4014), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (A4015). The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a small hit (the result of A 4010 is “Y”), and the effect mode can be shifted in response to a small hit. Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A40
18).

If the small hit flag is not a small hit (the result of A4010 is "N"), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4016) and the off stop symbol pattern is stopped symbol pattern Save in the area (A4017), and prepare a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4018). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

Thereafter, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (A4019), and a rendering command setting process is executed (A4020). This decoration special drawing command is the effect control device 30
Sent to 0. Then, save the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4021), clear 0 of the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for number of reservations 1) (A4022), and special figure 1 small hit Clear 0 the symbol random number storage area (for number of reservations 1) to 0 (A40
23) The special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is ended.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A 3503) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (A4101).
If the jackpot is a big hit (result of A4101 is "Y"), the jackpot symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for number of reservations 1) (A4102). Next, special figure 2 big hit design table is set (A4103). Subsequently, the stop symbol number corresponding to the big hit symbol random number loaded is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (A4104). This process selects the type of special result (the type of big hit).

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table (A4
105) A stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4106). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 2 display 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A4107).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires time shortening determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
It saves in the time shortening judgment data area (A4108). The time shortening determination data includes information on the presence or absence of the general-purpose power support state (time saving state) after the end of the big hit state.

Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4109). The effect mode transition information here is a big hit case (
The result of A4101 is set to "Y" and used in the big hit end process. Then, the game control device 100 prepares the decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4112
).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A 4101 is “N”), the gaming control apparatus 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (A 4110
), The off stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4111), and the decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4112). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

Thereafter, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (A4113), and a rendering command setting process is executed (A4114). This decoration special drawing command is the effect control device 30
Sent to 0. Then, save the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4115) and clear 0 of the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4116) and the special figure 2 stop symbol End the setting process.

[An example of special figure big hit design allotment]
FIG. 27 is a table illustrating the jackpot symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) of the special view variation display game controlled by the special view game process described above, for each setting.

FIG. 27 illustrates a jackpot symbol number 1 to 6 (stop symbol number) indicating the type of jackpot and a jackpot symbol table defining the distribution ratio for each setting. As shown in FIG. 27, the distribution ratio of the jackpot symbol number (type of jackpot, symbols 1 to 6) can be changed according to the setting (set value), and the probability change rush rate becomes higher as the set value becomes larger. It is advantageous. In addition, a probability change rush rate is a ratio in which the probability change big hit symbol which the probability state after the big hit ends becomes high probability to all the symbols.
In addition, the number of times of general support after the big hit ends is larger as the setting value is larger in settings 1 to 3 or 4 to 6, especially with respect to the normal big hit (the probability state after the big hit is low probability) growing. Setting 1, 2, 3 (setting value 1, 2, 3) and setting 4, 5, 6, 6 (setting value 4,
The number of regular power support in 5 and 6) is set to the same. In addition, in the ST machine, a configuration is also possible in which the number of continuations of the probability change state increases as the set value increases.

Further, in FIG. 27, although the number of rounds (round number upper limit values, for example, 2R, 6R, 16R) given at one big hit does not change with respect to the set value, the round number is increased as the set value increases. Configurations are also possible. Further, in FIG. 27, the number of rounds larger than the big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game is more easily given to the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the special figure 2 variable display game is the special figure The player is more advantageous than the variable display game.

In addition, the structure which makes big hit symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) the same is possible similarly to FIG. 24 (C) irrespective of setting (set value).

[Process during special figure change]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (A2609) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure changing process.

The game control apparatus 100 first prepares a symbol stop command (special figure 1 symbol stop command or special figure 2 symbol stop command) corresponding to a symbol in motion as a production command (A 4701)
, Effect command setting processing is executed (A4702). The symbol during variation can be determined from the variation symbol determination flag (special figure 1 variation flag or special figure 2 variation flag). The effect control device 300 having received the symbol stop command stops the corresponding decoration special figure variation display game (the decoration special figure 1 variation display game or the decoration special figure 2 variation display game).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number indicating the stop symbol pattern (A 4703), and saves the set display time in the special-purpose game processing timer area (A 4704). In the case of the present embodiment, if the stop symbol pattern is a detached symbol pattern, a big hit symbol pattern, or a small hit symbol pattern, the display time is commonly 600.
Set msec.

Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 sets a processing number "2" related to processing during special view display (A4
705) Save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A4706).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the test signal output data area (A4707), and further saves the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area (A4707) A4708).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) to a symbol determination frequency signal control timer area used when outputting a symbol determination frequency signal relating to the execution frequency of the special view variation display game to the external information terminal. Save (A4709).

Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 controls the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop at the special view 1 display 51 as information for controlling the special view 1 change display game in the special view 1 display 51. Save (A4710). Furthermore, as information for controlling the special view 2 change display game in the special view 2 display 52, the stop flag relating to the change stop in the special view 2 display 52 is saved in the special view 2 change control flag area (A4711) , Special processing during process transition setting processing ends.

[Symbol variation control processing]
In FIG. 29, the symbol variation control process in the special drawing game process described above (A2620, A2622)
And symbol variation control processing in the common drawing game processing described later. The symbol variation control process controls the variation of the special symbol (first special figure, second special figure, etc.) and the ordinary symbol (common figure) of the variation display game in the variation display part of the collective display 50, and the special symbol and ordinary It is a process which sets up the display data of a design.

The game control apparatus 100 first checks whether or not the fluctuation control flag pertaining to the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special drawing, the second special drawing, and the common drawing) is fluctuating (A7501). In the case of this embodiment, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value, the display table 2 (in the fluctuation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621 and step A7614 Stop address), display table 1
An address (for variation) is defined.

In the case where the game control device 100 is in the process of changing the flag under control of the symbol to be controlled (A
The result of 7502 acquires "Y" and a symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled (A 7503). In the case of the present embodiment, step A2619, step A2621,
The address of the symbol display table (for variation, display table 1) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A7614.

Next, the game control apparatus 100 updates the blinking control timer of the control target by -1 (A7504).
If it is determined that the blinking control timer after updating is 0 (A 7505), and the blinking control timer after updating is not 0 (the result of A 7505 is "N"), the value of the variation symbol number area of the control object is changed to The corresponding display data is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A 7511), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

If the blinking control timer after updating is 0 (the result of A7505 is "Y"), the blinking control timer initial value corresponding to the target blinking timer area is saved (A7506), and the fluctuation symbol number of the control object Is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (A7507), and display data corresponding to the value of the variation symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A 7511), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation flag concerning the symbol to be controlled is not changing (result of A7502 is "N"), the game control device 100 acquires the symbol display table (for stop) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled. (A 7509). In the case of the present embodiment, step A2619, step A2
The address of the symbol display table (for stop, display table 2) is defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in step 621 and step A7614. Next, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (A7510), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

As the blinking control timer initial value saved in step A7506, the value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed is saved. Here, a value corresponding to 100 msec is defined as the blinking control timer initial value. The blinking control timer initial value is an interval at which the lighting pattern is updated in the collective display device 50 during the fluctuation time.

Further, the corresponding range in step A7507 is defined by the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value defined in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed. When the variation symbol number reaches the upper limit value by updating the variation symbol number by +1 in step A7507, the variation symbol number is set to 0, and the variation symbol number is 0 to 0 (variation symbol number upper limit judgment value -1 It is updated sequentially in the range of). In steps A7508 and A7511, display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to the variation symbol number is set to be acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) the number of times equal to the variation symbol number upper limit judgment value. Will be repeatedly displayed.

By defining the blinking control timer initial value and the fluctuation symbol number upper limit value in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed as described above, the interval and the display for updating the lighting pattern in the collective display device 50 are round The number of updates to be made can be set for each game.

[Puppet game processing]
Next, details of the regular game processing (A1313) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the common-play game process. In the common drawing game processing, monitoring of the input of the gate switch 34a and control of the entire processing concerning the common drawing fluctuation display game,
Set the display of the common drawing.

The game control device 100 first executes gate switch monitoring processing for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a (A7601). The details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 executes a general prize winning switch monitoring process of monitoring an input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A7602).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 updates the non-Figure game processing timer by one if it is not 0 (1
Only subtract) (A7603). Note that the minimum value of the common drawing game processing timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the common-play game processing timer has become 0 (A7604).

If the value of the common-play game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is “Y”), that is, if the time is up or the time is already up, the game control device 100 A common drawing game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the corresponding processing is set in the register (A7605).

Further, the game control apparatus 100 acquires a branch destination address of the process corresponding to the common drawing game processing number based on the set common drawing game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call according to the common drawing game processing number is made, and a game branching process corresponding to the common drawing game processing number is executed (A7607).

When the game processing number is "0" at step A7607, the game control apparatus 100
The common drawing routine processing which monitors the fluctuation start of the common drawing fluctuation display game, performs setting of the fluctuation start of the common drawing fluctuation display game, setting of the presentation, setting of information necessary for performing the common drawing fluctuation processing, etc. Execute (A7608). The details of the common drawing routine processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, when the game processing number is “1” in step A 7607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a general-diagram changing processing that performs setting of information necessary for performing the general-diagram display processing ((1) A7609). For example, in the common drawing fluctuating process, in order to shift to the common drawing display processing, “2” is set as the game processing number and saved in the common drawing game processing number area, and the common drawing display time is common drawing game Save to processing timer area.

When the game processing number is "2" at step A7607, if the result of the common drawing variation display game is a hit, the game control apparatus 100 performs the common power according to whether or not the time saving state is in progress. The general drawing display processing is executed to set the open time, set the information necessary for performing the common processing per processing (A 7610). For example, in the process of displaying the common drawing, when the result of the common drawing variation display game is hit, in order to shift to the processing during the common drawing, "3" is set as the game processing number and the common drawing game processing number area On the other hand, in the case of a loss, in order to shift to the common processing routine processing, “0” is set as the game processing number and saved in the common processing game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "3" at step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 generally continues processing during a general drawing, or performs setting of information necessary for performing a general electric residual ball processing, etc. The process is executed during each drawing (A7611). For example, in the middle processing per flat drawing, after setting for opening the normal fluctuation winning device 37 a predetermined number of times, “4” is set as the game processing number in order to shift to the general electric remaining ball processing It saves in the common drawing game processing number area.

Further, when the game processing number is “4” in step A 7607, the game control apparatus 100 executes generalization residual ball processing to set information necessary for performing end processing per common drawing (A 7612) ). For example, in the routine play residual ball processing, in order to shift to finish processing per common drawing, in addition to setting “5” as the game processing number and saving it in the regular drawing game processing number area, the general drawing ending time Save to processing timer area.

In addition, when the game processing number is “5” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 executes the end processing per common drawing, which performs setting of information necessary for performing the common processing (A7608). (A7613). For example, in the end processing per common drawing, “0” is set as the game processing number and saved in the general drawing game processing number area in order to shift to the normal processing per common drawing.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares a common drawing fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuation of the normal symbol by the common drawing indicator 53 (A7614). Thereafter, the symbol variation control process related to the control of the variation of the normal symbol by the common drawing display 53 is executed (A7615), and the common drawing game process is ended.

On the other hand, when the value of the common-play game processing timer is not 0 (A7604)
If the result is “N”, that is, the time is not up, the processing of step A 7614 and subsequent steps is executed.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the gate switch monitoring process. The gate switch monitoring process is executed in step A7601 in the common-play game process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input on the gate switch 34 a (
A7701). And when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is “
Y "), it is determined whether or not it is a game state to hit the right (A7702). The game state to hit right is a big hit state, a small hit state, and a short time state (general power support state). If it is in the gaming state in which the player strikes the right (the result of A7702 is "Y"), the process shifts to the processing of step A7705.
If the game state is not right-handed (the result of A7702 is "N"), a left-handed command notification command (left-handed command) is prepared as an effect command (A7703), and effect command setting processing is executed (A7704). Effect control device 300 which receives the left hitting indication notification command
The display device 41 or the like executes a notification (warning) instructing to hit the left.

Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 acquires the common drawing reservation number and determines whether the common drawing reservation number is less than the upper limit (for example, 4) (A 7705). When the common drawing reserve number is less than the upper limit (the result of A 7705 is “Y”), the gaming control apparatus 100 updates the common drawing reserve number by +1 (A
7706) Calculate the address of the hit random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of popular drawing reservations (A)
7707). Then, the random number is extracted and saved in the RWM random number storage area (A77
08), the winning symbol random number is extracted and saved in the winning symbol random number storage area (A7709), and the gate switch monitoring processing is ended.

On the other hand, if there is no input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "N"), or if it is determined that the number of general drawing reservations is not less than the upper limit value (A770)
The result of 5 is "N", and the gate switch monitoring process is ended.

[Normal figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the common drawing routine processing (A 7608) in the common drawing game processing will be described.
FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing a procedure of common processing.

First, the gaming control device 100 determines whether the number of general drawing reservations is 0 (A7901)
. If the general drawing reservation number is not 0 (the result of A7901 is “N”), the random number is loaded from the RWM random drawing storage area per common drawing (for the number of holdings 1), and the RWM common drawing random number storage area per common drawing (
A hit symbol random number is loaded from 1 for hold number) and a random number storage area (for 1 hold number) per common drawing after loading and a symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) per common figure are cleared to 0 (A7902) . Furthermore, whether or not the probability that the hit result will be hit in the common drawing variation display game is during the common drawing high probability (high probability state) higher than normal, ie, it is a short time state (general power support state) It is determined (A7903). Note that the probability per spread in the high probability is 250/251, and the probability per spread in the low probability is 0/251.

If the game control apparatus 100 is not in the common drawing high probability (the result of A7903 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 sets the low probability lower limit judgment value (here, 251) which is the lower judgment value in the common drawing low probability (A7904
), If the drawing probability is high (the result of A7903 is “Y”), the high probability lower limit judgment value (1 in this case) which is the lower judgment value of the projection probability is set (A7905), step A7906 Transfer to processing of

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit random number is equal to or more than the upper limit determination value (here, 251) (A7906). Note that the upper limit judgment value here is common to the medium and low probability. If the hit random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7906 is “Y”), ie,
In the case of a disconnection, the process moves to the processing of step A7908. If the per-random number is less than the upper limit determination value (the result of A7906 is "N"), it is determined whether the per-random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A7907).

If the random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (if the result of A7907
Y "), that is, in the case of a drop, save shift information in the hit flag area (A7908)
. Further, the out-of-order stop symbol number is set as the common view stop symbol number (A7909), the out-of-shape symbol information is saved in the common view stop symbol information area (A7910), and the process proceeds to step A7914.

If the random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (if the result of A7907
N "), ie, in the case of hit, save the hit information in the hit flag area (A7911), set the hit stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded hit symbol random number (A7912), hit hit corresponding to the hit stop symbol number The stop symbol information is saved in the common drawing stop symbol information area (A7913), and the process proceeds to step A7914. In addition, there may be several types of hit stop symbols, and there are two in the present embodiment.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the common view stop symbol area (A 791
4) After saving the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A7915), shifting the random number storage area per drawing (A7916), and clearing the empty area after shift to 0 (A7917)
), And updates the general drawing reservation number by -1 (A7918).

That is, when the common drawing variation display game regarding the oldest common drawing reservation number 1 is executed, the rankings of the common drawing reservation numbers 2 to 4 held by common drawing reservation number 1 or later are advanced one by one.
As a result of this processing, the values for the number of general drawing reservations 2 to from the number of general drawing reservations 4 for the random number storage area per common drawing move from the number 1 for general drawing reservations for the random number storage area to the number 3 for general drawing reservation It will be done. Then, the value for the common drawing reservation number 4 of the random number storage area per common drawing is cleared, and the common drawing reservation number is decremented by one.

Next, the game control device 100 extracts the fluctuation pattern random number 3 (A7919), sets the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern random number 3, and saves it in the popular game processing timer area (A7)
920). For example, the fluctuation time is 500 msec with probability 200/256, probability 40/25
It is distributed to 1500 msec with 6 and 3000 msec with probability 16/256. Then, the processing shift setting processing during the general drawing variation is executed (A7921), and the general drawing normal processing is ended. For example, in the common drawing fluctuating process transition setting process, “1” is set as the process number for shifting to the common drawing fluctuating process, and the processing number is saved in the common drawing game process number area. Then, the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec) which is the initial value of the timer of the blinking cycle of the common drawing indicator is saved in the common drawing blinking control timer area, and the initial value (0 here) in the common drawing fluctuation symbol number area Save

In addition, when the game control device 100 sets the number of general drawing reservations to 0 (the result of A7901 is “
Y ”),“ 0 ”is set as the processing number for shifting to the common processing routine (A7922),
The processing number is saved in the common drawing game processing number area (A7923). Thereafter, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the routine power fraud monitoring period flag area (A7924), and the routine drawing routine processing is ended.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (A1317) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the external information editing process. FIG. 33A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and FIG. 33B shows the second half of the external information editing process. In external information editing processing, payout command transmission processing (A1311), winning opening switch / status monitoring processing (A1307), magnet fraud monitoring processing (A1315), board radio wave fraud monitoring processing (A1316)
On the basis of the monitoring result in the above, information to be output to an external device such as an information collecting terminal or an internal control device for a game arcade or a test shot test device is created and set in an output buffer.

The game control device 100 first determines whether a glass frame opening error is occurring (
A9501). When the glass frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A9501 is "N"),
Determine whether a main body frame open error (front frame open error) is occurring (A9502)
. If the main frame opening error is not occurring (result of A9502 is "N"), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9503), the off data of security signal is external information output data Save to area (A9504).

When the glass frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9501 is “Y”), or when the main body frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9502 is “Y”),
The on data of the door / frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9505), and the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9506).

After steps A9504 and A9506, if the security signal control timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates −1 (A9507), and it is determined whether the security signal control timer is 0 (whether the time is up or not). It judges (A9508). The initial value of the security signal control timer is the RAM by the operation of the initialization switch (setting value change switch 102), etc.
When the data stored in the file is initialized, or at the end of the setting change, for example,
msec) is set (A1044 and A2419 of the main processing). Then, the security signal control timer is clocked from the time of RAM initialization and the end of setting change. Also,
The initial value of the security signal control timer is the setting key switch 93 or the setting value change switch 1
Setting variable state (setting change mode) or setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) by operation etc. 02
Is set (when main setting A1037, A2507) and the probability setting value changing flag is set. The setting is being changed (during setting variable state) or the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set. During the confirmation state, the security signal may be output all the time. Note that the security signal control timer is set to 0 and the output of the security signal is not set when the probability setting value changing flag is cleared (A2418) but when the probability setting value changed flag is set (A2414). A configuration that terminates is also possible.

When the security signal control timer is not 0 (result of A9508 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves on data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A
9509), shift to the processing of step A9510. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

When the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9508 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not magnet fraud is occurring (A9510). When the magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag region, it can be determined that the magnet fraud is occurring. If magnet fraud is not occurring (the result of A9510 is “N”), it is further determined whether board radio fraud is occurring (A9511). When the board radio wave fraud occurrence flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area, it can be determined that the board radio wave fraud is occurring.

When the board radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9511 is "N")
Further, it is determined whether or not frame radio wave irregularity is occurring (A9512). If frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A 9512 is “N”), it is further determined whether a general electric power fraud is occurring (A 9513). If the common use fraud is not occurring (the result of A9513 is “N”), it is further determined whether a big winning opening fraud is occurring (A9514). It should be noted that if the incorrect winning occurrence flag for the special winning opening is saved in the incorrect flag area by the incorrect & prize monitoring process, it can be determined that the special winning opening is in progress. If the special winning opening fraud is not occurring (the result of A9514 is “N”), it is determined whether or not a switch malfunction error is occurring (
A9515).

When a switch abnormality error (the above-mentioned switch abnormality 1 error) such as disconnection of a switch is occurring (result of A9515 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 tests the off data of the gaming machine error state signal Save to the output data area (A9516). If a switch abnormal error is occurring (the result of A9515 is "Y"), the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9518).

On the other hand, if the game control device 100 is in the process of magnet fraud (the result of A9510 is “Y
), If the board radio wave fraud is occurring (the result of A9511 is "Y"), if the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (the result of A9512 is "Y"), if the general electric power fraud is occurring ( When the result of A9513 is "Y") or when the big winning opening fraud is occurring (the result of A9514 is "Y")
, Save the security signal ON data in the external information output data area (A9517),
Save the on data of the gaming machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (A9518
). By setting the on data of the security signal, the security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer).

After steps A9516 and A9518, the game control apparatus 100 executes main prize ball signal editing processing for setting information on the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out (A9519). Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes start opening signal editing processing for editing the winning combination signal of the start opening (A952
0).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game, if it is not 0, it updates -1 (A 9521). The minimum value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is set to zero.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is 0 (A 9522). When the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is 0 (the result of A 9522 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the off data of the symbol determination frequency signal is external information output data Save to the area (A 9523), and complete the external information editing process.

Further, when the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is not 0 (A952)
If the result of 2 is "N", that is, the time is not up, the on data of the symbol determination number signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9524), and the external information editing process is ended.

[Display of batch display device during setting change]
FIG. 34 shows the display of each display unit of the batch display device 50 during probability setting change (in the setting variable state where setting change is possible), that is, the light emitting units (LED lamps D1-D18 of the batch display device 50).
It is a figure explaining the light emission mode (mode of lighting and extinguishing) of.

During the probability setting change, the game control apparatus 100 displays a predetermined display for the special view fluctuation display game of the collective display device 50 regardless of the state (such as the gaming state) of the gaming machine 10 at the time of power shutoff before power on. Are displayed on the display units 51 and 52 of FIG. For example, even if the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed when the power is turned off before the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 collectively displays the predetermined display regardless of the power off state of the collective display device 50 during the probability setting change. Display portions 51 and 5 of the display device 50
It can be displayed on 2. Therefore, during the probability setting change (setting variable state), the probability setting change is being performed by the predetermined display on the display portions 51 and 52 for the special figure variation display game which is easily viewed from the front of the gaming machine 10, It can be suggested that the gaming machine 10 can not play a game (for example, a variable display game).

In FIG. 34A, during probability setting change (setting variable state), the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 (7-segment type LED lamp D1) for the special view 1 fluctuation display game of the collective display device 50 is predetermined. The probability setting value (here, 6) is displayed as the display. In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can not play a game (for example, a variation display game) by displaying the first special figure variation display unit 51 with a different display (a different display from the normal) during the probability setting change. Can be clearly indicated on the front of the gaming machine 10. In the stop display of the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special view fluctuation display unit 52 when the fluctuation is stopped, the numbers 1 to 6 indicating the probability setting value are not used.

For example, the game control device 100 may use probability setting value display data (corresponding to the operation probability setting value)
A2409) or based on the probability setting value display data (A2413) corresponding to the probability setting value
Output data is output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and the working probability setting value and the probability setting value are displayed on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (LED lamp D1) in a lit or blinking manner. It is good (output processing A1603-A1608).

The probability setting value may be lit or blinked on the second special view variation display unit 52 (7-segment type LED lamp D2) for the special view 2 variation display game of the collective display device 50. In addition, the probability setting value may be lit or blinked using both of the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special view fluctuation display unit 52.

Furthermore, even if the brightness setting value is weaker than normal and the probability setting value is lighted or blinked so that a person who is not authorized to change the setting may not easily recognize the probability setting value at a place away from the gaming machine 10 Good.

In FIG. 34B, during the probability setting change, the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (LED lamp D1
Is displayed as a predetermined display (for example, the letter “P”) indicating that the probability setting is being changed (setting variable state). Thus, while changing the probability setting,
By displaying on the first special view variation display unit 51 a different display (different from the normal display) from when the change is stopped, it is possible to clearly indicate that the gaming machine 10 can not play a game on the front of the gaming machine 10. In addition, in the stop display at the time of the change stop of the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display section 52, the same identification information (special symbol) as the information display during change (for example, the letter "P") is not used. It shall be.

For example, when it is determined that the game control device 100 is changing the probability setting (A 240
The result of 1 is “Y”), a process of generating output data regarding the information display during change to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 is executed (processing step is added to FIG. 10), The information display may be lighted on or blinked on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (A of the output process
1603-A1608). In addition, for example, the game control device 100 is a front frame 12 (body frame)
Is open and the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1024 is "Y"),
When the probability setting value changing flag is set (A1038), the output data is output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and the in-modification information display is made on the first special view fluctuation display unit 51.
(LED lamp D1) may be lighted or blinked.

Note that the in-modification information display may be lit or blinked on the second special view variation display unit 52 (7-segment LED lamp D2) for the special view 2 variation display game of the collective display device 50. In addition, the information display during change may be lit or blinked by using both the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special view fluctuation display unit 52.

In FIG. 34C, during the probability setting change, the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 displays, as a predetermined display, the same display as the result of stopping the fluctuation display game other than the special result (other than the big hit). . In the present embodiment, the out result (inout symbol) is a display in which the central segment of the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 (7-segment type LED lamp D1) lights up.
As described above, by performing predetermined display on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 while changing the probability setting, it can be suggested on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is not executing a game. In addition, the RAM area is cleared to 0 at the end of the setting change (A2418), but the initial result of the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 is displayed by displaying the out-of-set result (outlying symbol) from under probability setting change. The value setting (A2419) may not be necessary.

For example, when it is determined that the game control device 100 is changing the probability setting (A 240
Execute processing to generate output data on display of the result (disappeared pattern) to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 as the result of 1 is “Y”) (add the processing step to FIG. 10 , And the display of the result of losing may be lighted on the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 (A 1603-A1608 of output processing). Also, for example, when the front frame 12 (body frame) is open and the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1024 is “Y
), When setting the probability setting value change flag (A1038), the third output port 13
The output data may be output to the fifth output port 136 and the fourth output port 136, and the display of the outlier result may be illuminated and displayed on the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 (LED lamp D1).

The second special view fluctuation display unit 52 (LED for the special view 2 fluctuation display game of the collective display device 50 (LED
The lamp D2) may display a display of the result of outlighting. Further, the display of the outlier result may be lit and displayed using both of the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special drawing fluctuation display unit 52.

In FIG. 34D, during the probability setting change, the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (LED lamp D1
Is displayed as a predetermined display. As described above, the gaming machine 10 is in a state where the gaming machine 10 can not play a game by displaying the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 with a different display (display different from the normal time) during the probability setting change. It can be clearly stated in front of ten. In the stop display of the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special view fluctuation display unit 52 when the fluctuation is stopped, the light off display is not used.

For example, the game control apparatus 100 may change the probability setting value from power on (power recovery) to a change (the result of A2406 is "Y"), and the first special feature to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136. The output data for the figure fluctuation display unit 51 may not be generated, and the light-off display may be displayed on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51.

The second special view variation display unit 52 (7-segment LED lamp D2) for the special view 2 variation display game of the collective display device 50 may be turned off. In addition, first special figure fluctuation indicator 5
The light may be turned off and displayed on both the 1st and 2nd special view fluctuation display portions 52.

In FIG. 34A to FIG. 34D described above, while changing the probability setting, LED lamps other than the display portions 51, 52 (D1, D2) for the special figure variation display game (for example, LED lamps D3-D
18) may be turned off or may be cyclically lit to display an animation.

In FIG. 34E and FIG. 34F, as the predetermined display, all the display parts (that is, all the light emitting parts: LED lamps D1-D18) of the collective display device 50 are lit or blinked during the probability setting change. The all-lighting display or the all-flashing display is displayed on the collective display device 50. Thus, during the probability setting change, the display different from that at the time of fluctuation stop (
By performing the display different from the normal), it can be clearly indicated in the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 can not play a game.

The all-flashing display in FIG. 34F is executed by repeating the all-off display and the all-on display of the collective display device 50 at predetermined time intervals.

For example, when it is determined that the game control device 100 is changing the probability setting (A 240
The result of 1 is executed to generate output data regarding all lighting display or all blinking display to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136), and all lighting display or all blinking display is collectively performed. You may display on the display apparatus 50 (A 1603-A1608 of an output process). Also, for example, when the front frame 12 (body frame) is open and the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1024 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the probability setting value changing flag. (A1038), the output data may be output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and the all-on indication or the all-off indication may be displayed on the collective display unit 50 (LED lamps D1-D18) .

FIG. 34G shows another configuration example of the batch display device 50 of FIGS. 34A to 34F. In FIG. 34G, the performance of the gaming machine 10 (around the LED lamps D1-D18 of the batch display device 50 (
Performance display for the specifications) is displayed. Although the performance display is printed, L
It may be displayed by light emission from an ED lamp or a liquid crystal display. Display of big hit probability at low probability in setting 1 (minimum setting) and setting 6 (maximum setting) as performance display 85
a "1/300 and 1/200", award ball number display 85b "3 & 2 & 10 &14", round number upper limit value display 85c "2, 6, 16", model (formal name) indication 85d "CRxxx
xx ", display 85e of the presence or absence of the limit regarding the probability variation big hit (here" no limit ")
Is displayed.

In the display 85b of the number of winning balls, the starting winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the general winning opening 35,
The number of winning balls of the special variation winning device 39 is displayed in order. The limit on the probability variation big hit means that the number of continuously occurring probability variation big hits is limited to a predetermined number of limits (A big hit of a predetermined number of limits (number of consecutive shots) can occur in one big hit) Become).

In addition, since the display 85a of the big hit probability at the low probability time is displayed only for the setting 1 (minimum setting) and the setting 6 (highest setting), it can be displayed so as to fit in the vacant area around the batch display device 50. In addition, the display 85a of the big hit probability at the low probability time is displayed only for the setting 3 (middle setting) or the display 85 a of the big hit probability at the low probability time is the setting 1 (lowest setting) and the setting 6 (highest setting) Only one of them (one of the lowest value 1/300 and the highest value 1/200) may be displayed, or the range (1/300 to 1/200) of the jackpot probability at the low probability time may be displayed.

Moreover, among the big hit probability at the time of low probability, the LED lamp D1-D of the collective display device 50
What can not be displayed around 18 (big hit probability for settings 2, 4 and 5 etc.) may be displayed outside the gaming area 32 in a vacant area of a separate member from the collective display device 50. In addition, what was displayed on the package display apparatus 50 on this separate member may be displayed overlappingly. For example, the jackpot probability at the time of the low probability for setting 2, 4, 5 etc. is displayed on a vacant area at the upper right or lower left or upper left of the game board in FIG. 2A or a member (guide rail 31) partitioning the game area 32 May be Alternatively, the jackpot probability at the time of the low probability with respect to the settings 2, 4 and 5 may be displayed in a vacant area (for example, the surface of the general winning opening 35 at the lower left) in the game area. In addition, the display 85e of the presence or absence of the limit regarding the probability variation big hit is displayed as “limited” only when there is a limit, and may not be displayed when there is no limit. Thus, the LED lamps D1-D1 of the collective display device 50
Items to be displayed as performance indicators around 8 can be changed as appropriate. For example, the display 85c of the round number upper limit value at the time of big hit is displayed on another area or the display device 41, or some or all items displayed as performance display are displayed on the collective display device 50 as needed, It does not have to be displayed.

In addition, the effect control device 300 may display the jackpot probability at the time of the low probability for the settings 2, 4, 5, etc. on the display device 41 while changing settings, checking settings, and / or waiting for customers. . The effect control device 300 pre-stores the big hit probability at low probability time (program ROM
321 etc.). Note that what is displayed on the batch display device 50 may be displayed on the display device 41 in an overlapping manner. Switching of the display of the jackpot probability of each setting, effect button 2
It may be executed by operating the operation unit such as 5 or the cross key.

35 (A) and 35 (B) show predetermined display on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 or the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 of the collective display device 50 during the probability setting change (here, the probability setting value 6). Shows a configuration in which it is difficult to visually recognize a predetermined display from an oblique direction other than the front of the gaming machine 10. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a person who is not authorized to change the setting to visually recognize a predetermined display (in particular, the probability setting value) from the oblique direction of the gaming machine 10 while changing the probability setting.

In FIG. 35A, two depressions 51a and 51b (recesses) are provided in the front of the collective display device 50, and the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 or the second special view is respectively provided in the depressions 51a and 51b. The variation display unit 52 is arranged. 35B, an annular wall portion 50a (convex portion) surrounding the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special view fluctuation display unit 52 is provided on the front of the collective display device 50. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the display of the first special view variation display unit 51 or the second special view variation display unit 52 in the oblique direction.

[Control of production control device]
Below, the control (process) which production control device 300 performs with the program for production control is explained.

[Main processing (effect control device)]
First, the details of the main process performed by the effect control device 300 will be described. Figure 36.
These are flowcharts which show the procedure of the main processing (main program) performed by the presentation control apparatus 300. FIG. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (effect microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the sign (number) of the step is represented as "B ****".

When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first prohibits an interrupt (
B0001). Next, the CPU 311 and the VDP 312 are initialized (B0002, B
0003), to allow the interrupt (B0004). When interruption is permitted, the game control device 1
It becomes possible to execute a command reception interrupt process for receiving a command transmitted from 00.

Next, the effect control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power on is saved in the area to be initialized (B 0007).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the WDT (watch dock timer) (B0
008). The WDT is activated by the above-described CPU initialization (B0002), and the CPU 311
Monitor if is working properly. If the WDT is not cleared even after a predetermined period, the WDT times up and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the effect control device 300 executes an RTC (Real Time Clock) 3 as a clocking means.
The RTC reading process is executed to read time information from B.38 (B0009).

In the RTC reading process, the time information may be read from the RTC 338 in a predetermined cycle (for example, every one minute), and it is not necessary to read the time information each time the process moves to step B0009. Alternatively, the RTC reading process may be executed only once at the time of power on to the effect control device 300 (that is, power on to the gaming machine 10) (by changing the position of the RTC reading process, for example, step B0003). And may be performed between B0004). The effect control device 300 sets a time timer (clocking means) for measuring time in a timer area in the RAM, and reads information of the time from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or only once when the power is turned on. When the information is read, the time timer may be adjusted to the RTC 338 time. Then, the effect control device 300 may execute various processes using a time timer instead of the RTC 338. In this way, the number of processes for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

In the RTC reading process, when the read time matches any of a plurality of predetermined times (a first predetermined time, a second predetermined time,...), A predetermined effect may be executed, The player can estimate the setting value from the time interval by drawing the time interval of the predetermined time with a probability according to the setting value. For example, the selection rate at long time intervals may be drawn so as to decrease as the set value increases. In addition, the player can estimate the setting value from the execution period of the predetermined effect by drawing the execution period for executing the predetermined effect at a probability according to the setting value. For example, the selection rate of the long execution period may be drawn so as to increase as the setting value increases.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 by the player (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b), or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. The effect button input process is executed (B0010). continue,
A hall / player setting mode process is executed to receive an operation such as changing the brightness or volume of the LED or liquid crystal by a person in charge at the game arcade (game arcade) or a player or the like (B0011). In the hall / player setting mode process, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes an effect point control process of executing addition and clearing of effect points (B0012). In the effect point control process, an effect or an operation to be added to effect points is executed to execute effect point addition processing, and, at the end of the game, etc., so that effect points can be carried over to the next game, For example, information including information of effect points and the like is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display a QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall / player setting mode process. Note that the player can estimate the setting value from the addition value by drawing the value (addition value) to be added to the effect points at a probability according to the setting value. For example, the selection rate of a large added value may be drawn so as to increase as the set value increases.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes random number update processing for updating random numbers such as effect random numbers (B 0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check processing (B 0014). The details of the reception command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the effect control device 300 updates various data in accordance with the contents to be displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41 or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. The effect display editing process is executed (B 0015). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete drawing within the frame period 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 msec). Then, preparation for drawing on the display frame buffer is completed, and setting for ending preparation of drawing command is executed (B0016).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether it is the frame switching timing (B
0017). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0017 is "N"), the processing of B0017 is repeated until the frame switching timing comes, and if it is the frame switching timing (the result of B0017 is "Y") Instruct screen drawing (B0
018). Since the frame period in the present embodiment is 1/30 second, frame switching is performed when, for example, periodic V blank (image update) every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period) is executed twice. . The interval may be further increased without updating the image in 1/60 seconds.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0019).

Further, the effect control device 300 executes decoration control processing for controlling the decoration device (the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18) formed of an LED or the like (B0020). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is performed.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 executes movable body control processing for controlling the effect device (panel effect device 44, frame effect device) such as a motorized product driven by a motor and a solenoid (B002
1). In the movable body control process, for example, a feature operation effect for driving a motor is set.

Then, when the process of B0021 described above is finished, the effect control device 300 returns to the process of B0008. Thereafter, the processing from B0008 to B0021 is repeated.

[Receive command check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the details of the received command check process (B0014) in the main process (FIG. 36) described above will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the reception command check process performed by the effect control device 300.

In order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the number of command receptions (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the number of received commands is not 0 (B1102). If the command reception number is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control apparatus 100 (the result of B 1102 is “N”), there is no command to analyze, and the reception command check process is ended.

On the other hand, when the number of received commands is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (result of B1102 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 receives the command reception counter of the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value for the number of received commands (B1103
Copy the contents of the RAM receive command buffer to the analysis command area (B11)
04). Here, since the receive command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem in subtracting the number of received commands before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, data is not overwritten even if a new command is received during copying.

Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command readout index by +1 (adds 1) in the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). Receive command buffer receives 32 received commands
It is configured to save up to pieces. The received command is stored in the received command buffer in the order of the command read index 0 to 31. Here, the received command is read in the index order and copied to the command area for analysis. Note that at the timing when the copying to the analysis command area is completed, the storage area of the reception command buffer corresponding to the read command reading index is cleared.

The effect control device 300 determines whether the copy of the command reception number loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is “N “), Repeat the processing of steps B1104 to B1106.

When the effect control device 300 receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is stored in the reception command buffer and the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the reception command buffer, analysis of the received command is separately performed in the command area for analysis. When the contents of the received command are copied to the analysis command area, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. As described above, by always securing a free area in the reception command buffer without performing analysis directly, it is possible to prepare for mass reception of commands.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed, the effect control device 300 (the result of B1106 is “Y
], The received command contents of the analysis command area are loaded (B1107), and a reception command analysis process for analyzing the contents is executed (B1108). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). Thereafter, it is determined whether the analysis of the command for the number of received command loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1110), and if the analysis is not completed (the result of B1110 is "N"), step The processes of B1107 to B1110 are repeated. If the analysis is completed (the result of B 1110 is “Y”), the reception command check process is ended.

[Receive command analysis process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the received command check process (FIG. 37) described above will be described. FIG. 38 shows the effect control device 30.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the received command analysis process performed by 0. FIG.

The effect control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command as the MODE portion and the lower byte as the ACTION portion (ACT portion) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is the MODE unit (MODE command) and the A
A CTION section (ACTION command) is usually transmitted continuously from a MODE section indicating the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower of the received command is M
Composed in the order of ODE part and ACTION part.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE unit is in the normal range (B12).
02). That is, it is determined whether it is a possible value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type) which can be taken by the MODE section indicating the type of command. Then, if the MODE part is in the normal range (the result of B 1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether the ACTION part is in the normal range (B 1203). That is, it is determined whether it is a value (value assigned as a command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION unit indicating the content of the command (specific rendering instruction or the like). And if the ACTION part is in the normal range (B1203
It is determined whether or not the combination of the ACTION part for the MODE part is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it is determined whether the value of the ACTION part is a possible value of the command of the type specified by the MODE part. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B 1204 is “Y”), command processing according to the command system is executed in the processing after B 1205.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE section is within the range of the fluctuation system command (B1205). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the decoration special symbol, and includes a variation command (set in the variation start information setting process of FIG. 42). And
If the MODE portion indicates a variable system command (the result of B1205 is "Y"), the variable system command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process is ended.

If the MODE unit does not represent a change system command (B12
Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE part is in the range of the big hit system command (“N” in the result of 05) (
B1207). The jackpot command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) related to an effect during a jackpot, for example, a fanfare command (set in processing while displaying a special map), a round command (fanfare / interval) Medium command), interval command (set in big winning opening open processing), ending command (big winning opening open processing), and the like. Then, if the MODE section indicates a big hit system command (the result of B1207 is "Y"), the big hit system command processing is executed (B1
208), finish the received command analysis process.

If the MODE unit does not represent a big hit system command (B1
Next, it is judged whether or not the MODE part is the range of the symbol system command (result of 207 is "N") (
B1209). The symbol system commands include a decoration special figure 1 command (A4018) and a decoration special figure 2 command (A4112) corresponding to the stop design pattern. Then, if the MODE section indicates a symbol system command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), symbol system command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis process is ended.

If the MODE unit does not represent a symbol system command (B12
Next, it is determined whether the result of 09 is "N" and the MODE section is within the range of single-shot commands (B
1211). Then, if the MODE portion indicates a single-shot system command (the result of B 1211 is “Y”), single-shot system command processing is executed (B 1212), and the received command analysis process is ended.

If the MODE unit does not represent a single-shot command (B12
Then, it is determined whether or not the MODE section is within the range of the prefetch symbol system command (B1213). The pre-reading stop symbol command (figure 15
There is A3014). And, if the MODE section indicates a look-ahead symbol system command (B
The result of step 1213 is “Y”), and the prefetch symbol system command processing is executed (B1214), and the reception command analysis processing is ended.

In the case where the effect control device 300 does not represent a read ahead symbol system command in the MODE section (
Next, it is determined whether the result of B1213 is “N”) and the MODE part is within the range of the prefetch change command (B1215). The prefetch variation system command includes the above-mentioned prefetch variation pattern command (A3018 in FIG. 15). Then, if the MODE section indicates the prefetch change command (the result of B1215 is “Y”), the read change command processing is executed (B1216).
), End the received command analysis process.

On the other hand, when the MODE unit does not represent the prefetch change system command (result of B1215 is “N”), the effect control device 300 can receive an unexpected command (for example, a command used only in the test mode) Because there is a problem, the reception command analysis process is terminated. Also, if the MODE part is not within the normal range (the result of B1202 is "N"), if the ACTION part is not within the normal range (the result of B1203 is "N"), or AC to the MODE part
Even when the TION part is not a correct combination (the result of B 1204 is “N”), the reception command analysis processing is ended.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the details of the one-shot system command processing (B1212) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a procedure of single-shot command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section indicates a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). Then, if the MODE section indicates a model designation command (the result of B1301 is "Y"), model setting processing for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B
1302), end one-shot command processing.

If the MODE unit does not indicate a model designation command (B1
Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a command for initializing the RAM (B1303). And, if the MODE section represents a command for RAM initialization (
The result of B1303 is "Y", executes the RAM initialization setting process for notifying the RAM initialization, etc. (B1304), and ends the one-shot system command process.

If the MODE unit does not represent a command for initializing the RAM (the result of B1303 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit represents a command at the time of a power failure recovery. (B1305). Then, if the MODE portion indicates a command at the time of power failure recovery (the result of B1305 is “Y”), the power failure recovery setting processing is executed (B1306), and the one-shot system command processing is ended.

If the MODE unit does not indicate a command at the time of power failure recovery, the effect control device 300
Next, it is determined whether the result of B1305 is “N”) and the MODE section indicates a customer waiting demo command (B1307). And, when the MODE section indicates a customer waiting demo command (B1
If the result of step 307 is "Y", the customer waiting demo setting process is executed (B1308), and the one-shot command process ends.

If the MODE unit does not indicate a customer waiting demo command (B
The result of 1307 is “N”), then the MODE section is adornment special figure 1 number command (A2917)
, A3207) is determined (B1309). Then, if the MODE section indicates the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B 1309 is “Y”), the special figure 1 holding information setting process is executed (B 1310), and the one-shot system command process is ended.

If the MODE unit does not indicate the decoration special drawing 1 reservation number command (the result of B 1309 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next, the MODE unit displays the decoration special drawing 2 reservation number command (A 2)
It is determined whether it represents 917, A3203) (B1311). Then, if the MODE section indicates the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B 1311 is “Y”), the special figure 2 holding information setting process is executed (B 1312), and the one-shot system command process is ended.

If the MODE unit does not represent the decoration special drawing 2 reservation number command (the result of B 1311 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit represents the probability information command or not. (B1313). And, if the MODE section represents a probability information command (B1
If the result of step 313 is "Y", the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the one-shot system command process ends.

If the MODE unit does not represent the probability information command (B1
Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates an error / illegal command (B1315). In addition, as an error / illegal command, for example, a fraud occurrence command (set in fraud & prize monitoring process when a fraud occurs), a fraud cancellation command (set in fraud & prize monitoring process when fraud is cancelled), There are a state off command (A2204) and a state on command (A2207). Glass frame open detection switch 63 as a state on command
There is a command indicating the generation of a signal from (Glass frame open error) and the generation of a signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 (body frame open detection switch) (body frame open error, front frame open error). Also, the status off command indicates that no error has occurred.

Then, if the MODE section indicates an error / illegal command (the result of B 1315 is “Y”), an error / illegal setting process for notifying or canceling an error or a fraud is executed (
B1316) The one-shot command processing ends.

If the MODE unit does not represent an error / illegal command (the result of B 1315 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then executes a command for MODE mode switching for effect mode display (processing for displaying special map) (B1317). It is determined whether or not it represents the setting). Then, if the MODE unit indicates a command for effect mode switching (the result of B1317 is "Y"), effect mode switching setting processing is executed (B1318), and the one-shot system command processing ends.

If the MODE unit does not represent a command for effect mode switching (the result of B1317 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit indicates an out-of-balls command or not. (B1319). Then, if the MODE portion indicates the out-of-ball number command (the result of B1319 is "Y"), the out-of-ball number reception process is executed (B1320), and the one-shot system command processing is ended.

If the MODE unit does not indicate the out-of-ball number command (B
The result of 1319 is “N”), and then the MODE section is a command for counting (A3107, A3).
It is determined whether or not it represents the special winning opening count command 111) (B1321). And
If the MODE section indicates a command of counting (the result of B1321 is "Y"), the count information setting process is executed (B1322), and the one-shot system command process is ended.

If the MODE unit does not indicate a count command (B
It is determined whether the result of 1321 is “N”) and the MODE unit indicates a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) (B1323). The set value information command is shown in step A of FIG. 5B.
It is included in the command at the time of power failure recovery at 1035 and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the processing of step A 1045. And, if the MODE section represents a set value information command (
The result of B1323 is "Y", the setting value reception processing is executed (B1324), and the one-shot system command processing is ended. In the setting value reception process, the setting value (probability setting value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM and the necessary processing is executed.

When the MODE unit does not represent the set value information command (B
It is determined whether the result of 1323 is “N”) and the MODE unit represents a setting change command (B1325). As a setting change command, for example, a setting change instruction command (A1
029), command during probability setting change (A1041), command for probability setting value change (A2)
415), there is a command (A2421) of ending the probability setting change. Then, if the MODE section indicates a setting change system command (the result of B 1325 is “Y”), the setting change system information setting process is executed (B 1326), and the one-shot system command process is ended. In the setting change related information setting process, the contents of the setting change related command are stored, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a setting change instruction command is received, in the setting change related information setting process, a setting change instruction display prompting the player to change the setting is displayed on the display device 41.

In the case where the effect control device 300 does not represent the setting change system command (the MODE unit does not
It is determined whether the result of B 1325 is “N”) and the MODE unit represents a setting confirmation command (B 1327). Examples of setting confirmation commands include a command during probability setting value confirmation (A2508) and a command for completion of probability setting value confirmation (A2512). And MOD
If the E part indicates a setting confirmation system command (the result of B1327 is "Y"), the setting confirmation system information setting process is executed (B1328), and the one-shot system command process is ended. In the setting confirmation related information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation related command are stored, and processing corresponding to the command is executed.

Next, it is determined whether the MODE unit represents a symbol stop command (B1329). The command for symbol stop includes, for example, the symbol stop command of the special view 1 and the symbol stop command of the special view 2. Then, if the MODE section represents a symbol stop command (the result of B1329 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the command of the MODE section is a normal command ( B1330).

If the command in the MODE section is a normal command (the result of B1330 is "Y")
The effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special view (B1331), sets the gaming state flag to the normal state after all symbols are stopped (B1332), and ends the one-shot system command processing. In the process of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to the normal state, but depending on the timing at which this process is executed, the game state flag is a flag of "during variation", "big hit" and "small hit" Is set.

On the other hand, when the MODE section does not represent the command of symbol stop (the result of B1329 is “N
Or the command in the MODE part is not normal (the result of B1330 is "N")
Then, the effect control device 300 ends the one-shot system command processing.

[Ahead reading symbol system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, details of the pre-read symbol system command processing (B1214) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 40 shows the effect control device 30.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the pre-reading symbol system command processing performed by 0.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether the latest hold information is information of special view 1 hold (special view 1 start storage), for example, the latest received decoration special view hold number command is the number of special view 1 hold It is determined whether it is a command (B1601). When the latest hold information is information of special view 1 hold (the result of B 1601 is “Y”), the prefetch symbol system command (prefetch stop symbol command) to the special view 1 look ahead symbol command area corresponding to the special view 1 hold count Save (B1602).

If the latest hold information is not the information of the special view 1 hold (the result of B 1601 is “N”), that is, the decoration special view hold number command received most recently is the decoration special view 2 hold number command In the case, the pre-reading symbol system command (pre-reading stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 pre-reading symbol command area which corresponds to the special figure 2 reservation number (B1603).

After steps B 1602 and B 1603, the effect control device 300 sets a prefetch variation system command reception wait flag indicating that it is awaiting reception of the prefetch variation system command (B 160
4). This is because the pre-reading symbol system command and the pre-reading variation system command are set, so the pre-reading variation system command is transmitted from the game control device 100 following the pre-reading symbol system command. After that, the pre-reading symbol system command processing ends.

[Read-ahead change system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, details of the prefetch change system command processing (B1216) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 41 shows the effect control device 30.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the prefetch change type | system | group command process performed by 0. FIG.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not waiting for the reception of the prefetch change system command (B1701). When the above-described read-ahead change system command reception waiting flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the reception of a read-ahead change system command is being awaited. If it is not waiting to receive the prefetch change command (the result of B 1701 is “N”), the prefetch change command processing is ended. When waiting for the reception of read-ahead change commands (if the result of B1701 is “
Y "), clear the prefetch change system command reception waiting flag (B1702).

Next, the effect control device 300 (sub board) is a symbol of the latest hold information (special view 1 or special view 2).
Set the look-ahead fluctuation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of reservations (B1703), and obtain the sub-pred look-ahead fluctuation command MODE portion corresponding to the MODE portion of the look-ahead fluctuation system command (
B1704). Next, the prefetch change ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and the in-sub prefetch change command ACT corresponding to the ACTION portion (ACT portion) of the prefetch change system command is set.
Get a part (B1706).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the converted MODE part and ACT part (that is, the in-sub-prediction change command MODE part and ACT part) are other than 0 (B1707).
. If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to other than 0. MODE part after conversion, A
When both CT parts are other than 0 (the result of B1707 is “Y”), the converted MODE part and A
The converted command composed of the CT unit is saved in the latest hold information, the prefetch change command area (special view 1 look-ahead change command area or special view 2 look-ahead change command area) corresponding to the number of holds (B1708). Then, execute read ahead command consistency check processing (B170
9) It is determined whether the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is normal or not (B1710
).

It should be noted that the time of the first half fluctuation corresponding to the MODE section changes according to the number of reservations when holding starts the variable display game. When the suspension starts the variable display game, if there is no other suspension, it becomes the longer first half fluctuation, and if the new suspension occurs and the number of reservations is large, it becomes the shorter first half fluctuation. Therefore, the MODE portion of the received prefetch change system command is converted into the in-sub-prediction change command MODE portion so that the internal command of the effect control device 300 can be handled the same even if the time value of the first half change is transitioned.

In addition, since the type of reach is not related to the number of reservations, the second-half fluctuation corresponding to the in-sub-prediction fluctuation command ACT does not depend on the number of reservations. However, because there are different types of reach in the same system,
If there is no conversion of the ACT part (second half fluctuation value) of the prefetch change system command, the effect control device 30
If 0 is used as it is, the number is large and checking becomes difficult. For example, for normal reach,
There are types such as normal reach-1 stop and normal reach + 1 stop.
Therefore, the ACT part indicating the reach of the same system is converted into the same sub inner pre-reading fluctuation command ACT part, thereby reducing the number and reducing the burden of check processing such as pre-read command consistency check processing.

Next, when at least one of the converted MODE unit and ACT unit (that is, the sub-prediction change command MODE unit and ACT unit) is 0, the effect control device 300 (the result of B1707 is “N”), or , If the combination of MODE part and ACT part after conversion is not normal (B171
Assuming that the result of 0 is “N”) and there is an abnormality in the converted command, the prefetch change system command processing is ended.

If the combination of the converted MODE unit and ACT unit is normal (B
The result of 1710 is "Y" and the pending information (the latest pending information) to be prefetched is loaded from the prefetch change command area (B1711), and the pre-reading lottery process relating to the latest pending prefetch effect is executed (B1712). As pre-reading effect, there are, for example, continuous pre-notice effect (including chance eye pre-reading effect), pre-reading zone effect, pending change notice and the like. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest hold previewing notice effect (hold change advance notice) occurs (B1713). If the latest hold previewing advance notice effect occurs (the result of B 1713 is “Y”), point information corresponding to the selected look ahead effect is set (B 1714).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the previewed advance notice effect (pending change advance notice) that occurs is an effect that starts immediately (B1715). If the pre-reading advance notice effect that occurs is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is “Y”), a display corresponding to the selected pre-reading effect is set (B1716). Then, the prefetch change command processing ends.

On the other hand, in the case where the effect control device 300 does not generate the pre-read advance notice effect of the latest hold (B171
If the result of 3 is not “N”) or the effect that the previewing notice effect that occurs is not immediately started (
The result of B1715 is "N"), as it is. End the read ahead variation command processing.

[Design system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the details of the symbol system command processing (B1210) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a procedure of symbol system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 receives the symbol system command (the decoration special figure 1 command or decoration special
The special figure type corresponding to the MODE section of the command is set (B1801). The special drawing type is special drawing 1 or special drawing 2. Then, the MODE part and ACTION part of the symbol system command (ACT
Set the symbol type corresponding to the combination of parts) and save in a predetermined area such as RAM (B180
2). Here, since the distribution ratio of symbols changes in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, a table is used for each MODE to set the symbol type. In the present embodiment, the symbol type is an off symbol, a 2R positive variation big hit symbol (2R-A1 etc.) shown in FIG. 27, a 2R normal big hit symbol (2
R-A2 etc.), 6R probability variation big hit symbol (6R-A1 etc), 6R normal big hit symbol (6R-A2
Etc.), 16R probability variation big hit symbol (16R-A1 etc), 16R normal big hit symbol (16R-A2
Etc.).

[Variable system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the details of the variable system command processing (B1206) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a procedure of variable system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 performs a special view type (special view 1) of the received variation command (variation command).
Alternatively, it is determined whether the special figure 2) is unconfirmed (B1901). If the special drawing type is unconfirmed (the result of B1901 is “Y”), the variation system command processing is ended. If the special figure type is not yet determined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable command and symbol command is checked (B1902), and it is determined whether the variable command and symbol type are inconsistent. Is determined (B1903). Here, "mismatch" means contradiction in rendering, for example, when a symbol system command of a big hit symbol is received even though a variation system command of an off-set has been received. When the variation system command and the symbol type are inconsistent (Result of B1903 is "Y")
End the variable system command processing.

If the variation system command and the symbol type do not mismatch (result of B1903 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation system command (variation command) (B1)
904), the fluctuation production setting processing which sets the fluctuation production which is production during fluctuation is executed (B19
05). Note that multiple effects exist for the same variable system command. Subsequently, the special game is set to the gaming state flag indicating the gaming state (P machine state) (B1906), and the number of pre-reading effects (the number of remaining continuous pre-notice effects) is not 0 Do (B1907
).

[Change production setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the details of the fluctuation effect setting process (B1905) in the above-mentioned fluctuation system command process (FIG. 43) will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the change pattern type is change without reach (change that does not reach reach) (B2001). When the change pattern type is no reach change (the result of B2001 is “Y”), the number of points of presentation points, the model code,
Set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the special figure type, effect mode, and setting value (probability setting value) (B2002), corresponding to the MODE part of the variation system command (variation command) and the number of reserved special drawing types Obtain the address of the first half of the previous day sorting group table (B200
3). In the case of no reach fluctuation, since the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holdings increases, the table address corresponding to the number of holdings is acquired.

If the change pattern type is not reach change (the result of B2001 is "N"), that is, if the change pattern type is change with reach, the effect control device 300, the number of points of effect points, model code, special view type, effect mode, Set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and setting value (probability set value) (B2004), and the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the variation system command (variation command) and variation pattern type Get the address of (B2005).

After the steps B 2003 and B 2005, the effect control device 300 performs a drawing of a notice that appears during the first half of the movement (before reaching) (B 2006). In addition, the lottery probability of the advance will depend on the set value. Then, set the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of effect points, model code, special drawing type, effect mode, symbol type, setting value (probability setting value) (B2007) The address of the second half of the previous day sorting group table corresponding to the ACT part is acquired (B2008), and a lottery for the second half appearing during the second half of movement (during reaching) is made (B2009). In addition, the lottery probability of the advance will depend on the set value. Thereafter, the contents of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the MODE part and ACT part of the fluctuation system command (variation command) are determined (B2010). In addition, the fluctuation time, the main reach contents, etc. are known from the fluctuation system command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the notice (B2011). After that, for example according to the contents of the fluctuation production such as reach production etc and the contents of announcement production, the stop design setting processing which decides the stop design of the decoration special figure fluctuation indicator game is executed (B20
12). Here, the decoration stop pattern is specifically determined, such as determining the scattered eyes in the case of the out-of-pattern.

Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of change effects such as reach effects (B2013
), Display setting of the notice effect (B2014). Subsequently, the hold decrease corresponding to the special view type (
The display setting of the hold shift) is performed, and for example, a display for reducing the hold display corresponding to the decorative special figure that changes this time is set (B2015). Subsequently, a voice number is determined which determines the effect mode (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker, and a decoration number which determines the effect mode by the light emission of the decoration device (B
2016). The decoration device (panel decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting units (decorative LED etc.) and emits light in a light emission mode (color of each LED, light emission timing etc.) determined by a decorative number .

In addition to setting the voice number and the decoration number based on the contents of the effect, it is also possible to set by lottery with a lottery probability according to the setting value (probability setting value). In this way, the player can use the gaming machine 10 from the light emission mode of the decoration device, that is, the light emission mode of the decoration light emitting unit (LED).
You can enjoy to guess the set value (probability set value) of.

Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of the decoration special figure variation corresponding to the special figure type (B
2017), display setting of the fourth symbol variation regarding the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol, identification information) is performed in addition to the above-mentioned first to third special symbols varying in the display device 41 (B2018). Note that
The fourth symbol variation is the lamp display unit 1 of the above-described lamp display device 80 provided other than the display device 41.
, 2 (LED) is displayed.

[Big hit system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, details of the big hit system command processing (B1208) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether the MODE part of the received big hit system command represents a fanfare (B2101). If the MODE section of the big hit system command indicates fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, if the big hit system command is a fanfare command, the fanfare effect setting process for setting fanfare effect is executed (B2102) . The fanfare command includes information of the upper limit value of the number of rounds of the present big hit. Subsequently, the current gaming state of the gaming machine 10 (P state)
The fanfare in progress is set to the gaming state flag indicating (B2103), and the big hit command processing ends. The round number upper limit value can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol system command (the decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

If the MODE part of the received big hit system command does not represent a fanfare (the result of B2101 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the big hit system command represents a round ( B2104). When the MODE part represents a round (B210
If the result of 4 is "Y", that is, if the jackpot command is a round command, the effect control device 300 executes a round effect setting process to indicate the current gaming state (P state) of the gaming machine 10. The game state flag is set to "round" (B2105, B2106), and the big hit command processing ends.

When the MODE part of the received big hit system command does not represent a round (the result of B 2104 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the big hit system command represents an interval ( B2107). When the MODE section represents an interval (B21
If the result of 07 is "Y", that is, if the jackpot command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes an interval effect setting process to indicate the current gaming state (P state of the gaming machine 10). Set interval to the game status flag (B2108, B2109
), End the big hit system command processing.

If the MODE part of the received jackpot command does not represent an interval (B210
The result of 7 is “N”), and the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section of the big hit system command represents an ending (B2110). When the MODE part indicates the ending (B
If the result of 2110 is "Y", that is, if the jackpot command is an ending command, the effect control device 300 executes an ending effect setting process for setting an ending effect, and the current gaming state of the gaming machine 10 Ending is set to the game state flag indicating (P machine state) (B2111, B2112), and the big hit system command processing is ended.

If the MODE part of the received jackpot command does not indicate ending (B
The result 2110 is “N”), and the effect control device 300 ends the big hit system command processing without executing any processing.

[Operation and Effect of First Embodiment]
According to the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 establishes the start condition (for example, the winning of the start winning opening).
Game control means (game control apparatus 100) capable of displaying a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed based on the display unit (for example, the first special view change display unit 51 or the second special view change display unit 52)
And the special game state advantageous to the player is generated when the stop result of the variable display game is a special result. The setting changing means (for example, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value changing switch 102) can change the setting regarding the game conditions (or the setting regarding the game) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. The game control means (game control apparatus 100) can shift to the setting variable state where the setting can be changed when the game machine 10 is powered on, and the power is shut off before the setting variable state. A predetermined display is displayed on the display unit regardless of the state of the gaming machine 10 (FIG. 34).

Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), the setting is being changed by the predetermined display on the display unit for the special view variation display game which is easy to view from the front of the gaming machine 10, or the gaming machine 1
It can be suggested that 0 can not be played (for example, a variable display game).
It should be noted that the state of the gaming machine 10 at the time of power off is maintained even in the setting variable state, and the normal display (off symbol, big hit symbol) etc. at the time of fluctuation stop is displayed on the display for the special view fluctuation display game. If, for example, the front frame 12 (body frame) is closed before the setting change is completed,
There is a possibility that it may be misidentified as a playable state.

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (the game control apparatus 100) changes the display of the variable information to display the identification information in a variable manner based on the establishment of the start condition (for example, the LED lamp D1 or D
It can be displayed in 2). The gaming machine 10 includes the light emitting unit and a display device (collective display device 50) including another light emitting unit different from the light emitting unit. The game control means may blink all the light emitting parts of the display device in the setting variable state where the setting can be changed (FIG. 34F).
.

Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), it is possible to clearly indicate on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 can not play a game by performing display different from normal on the display device (the collective display device 50). .

According to the first embodiment, in the setting changeable state (during setting change), the game control means (game control apparatus 100) displays information indicating that the setting changeable state is displayed (for example, the first special view fluctuation display) You may display on the part 51 or 2nd special figure fluctuation display part 52) (FIG. 34B).

Therefore, in the setting changeable state (during setting change), the game machine 10 is in a state in which the gaming machine 10 can not play a game, by performing display different from the normal on the display unit for the variable display game.
Clearly in front of

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control apparatus 100) is in the setting change state (during setting change), the display unit (for example, the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special view fluctuation display unit 5)
2) may be turned off (FIG. 34D).

Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), the gaming machine 10 is displayed on the display unit for the variable display game by displaying different from normal (display different from the time when the variable display game stops changing)
Can be clearly indicated on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the player can not play the game.

According to the first embodiment, in the setting changeable state, the game control means (game control device 100) displays the same display as the stop result (outgoing result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the big hit result) , And may be displayed on the first special view change display unit 51 or the second special view change display unit 52) (FIG. 34C).

Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), by performing predetermined display on the display unit for the variable display game, it can be suggested on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is not executing a game. By displaying the stopping result (outgoing result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the big hit result) from under setting change, regarding the data to be displayed on the display unit for the variable display game, the initial setting change end time It becomes unnecessary to set the value.

Second Embodiment
The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49. FIG. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment. Moreover, in the following embodiment, the same code | symbol is used for the structure which fulfill | performs the same function as 1st Embodiment, and the overlapping description is abbreviate | omitted suitably and demonstrated.

The first embodiment relates to a chance look-ahead presentation effect (a chance look-ahead notice) with a missing symbol. The chance eye that is a specific stop result aspect (specific outstop design aspect) of the decorative special figure variation display game is made lottery or selectable according to the setting value (probability setting value), suggesting or notifying the setting value by the chance eye to enable.

[Stop symbol setting process]
The stop symbol setting process according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 shows the effect control device 30 in the fluctuation effect setting process (FIG. 44) when executing the special figure fluctuation display game.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of stop symbol setting processing (B2012) performed by 0. In the stop symbol setting process, the stop symbol (stop result) of the decorative special view variable display game is determined.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the special view change display game related to the received change system command is a big hit (B2301). If the special view variation display game is a big hit (the result of B 2301 is “Y”), the big hit stop symbol (“2 according to symbol type (B 1802)
, 2, 2 "etc.) (B2302).

The effect control device 300 determines that the number of pre-reading effects (the number of remaining continuous notice effects) of the chance look-ahead effect as the continuous notice effects is 0 when the special view change display game is not a big hit (the result of B 2301 is “N”). It is determined whether there is any (B2303). Step B2308 when the number of pre-reading effect (the number of remaining continuous notice effects) is 0 (result of B2303 is “Y”)
Transfer to processing of In addition, the initial value of the number of pre-reading effect times (the number of remaining continuous notice effects) is the degree of expectation of the big hit of the pending target pending, that is, the expected degree of the big hit of the special view fluctuation display game executed by the pending target pending. May be set.

If the number of pre-read effects (the number of remaining continuous advance notice effects) is not 0 (the result of B 2303 is “N”), the effect control device 300 pre-reads the chance eye stop symbol mode (chance eye mode, missing symbol group) It sets according to the degree of expectation of the big hit of retention (B2304). For the chance eye stop symbol mode, a normal mode in which the set value can not be suggested or notified, a special mode in which the set value can be suggested (setting suggested mode), a definite mode in which the set value can be informed in a definite manner There is a setting notification mode (see FIG. 47).

For example, when Special 1 reach (SP1 reach) occurs in the special view change display game according to the suspension (start memory) of the prefetch target, the chance eye stop symbol form is set to the normal mode, Special 2 reach (SP2 reach) If a special 3 reach (SP 3 reach) occurs, the special mode can be set to the final mode. As described above, since the expectation level (expected value) of the big hit is in the order of SP1 reach <SP2 reach <SP3 reach, it is possible to set the chance eye stop symbol aspect according to the expected level of the big hit of the pre-reading target. Note that
On the contrary, when SP3 reach occurs in the special view fluctuation display game concerning reservation of pre-reading object, the chance eye stop design aspect is set to normal mode, when SP2 reach occurs, it sets to the special aspect, SP3 reach In the case where a problem occurs, the determination mode may be set.

As described above, by setting the chance eye stop symbol mode corresponding to the type of reach for the pre-read target (system of reach effect), the chance eye stop symbol according to the expected level of the jackpot for the pre-read target Can be set. Therefore, the chance of stopping the big hit of the pre-read object can be notified as pre-reading effect by the chance eye stop symbol mode. In addition, the reach type which occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game which relates to the reservation of the pre-reading object is the pre-reading fluctuation system command (B121
This can be understood from the look-ahead fluctuation pattern command as 5) and the contents of the fluctuation effect (B2010).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not to execute a setting indication effect (setting-related effect) for indicating or notifying a setting value (B2305). When the chance eye stop symbol mode is the normal mode and the setting suggestion effect is not executed (the result of B2305 is "N"), the stop symbol is shifted from the normal mode of the out pattern mode (out pattern group) regardless of the setting value. Lottery (B2
306), the stop symbol setting process ends. If the chance eye stop symbol mode is a special mode or a definite mode, and if the setting suggestion effect is executed (the result of B2305 is "Y"), if it is a special mode, it is a special mode out of a lost design mode (a lost design group) In the lottery probability according to the setting value, the shift stop symbol is drawn, and if it is the decision mode, the decision stop symbol is decided (decided) according to the setting value from the decision symbol form (depart symbol group) of the decision mode (B2307) .

The effect control device 300 executes a setting indication effect (setting related effect) for suggesting or notifying a setting value when the pre-reading effect number (the number of remaining continuous notice effects) is 0 (the result of B2303 is "Y"). It is determined whether or not to do (B2308). For example, if you win a lottery,
It may be determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be performed. When not performing setting indication production (B2308
The result is “N”), and the lottery stop symbol is drawn regardless of the set value (B2309). When the setting suggestion effect is executed (the result of B2308 is "Y"), a shift stop symbol is drawn with a drawing probability according to the set value (B2310). As described above, even when the number of pre-reading effects (the number of remaining continuous notice effects) is 0 and the chance look-ahead effect is not performed (the result of B2303 is "Y"), the indication effect is set independently of the chance eye pre-reading effect. It can be done.

The processes from step B2308 to B2310 are optional and may not be executed.

[Chance eye stop pattern mode]
FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining a chance eye stop symbol pattern in the chance look-ahead effect. The chance eye stop symbol mode includes a normal mode, a special mode (setting suggestion mode), and a confirmation mode (setting alert mode).

For example, “2,4,6” (blue), “1,5,9” (green), “3,7,7” (red) may be removed from the normal pattern of the out-of-pattern mode (deteriorated pattern group). There is a stop pattern. For example, “2, 4, 6” (green), for example, “2, 4, 6”, in the special design of the special design.
There are "1, 5, 9" (red) and "3, 7, 7" (blue) out-of-stop symbols. In the form of the final pattern of the final form (the group of the final design), the color is not relevant, "O, 1, 1""O, 2,
There is an out-of-place stop design of 2 "", 3, 3, "", 4, 4, "", 5, 5 ",", 6, 6 ". In addition, (circle) shows the arbitrary pattern different from two patterns (Zoro eyes) which the inside and the right of three ornament identification patterns (identification information) in right and left aligned.

In addition, the out-of-stop stop pattern of the confirmation mode (setting notification mode) has a color (for example, blue, green, gold other than red, red, etc.) or a shape that is not used in the normal mode and the special mode, It may be distinguished to be easy.

In the normal mode, the selection rate (allocation rate) in the lottery of each off stop symbol is set to the same value regardless of the setting (setting value). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47, the probability (the degree of expectation) of each setting is the same (100/6 ≒ 17%) when one lost stop symbol of the normal mode is selected.
It becomes. The probability in FIG. 47 is the degree of expectation of each setting value that can be estimated by the player when a specific out-of-stop symbol is displayed. Therefore, the normal mode is a mode in which the player can not estimate the setting value, that is, a mode in which the setting value can not be suggested or notified. Note that FIG.
In the example, the selection rate of the out-of-stop symbol of the normal mode in one lottery is 100 /
It is 3 (≒ 33.3)%.

In the special mode, the selection rate in the lottery of each off stop symbol is set to be different depending on the setting (setting value). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47, the probability (expected degree) of each setting is different when one missing stop symbol in the special mode is selected (may be the same in some settings).
. Therefore, the special mode is a mode in which the player can estimate the set value, that is, a mode in which the set value can be suggested.

In the finalization mode, the selection rate in the lottery of each out-of-stop symbol is set to 100% only for one predetermined setting (setting value). Therefore, as shown in FIG.
When one out-of-stop stop pattern is selected, the probability (the degree of expectation) of being a predetermined one setting is 10
It becomes 0%, and the probability (expected degree) of other settings becomes 0%. For this reason, the determination mode is a mode in which the player can recognize the setting value, that is, a mode in which the setting value can be notified in a definite manner.

In addition, the three decorative identification symbols of the special aspect can suggest a set value by having a specific color. For example, the off stop symbol "2, 4, 6" (blue) of the normal mode is
I can not suggest the set value. However, in the special mode out-of-stop stop pattern "2, 4, 6" (green) in which the number part is the same as the out-stop stop pattern "2, 4, 6" (blue) of the normal mode and only the color is different is
By having a specific color (green), it is possible to suggest a set value. In addition, the three decorative identification symbols in the special aspect may indicate setting values by having a specific shape.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing another example of selecting the chance-eye stop symbol mode (chance-eye mode, dropped symbol group) in step B2304. In the example of FIG. 48, the chance symbol stop symbol mode is selected by lottery with a selection rate (allocation ratio) different between the case of the big hit and the case of the special figure change display game related to the suspension of the prefetch target. Therefore, as in the case of setting the chance eye stop symbol mode corresponding to the reach type of the pending target prefetch, the example in FIG. 48 also uses the chance eye stop symbol aspect as the pre-reading effect, the big hit of the prefetch target pending The degree of expectation can be informed. In addition, it is symbol classification (B18 whether it is big hit or suspension of pre-reading object)
You can see from 02).

As shown in FIG. 48 (A), the expectation of the jackpot of the pre-reading target may be high in the order of the normal mode <special mode <fixed mode. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 48 (B), the probability of the jackpot of the pre-reading target being reserved may be higher in the order of the confirmation mode <special mode <normal mode. In the case of FIG. 48 (B), even if the finalization mode or the special mode is selected and the player recognizes that the expectation of the jackpot of the suspension of the preread object is low, the setting (setting value) is finalized according to the finality mode. Therefore, the player is not disappointed.

In addition, if the selection rates of the normal mode, the special mode, and the confirmation mode in FIG. 48 are made the same as the selection rates of SP1 reach, SP2 reach, and SP3 reach, as described above This is the same as setting the normal mode, the special mode, and the final mode in response to the occurrence of the SP1 reach, the SP2 reach, and the SP3 reach.

In addition, according to the power on of the gaming machine 10 and the number of big hits from the start of the gaming, the number of big hit consecutive number of big hits from the big hit start to the return to the normal gaming state (the number of consecutive chans), and the operation time of the gaming machine 10 becomes large, A configuration is also possible in which the selectivity of the determination mode is increased. Since the confirmation mode is a reward for the player, this configuration can increase the operation of the gaming machine 10.

As described above, the chance eye stop symbol form is associated with the expectation of the big hit of the reserve target for pre-reading target, and the chance stop stop symbol of the chance eye stop symbol form (especially the special aspect, the confirmation aspect) is drawn with a probability according to the setting value. it can. As a result, the out-of-stop symbol is drawn at a probability (selectability) according to the result (big hit or lose) of the special view variable display game related to the suspension of the prefetch target and the set value.

〔Screen transition〕
FIG. 49A and FIG. 49B are screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the second embodiment.

(A) of FIG. 49A is a display screen during execution of the decorative special view variable display game. The variation (↓ ↓) of the decoration special symbol (large symbol) is being executed in the variation display area 610, and the variation (↓ ↓) of the ornament reduced symbol (small symbol) is being executed in the variation display area 615. The special figure 1 reserve number display section 650 and the special figure 2 reserve number display section 660 in the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41 respectively show the number “2” indicating the special figure 1 reserve number and the special figure 2 reserve number The numeral "0" is displayed.

The hold display unit 630 (start storage display unit) displays a first start display as a first hold display (first start display), and a second hold display (second start display) (2) The second hold display unit 630b displays the display as (starting storage display). First hold display unit 630a
Two hold displays 633 are displayed as the first hold display on. At the moment, the hold display 633 is not displayed in the second hold display unit 630b. In addition, the reserve digest area 64 of the square frame
0 is displayed at the bottom center of the display screen. The pending change display 633a indicating the pending related to the special view variable display game being executed (the starting memory that has become the right to execute this special view variable display game),
It is displayed in the reserve digest area 640.

After that, in (i), the hold (first start memory) is generated by the winning of the start winning opening 36, and the hold display 633 (black) corresponding to the hold that is generated is a mode from the normal mode by the hold change notice. The color is displayed on hold. Then, the chance look-ahead presentation effect (continuous advance notice effect) is set with the pending with a high degree of expectation of the jackpot as the pending target for the pre-reading (B1712, B1716). In addition, the special figure 1 reserve number in the special figure 1 reserve number display section 650 is increased to the number “3” indicating the reserve number.

Then, in (c), the decoration special figure variation display game is over, and the first chance look-ahead presentation effect is executed with the display of the stop pattern "2, 4, 6" (blue) of the normal mode. . Here, the whole or a part of the deviation stop symbol may be blinked to make the player recognize that it is a chance look-ahead effect. It should be noted that the pending change display 633a is erased at the end of the decorative special view variable display game. In the normal mode, the player can not estimate the setting (setting value).

After that, in (D), the next decoration special figure variation display game is being executed. The hold display 633 moves to the right (hold shift), and the first reserve display area 630 a is displayed in the hold region 640.
The rightmost hold display 633 moves. In addition, the number indicating the special figure 1 reservation number in the special figure 1 reservation number display section 650 is reduced to “2”.

And in (e), the decoration special figure fluctuation display game ends, the second chance look-ahead presentation effect is out of the special mode (setting suggestion mode) stop design “1,5,9” (red) Executed by display. Here, all or a part of the off stop symbol may be blinked to make the player recognize that it is a chance look-ahead effect. A setting (setting value) is suggested by the disconnection stop symbol of the special mode, and the player can estimate the setting (setting value) (the probability of being setting 4 is high according to FIG. 47).

After that, in (f), the next decorative feature variation display game is being executed. The hold display 633 moves to the right (hold shift), and the first reserve display area 630 a is displayed in the hold region 640.
The rightmost hold display 633 moves. In addition, the number indicating the special figure 1 reservation number in the special figure 1 reservation number display section 650 is reduced to “1”.

Then, in (K) of FIG. 49B, the decoration special view variation display game is ended, and the third chance look-ahead effect is out of the stop mode “1, 6, 6” of the determination mode (setting notification mode). Executed by display. Here, all or a part of the off stop symbol may be blinked to make the player recognize that it is a chance look-ahead effect. The setting (setting value) is informed in a definite manner by the cancellation stop symbol of the determination mode, and the player can recognize the setting (setting value) (confirming that setting 6 is made according to FIG. 47).

In addition, in the case of the confirmation mode, the speech 635 as a character image may be displayed. The dialogue 635 is selected in accordance with the setting (setting value) determined by the stop pattern of the determination mode. For example, when setting 6 (setting value 6) is finalized with a stop symbol "O, 6, 6" as shown in (f), "Congratulations!" Is displayed, but a stop symbol "O, 1 , 1 ”and setting 1 (setting value 1) is determined,“ sorry ”may be displayed.

After that, in (v), the next decoration special figure variation display game is being executed due to the suspension of the prefetch target. As the holding display 633 moves to the right (holding shift), the holding digestion area 640
The hold display 633 (black) on the right end of the first hold display unit 630a moves to the right. In addition, the number indicating the special figure 1 reservation number in the special figure 1 reservation number display section 650 is reduced to “0”.

After that, in (f), the decoration special figure variation display game ends, and the suspension display 633a during variation is erased and the big hit stop symbol "5, 5, 5" is displayed. And in (ko),
A big hit round starts as a special gaming state.

With regard to the screen transition described above, the special mode of (e) of FIG. 49A may also display words as a character image. The serif may be selected according to the special aspect of the off stop symbol. Moreover, the structure which suggests a setting is also possible by the combination of serif and the special form of the stop stop pattern. For example, in the combination of the off stop symbol "1,5,9" (red) and the serif "Congratulation!", The probability of being the setting 6 (setting value 6) is increased, and the off stop symbol "1,5
, 9 "(red) and the words" sorry ", the probability of being setting 1 (setting value 1) may be increased.

Further, with regard to the screen transition of FIG. 49 described above, the whole or a part of the off stop symbol may be blinked so as to be noticeable only when the off stop symbol of the determination mode is displayed. Furthermore, FIG.
Then, although the chance eye stop symbol aspect in the chance look-ahead production of three times was made to differ each time, the chance eye stop symbol aspect may be made the same mode every time. And this same aspect is
It may be determined according to the degree of expectation of the jackpot of the pre-read target hold.

[Operation and Effect of Second Embodiment]
According to the second embodiment, the gaming machine 10 establishes the start condition (for example, winning of the start winning opening).
A variable control game (effect control unit 300) capable of displaying a variable display game (decorative special view variable display game) for variably displaying a plurality of identification information (decorative special symbol) based on the display device 41; When the stop result mode is a special result mode (big hit result mode), a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The setting changing means (for example, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value changing switch 102) can change the setting (setting value) relating to the game condition. The start storage means (for example, the game control apparatus 100) can store the start storage which becomes the right to execute the variable display game based on the establishment of the start condition. The prior determination means (e.g., the game control apparatus 100) executes the variable display game execution information (e.g., the variable display game) related to the start memory before the variable display game based on the start memory stored by the start memory is executed. And the variation pattern etc.) before the variable display game based on the starting memory is executed.

Further, according to the second embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) does not stop the change result game (the decoration special view change display game) when the stop result mode does not become the special result mode (big hit result mode). By setting the stop result mode to a specific stop result mode (for example, a special mode, a confirmation mode), it is possible to execute advance notice effects (chance look-ahead appearance, chance look-ahead notice) based on the judgment result of the preliminary judgment means. Furthermore, effect control means (effect control device 300)
It is possible to execute setting-related effects (setting suggestive effects) for suggesting or notifying a setting (setting value) using the specific stop result mode (for example, a special mode, a finalizing mode).

Therefore, in the notice effect based on the judgment result of the pre-judgment means, it is also possible to suggest or notify the setting (setting value), so the player is not only guessing whether or not to be a big hit but also setting (setting value). It can be guessed that it is possible to prevent the notice effect from becoming monotonous. For this reason, the interest of the game is improved. Furthermore, even when the expectation of the big hit is low in the notice effect, the player has more pleasure in guessing the setting (setting value) and the interest of the game is improved.

According to the second embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the setting related effect by the plurality of identification information (decorative special symbol) of the specific stop result aspect having a specific color. . Therefore, the player also pays attention to the color of the identification information (decorative special symbol) of the stop result mode, and the interest of the game is improved.

According to the second embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300), a plurality of identification information (disappearing stop symbol) of a specific stop result mode (for example, special mode, fixed mode), the specific stop result mode Select when running the variable display game to be derived (Figure 43, Figure 44, Figure 46)
. Therefore, since a plurality of identification information (disappeared stop symbols) can be selected when the variable display game is executed, not at the time of prior determination, the burden of processing (control) at the time of prior determination is reduced.

Third Embodiment
The third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 54. FIG. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment or the second embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and overlapping descriptions will be appropriately omitted and described. The third embodiment relates to the initial operation of the accessory (movable member) when the power is turned on.

[The back of the game machine]
First, with reference to FIG. 50, the configuration of the game control apparatus 100 (main board) and the like disposed on the back side of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 50 is a reverse view of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment.

On the back surface of the game board 30, the game control apparatus 100 (main board) that controls the game in an integrated manner via the switch base 738 is disposed, and the game control apparatus 100 via the control base 733 above the switch base 738. The effect control apparatus 300 which controls display apparatus 41 grade | etc., Is arrange | positioned based on the effect control command (effect command) transmitted from. At the rear of the effect control device 300, a protective cover 737 covering the back surface of the effect control device 300 and the upper surface of the back surface of the game control device 100.
Is provided. In a state where the gaming board 30 configured in this way is stored in the storage section of the front frame 12, the protective cover 737 and the game control device 100 disposed on the back of the gaming board 30 project rearward of the front frame 12. Do.

A storage unit 750 for storing game balls supplied from a supply device (not shown) provided in the island facility and for arranging and flowing the stored game balls on the upper back of the front frame 12
Is provided. A payout unit 790 for dispensing the gaming balls having flowed down from the storage unit 750 onto the upper tray 21 (see FIG. 1) is disposed on one inner side of the front frame 12.

In the lower part of the back of the front frame 12, a payout control device 200 for controlling the operation of the payout unit 790 based on data transmitted from the gaming control device 100, and a gaming ball based on the turning operation of the operation handle 24. A ball emitting device 742 to be launched, a connection terminal 743 connected to a card unit (not shown), and a power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices are disposed.

In the lower part of the back of the game control apparatus 100, the setting key switch 93 (key switch) and the setting value changing switch 102 (setting value changing button switch) of the setting changing device 42 (setting changing means) capable of changing settings relating to gaming conditions. , A button switch, and a seven-segment probability setting value display device 143 (display, LED lamp) are provided. As described above, the setting key switch 93, the setting value changing switch 102, and the probability setting value display device 143 are provided in the gaming machine 10, and can not be operated (unable to access) unless the front frame 12 is opened, for example. That is, a general player can not access and operate the setting change device 42 and can not confirm the display of the probability setting value display device 143. The setting key switch 93, the setting value change switch 102, and the probability setting value display device 143
Since it is provided inside, it is not concealed (overlapping) by the initial operation of the internal parts 44a and 44b described later and the external part 95a.

The probability setting value display device 143 may be provided at a position not hidden by the initial operation of the internal role objects 44a and 44b and the external role object 95a, and may be provided exclusively on the front of the game board 30, for example. Further, when the probability setting value is displayed so as to be visible from the front of the game board 30, the indicator (LED lamp) or the like of the collective display device 50 may be used as the probability setting value display device 143. May be used as the probability setting value display device 143. Furthermore, even in the case where the probability setting value display device 143 is provided so as to be visible from the front of the gaming board 30 as described above, it is preferable that only the operator can see without being seen by the player. For example, the display of the probability setting value display device 143 may be viewed by the operator performing a specific operation on the effect button 25. Further, the display of the probability setting value display device 143 may be made visible by the player by using a special member (for example, a polarization filter) or by receiving a specific signal from a hall computer (not shown). Similarly, although the setting change device 42 is made accessible when the front frame 12 is opened, the setting change device 42 is provided on the front surface of the game board 30, the display device 41, etc. and the operator performs a specific operation etc. It may be operable.

Further, the character ratio display section 68 of the state display device 152 for displaying the character ratio of the character to be described later with reference to FIG. 78 (A) may be used as the probability setting value display device 143 or as the probability setting value display device 143. When using the item ratio display section 68 of 152, four 7 segment types of the item ratio display section 68 (8 segment types including the point portion) during setting change or setting confirmation
The probability setting value may be displayed on any one of the displays 900 (for example, the display 900 at the left end or the right end). Note that the character ratio is displayed on the character ratio display section 68 except during setting change or setting confirmation. Therefore, the item ratio display unit 68 can be used in combination with the display of the item ratio and the display of the setting value.

Further, a cover member may be provided to cover the front surface of the setting key switch 93. By providing the cover member in this manner, it is possible to prevent an operation of the setting key switch 93 by a person who does not have the setting key or a person who performs fraud, and the security effect can be enhanced. further,
When the cover member is provided, a detection sensor may be provided to detect whether the cover member covers the setting key switch 93 or not. The game control apparatus 100 can determine whether the cover member has covered the setting key switch 93 by inputting a detection signal from the detection sensor to the second input port 123 as shown in FIG. 3, for example. . For example, when the front frame 12 is closed but the cover member does not cover the front of the setting key switch 93, the game control apparatus 100 displays an error notification on the display device 41 or the speaker 19.
By performing from LED, lamp, etc., security measures and fraud measures can be taken.

[Effect control device according to the third embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub substrate) according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 51 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control system of the game machine 10 according to the third embodiment.

In the effect control device 300 of the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the effect control device 300 of the first embodiment is that a movable body control circuit 334a is provided instead of the panel effect movable body control circuit 334. This is different from FIG.

In the effect control device 300, a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls the panel decoration device 46.
And a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling the frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 etc.)
In addition, a movable body control circuit 334a is provided.

The movable body control circuit 334 a controls driving of the board effect device 44 provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and the frame effect device 9 provided on the glass frame 15.
Drive control 5

For example, as shown in FIG. 52A, the panel effect device 44 includes internal role members 44a and 44b (inner movable members) that enhance the rendering effect in cooperation with the rendering display on the display device 41, a motor (not shown), and the like.

FIG. 52A is a front view when the board rendering device 44 of the game board 30 according to the third embodiment is operated.

The internal character 44a of the board effect device 44 is housed in the back of the center case 40 so as not to be visible to the player, and is moved in front of the display device 41 to cover the upper side of the display device 41. . The character "superheat" is drawn on the internal part 44a to notify that the jackpot's expectation is particularly high. Similarly, the internal part 44 b of the board effect device 44 is located in front of the display device 41 by moving and covers the lower left side of the display device 41. In addition, the character "♪" is drawn on the internal character 44b to notify that the degree of expectation of the big hit is high. Audio may be generated from the speaker along with the movement operation of the internal part 44b.

In the notice lottery of steps B2006 and B2009 shown in FIG. 44, the effect control device 300 causes the internal prizes 44a and 44b to be operated with a selection rate (probability) according to the set value, thereby causing the set value to be set. I can suggest it. And the player has more fun to guess the set value,
The interest of the game is improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 52B, for example, the frame effect device 95 includes an external part 95a (outer movable member) that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41, a motor (not shown), and the like.

FIG. 52B is a front view when the frame rendering device 95 of the glass frame 15 (open part) according to the third embodiment operates.

The external part 95a of the frame rendering device 95 is housed in the inside of the glass frame 15 so as not to be visible by the player, and the frame rendering device 95 becomes a hemispherical member above the glass frame 15 by driving. Stand out. A character 95b is drawn on the external part 95a to notify that the degree of expectation of the big hit is high. In addition, the frame effect device 95 is not limited to the glass frame 15, but the front frame 1
You may provide in two.

Note that the effect control device 300 can suggest a set value by causing the external part 95a to operate at a selection rate (probability) according to the set value in the preliminary drawing of steps B2006 and B2009 of FIG. . Then, the player has more pleasure in estimating the setting value, and the interest of the game is improved.

Then, the effect control device 300 executes movable body control processing to drive and control the board effect device 44 and the frame effect device 95 using the movable body control circuit 334a.

Movable body control processing
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of movable body control processing according to the third embodiment.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the power is on (B3001). Note that it may be determined whether or not the power failure is restored.

If the effect control device 300 determines that the power is not turned on (the result of B3001 is “
N "), the normal control process according to the effect contents set in the fluctuation effect setting process (FIG. 44) and the like is started (B3003). On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the power is on (the result of B3001 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not a command in progress of probability setting change is received (B3002).

The command under change probability setting is determined to be received when the MODE section indicates the setting change system by the command under change probability setting in single-shot system command processing (Fig. 39) (the result of B1325 is "Y"). Be done. That is, the front frame 12 (body frame, body portion) is opened (the result of A1023 or A1027 in FIG. 5A is “Y”), and the setting key switch 93 of the setting change device 42
Is turned on (result of A1024 or A1028 is "Y"), a command during probability setting change is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (A in FIG. 5B).
1041). By depressing the setting value change switch 102 of the setting change device 42 while changing the probability setting, the setting value regarding the game condition is changed. Further, the information of the setting value regarding the changed gaming condition is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143.

If the effect control device 300 determines that the command in the process of changing the probability setting has been received (the result of B 3002 is “Y”), it determines whether or not the command of ending the setting of the probability is received ( B3004).

When the MODE section indicates the setting change system by the command of probability setting change end in the one-shot system command processing (FIG. 39) (the result of B1325 is “Y”),
It is determined that it is receiving. That is, the probability setting value has been changed (A2406 in FIG. 10).
Result is “Y”), the setting key switch 93 is turned off (result of A2416 is “Y”), and the command of probability setting change end is from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 30.
It is transmitted to 0 (A2421).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the command under probability setting change has not been received (the result of B3002 is “N”), that is, when the normal power on, the effect frame open error It is determined whether it is occurring (B3006). For example, when a state on command indicating a body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is received as an error / illegal system command (B1315), it can be determined that a body frame opening error is occurring.

If the effect control device 300 determines that the command for ending the probability setting change has been received (
If the result of B3004 is "Y", that is, if the probability setting change is completed, it is determined whether a main body frame opening error is occurring (B3006). On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the command for ending the probability setting change is not received (the result of B3004 is “N”
), That is, when the probability setting is being changed, only the internal part 44a, 44b starts the initial operation control process (B3005).

In the initial operation control process (B3005) of the internal part 44a, 44b, for example, the motor for moving the internal part 44a of the panel effect device 44 and the motor for moving the internal part 44b are driven to drive the internal part 44a, 44b. Is moved to the front of the display device 41, and then control is performed to move to the initial position (initial operation control). Also, for example, after the initial operation control of the internal part 44a is completed, the initial operation control of the internal part 44b is performed. Thus, internal character 44
The initial operation control of a and the initial operation control of the internal part 44b are executed in order. In the case where another internal part different from the internal parts 44a and 44b is further attached, similarly, the initial operation control of each internal part is sequentially performed. The initial operation control of the internal part 44a and the initial operation control of the internal part 44b may be simultaneously performed in parallel.

If the effect control device 300 determines that a body frame opening error is occurring (the result of B3006 is “Y”), that is, if the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened, the internal role Only 44a and 44b start the initial operation control process (B3005). As described above, when the setting change device 42 is operated or the front frame 12 is opened, the effect control device 300 starts only the initial operation control processing of the internal role objects 44a and 44b, and the external role control device 300 It functions as a restricting means that restricts the initial operation of the object 95a so as not to execute it.

On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the main body frame opening error is not occurring (B3
The result of 006 is "N", that is, when the front frame 12 (body frame) is closed, the restriction of the initial operation of the external part 95a is released, and the internal parts 44a and 44b and the external part are released. Object 95a
The initial operation control process of (B3007) is started.

In the initial operation control process (B3007) of the internal role 44a, 44b and the external role 95a, the internal effects 44a, 44b of the board effect device 44 perform the initial operation control similar to the process of B3005. In the external part 95a of the frame rendering device 95, the motor for moving the external part 95a is driven to operate the external part 95a so as to project from above the glass frame 15 (open part), and then to the initial position Control to operate is performed (initial operation control). As described above, the effect control device 300 functions as a control unit that controls the operation of the internal role objects 44 a and 44 b and the external role object 95 a. When another external part different from the external part 95a is further attached, the initial operation control of the external part 95a and the initial operation control of the other external part are sequentially performed.

Further, in the initial operation control process (B3007) of the internal part 44a, 44b and the external part 95a, the time taken for the initial operation control of the internal part 44a, 44b having a large number of movable parts is the external part 95a. It takes longer than the time taken to control the initial operation. Note that the time taken for the initial operation control of the internal roles 44a and 44b is the external role even when there are multiple effect modes of the internal features 44a and 44b and the operation is complicated regardless of the number of movable features. It takes longer than the time taken to control the initial operation of the object 95a. In addition, center case 40 and glass frame 15 (
(For example, a position between the internal parts 44a and 44b and the external part 95a)
For example, in the case where a movable accessory operating toward the center side of the gaming machine 10 is provided, it is desirable to perform initial operation control on the movable accessory in the same manner as the external accessory 95a. That is, when the front frame 12 (body frame, body portion) is opened, the initial operation of the movable accessory is restricted as in the initial operation of the external accessory 95a and is not executed.

In addition, when the front frame 12 (body frame, main body portion) is opened, the initial operation of the external actor 95a is restricted to prevent execution, but the external actor 95a (first effect unit, first Movable member) restricting only the initial operation of the whole, that is, without performing the initial operation of the entire external part 95a,
Operation modes (for example, vibration, rocking, etc.) of the movable members (second effect portion, second movable member, character 95b) of the external character 95a other than the initial movement, and light emitting members (second effect portion, second movable member) The initial aspect such as the light emission aspect of (e.g., the eye of the character 95 b emits light) may be executable. That is, such a second rendering unit can switch the rendering mode to the initial mode in an initial state before executing the predetermined operation (normal operation) of the second rendering unit. By doing this, the external character 95a is the second effect part inside the opened front frame 12 (main body frame, main body part) even when the initial operation of the first effect part is restricted and is not executed. The initial aspect of can be implemented in advance.

[Timing chart of initial operation control processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 54A and 54B, the timing of the initial operation control process of the effect control device 300 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 54A is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the initial operation control process according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 54B is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the initial operation control process of the comparative example.

First, the timing of the initial operation control process according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54A.

When the power is turned on at time T1, the probability setting value changing flag and the front frame open detection switch 6
While the signal 4 (body frame open detection switch) is turned on, the initial operation of the internal part 44a is started to be executed. In addition, before the power is turned on in advance, the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on, but since the game control device 100 etc. are not in operation, probability setting until the power is turned on The value changing flag and the signal of the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) are not turned on. Also, an initial operation control process of the internal part 44a is executed (B3005 in FIG. 53). Note that the initial operation of the external part 95a is restricted and not executed.

The probability setting value changing flag is set by the main processing (FIG. 5B) (A1038).
When the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set in the probability setting value confirmation process (FIG. 11) (A2505), the flag is turned on. A command corresponding to these flags is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (A1041 in FIG. 5B, A2 in FIG. 11)
508). In addition, when the signal of the front frame opening detection switch 64 (body frame opening detection switch) is turned on (A2202), a state on command indicating a body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 ( A2207, A2217).

When the operator finishes changing the probability setting value at time T2 (A 2414 and A 24 in FIG. 10).
15) The probability setting value changing flag is cleared and turned off, and the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set and turned on (A2505 in FIG. 11). In the first embodiment, the probability setting value changing flag is on until the setting key switch 93 is turned off.
In the embodiment, when the change of the probability setting value is finished, the probability setting value changing flag is turned off, and the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is turned on. As in the first embodiment, the flag in the probability setting value confirmation mode may be omitted, and the probability setting value changing flag may be turned on until the setting key switch 93 is turned off.

Then, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time T3, the flag in the probability setting value confirmation mode is cleared and turned off (A 2510 in FIG. 11).

At time t1 after time T3, the initial operation control process for the internal part 44a is completed, whereby the initial operation control process for the internal part 44b is executed (B3005 in FIG. 53).

In the present embodiment, the time required for the initial operation of the internal parts 44a and 44b and the external part 95a (initial operation time) is the same, but may be different. For example, the initial operating time of the internal parts 44a and 44b, which is likely to be a complicated operation mode,
It may be longer than the initial operation time of 5a. In addition, the effect control device 300 increases the motor output to increase the speed of the initial operation of the internal members 44a and 44b, thereby the internal members 44a and 44.
The initial operation time of b may be shorter than the initial operation time of the external part 95a.

When the front frame 12 (body frame) is closed at time T4, the signal of the front frame opening detection switch 64 (body frame opening detection switch) is turned off, and a state off command (A2204) indicating that the body frame opening error is not generated. ) Is the command of error / incorrect system and the presentation control device 300
Sent to Then, the regulation of the initial operation of the external part 95a is released, and the initial operation control process of the external part 95a is executed (B3007 of FIG. 53). As described above, in the initial operation control process of the present embodiment, the initial operation control process of the external part 95a is not executed when the front frame 12 is opened.

At time t2 after time T4, the initial operation control process of the internal part 44b ends. Thus, in the initial operation control process of the present embodiment, the initial operation control process of the internal part 44a, 44b is
The process is started prior to the initial operation control process of the external part 95a, and finished prior to the initial operation control process of the external part 95a.

Thereafter, at time t3, the initial operation control process of the external prize 95a ends, whereby the gaming machine 1 is completed.
You will be able to play with 0.

Next, the timing of the initial operation control process according to the comparative example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54B. Note that the probability setting value change in progress flag, the probability setting value confirmation mode in progress flag, and the signal of the front frame opening detection switch 64 of the comparative example are also from time T1 to time T4 at the same timing as the initial operation control process of the third embodiment. It is turned on and off.

Here, the internal product 44a of the comparative example does not execute the initial operation control process even when the power is turned on at time T1, and the initial operation is performed by closing the front frame 12 (main body frame) at time T1. Control processing is performed. Therefore, the internal character 44a and the external character 95a of the comparative example are
The initial operation control process is started at the same timing (time T4).

Thereafter, at time t3, when the initial operation control process of the internal part 44a and the external part 95a is finished, the initial operation control process of the internal part 44b is executed. On the other hand, the time t3 is a time when it becomes possible to play a game on the gaming machine 10 according to the initial operation control process according to the present embodiment as described above.

Then, at time t4, the initial operation control process of the internal role item 44b is finished, so that the gaming machine 10 of the comparative example can also play a game. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the comparative example, the time when the game becomes possible is later than the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.

Note that although the internal operation products 44a and 44b of the present embodiment are subjected to the initial operation control process by turning on the power at time T1, when the front frame 12 is closed at time T4, the external characters 95a are processed.
An internal part may be provided whose initial operation control process is performed at the same timing as the above. For example, the operation mode of a movable member (internal part) that affects the game such as the opening / closing door 39c of the special winning opening or the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 may be changed according to the setting value. Is
After the setting value is set, an initial operation control process may be performed according to the operation mode of the setting value. By executing the initial operation control process after setting values are set in this manner, movable members (the open / close door 39c of the big winning opening and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37) which affect the game
It can be confirmed whether the V winning opening (a movable member for opening and closing the predetermined area) operates normally in accordance with the operation mode of the set value. The V winning opening (predetermined area) is a winning device that may be provided in the special variation winning device 39, and when the game ball enters the V winning opening, notification of the V winning is performed, and the big hit ends A later definite change state (high probability state, specific gaming state, one of predetermined gaming states) is determined. Also, the initial operation control process of the movable member that affects such a game is
The present invention is not limited to when the front frame 12 is closed at time T4, but may be performed when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time T3. Furthermore, the initial operation control process of the movable member may be executed when the change of the probability setting at time T2 is completed.

In addition, for the command being changed in probability setting, the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened (see A1 in FIG. 5A).
When the result of 023 or A1027 is "Y", and the setting key switch 93 of the setting change device 42 is turned on (the result of A1024 or A1028 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 1
Although it was decided to be sent to the effect control device 300 from 00 (A1041 in FIG. 5B), it may be sent by turning on the setting key switch 93 of the setting change device 42 regardless of the open state of the front frame 12 Good. Furthermore, after the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the command under the probability setting change may be transmitted at the timing when the setting value change switch 102 is first pressed.

Furthermore, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on after the power is turned on or when the front frame 12 is opened, the probability setting value changing flag is set (the command of the probability setting change is transmitted. State) The probability setting value may be changed in the setting variable state, or the probability setting value check mode may be set in this setting variable state so that the probability setting value can be confirmed. When the flag is set during the probability setting value confirmation mode, both operations of the internal part 44a, 44b and the external part 95a may be restricted and not executed, or may be returned to the initial position . When the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set, the initial operation control process of the internal prizes 44a and 44b is executed as in the case where the command under the probability setting change in the present embodiment is transmitted. On the other hand, the initial operation of the external part 95a may be restricted so as not to be executed.

[Operation and Effect of Third Embodiment]
The game machine 10 provided with an openable frame (for example, the glass frame 15 and the front frame 12 (body frame)) in which the game board 30 having the game area 32 according to the third embodiment is disposed is predetermined inside the frame Change the setting regarding the game by the formation of the inner movable member (internal part 44a, 44b) that performs the action of the above, the outer movable member (the outer part 95a) that performs the predetermined action outside the frame, and the establishment of the predetermined condition A possible setting change means (setting change device 42), and a control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the operation of the inner movable member and the outer movable member. The control means can execute the initial operation of the inner movable member and the outer movable member by turning on the power to the game machine 10, and can change the setting while the power is turned on to the game machine 10. When in the state, the initial movement of the outer movable member is not performed, and the initial movement of the inner movable member can be performed.

According to such a gaming machine 10, when the control means (effect control device 300) is in a state where the setting can be changed when the game machine 10 is powered on (for example, the setting changing means) Is operated (when the setting key switch 93 is turned on) or when the frame is opened, the initial operation of the outer movable member is not performed. Therefore, when operating the setting changing means or opening and closing the frame, the outer movable member can be prevented from coming into contact with the operator or interfering with the frame, and in the gaming machine, the initial operation of the movable member is appropriate Can be

The gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment further includes a setting display device (probability setting value display device 143) capable of displaying setting values corresponding to settings relating to a game. The setting display device is provided at a position which is not concealed by the initial operation of the inner movable members (the inner members 44a and 44b) and the outer movable member (the outer members 95a). According to such a gaming machine 10, since it is possible to prevent the setting display device from being hidden by the initial operation of the inner movable member and the outer movable member during the probability setting change, it is possible to suppress the interruption of the operator's operation. it can.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the control means (effect control device 300) releases the restriction on the initial operation of the outer movable member (the external prize 95a) when the setting changeable state is ended. To be possible. According to such a gaming machine 10, when operating the setting change means,
When opening and closing the frame, the outer movable member can be prevented from contacting the operator or interfering with the frame.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the control means (effect control device 300) takes a longer time than the time required for the initial operation of the outer movable member (external accessory 95a) to move the inner movable member (internal Execute the initial operation of the accessory 44a, 44b). According to such a gaming machine 10, the initial operation of the inner movable member having a long time for the initial operation control is started during the probability setting change, and the initial operation of the outer movable member having the short time for the initial operation control is It is started by closing a frame (front frame 12, main body frame) after completion of probability setting change. Therefore, since the initial operation of the time-consuming inner movable member can be started earlier than when the initial movement of the inner movable member and the outer movable member is started simultaneously after the frame is closed, the game can be started. You can shorten the time to

In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, whether the control means (effect control device 300) is operated as the setting changing means (setting changing device 42) even when the game machine 10 is powered on. Or when the frame (front frame 12, main body frame) is opened, the control means (production control device 300) which regulates the initial operation of the outside movable member (external part 95a) is provided. According to such a gaming machine 10, since the outer movable member does not move during probability setting change or when the frame is opened, the outer movable member can be prevented from contacting the operator or interfering with the frame. .

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment includes an open portion (glass frame 15) attached to the main body (the front frame 12 and the main frame) so as to be able to open and close. The gaming machine 10 has a first effect unit (external prize 95a, a first movable member) that executes a predetermined operation outside the opening portion, and a setting change unit (setting that can change settings relating to a game by the establishment of a predetermined condition) A change device (42) and control means (effect control apparatus 300) for controlling the operation of the first effect section are provided. The first effect section has a second effect section (character 95 b, second movable member) capable of switching the effect mode in an initial state before executing a predetermined operation (normal operation). The control means can execute the initial mode of the second effect part and the initial operation of the first effect part by turning on the power to the game machine 10, and the power is turned on to the game machine 10 and the setting is changed. If it is in the enabled state,
The initial mode of the second effect section is made executable without executing the initial operation of the effect section. According to such a gaming machine 10, the second effect portion (the character 95b, the second movable member) having a low possibility of touching the operator or interfering with the frame is replaced with the first effect portion (the external character object 95a, the second effect portion). 1) can be initialized in the initial mode prior to the initial movement of the (movable member).

Fourth Embodiment
The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 67. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to third embodiments. The fourth embodiment relates to a setting indication effect that can indicate a setting value.

[Set value reception process]
First, with reference to FIG. 55, details of the setting value reception processing (B1324) in the above-described one-shot system command processing (FIG. 39) will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of a process of setting value reception according to the fourth embodiment.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether the received set value is a normal command (B4001). If the command is not normal (the result of B4001 is “N”), the process for setting value reception ends. If the command is normal (the result of B4001 is "Y"), the setting value is stored in the RAM or the like of the effect control device 300 (B4002). Then, the effect control device 300 draws the light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit according to the received setting value in order to perform setting suggestion effect that can indicate the setting value in the predetermined light emitting unit (B4003) . The predetermined light emitting part is
For example, the light emission aspect (color) of the predetermined light emission part is the protrusion effect unit 13 (see FIG. 1),
It becomes a setting determination element that causes the player to estimate the setting (setting value). In addition, the predetermined light emission part (rendering device) is not limited to the projecting effect unit 13 but may be a light emitting member capable of emitting light (frame decoration device 18, decoration device 22, panel decoration device 46, big winning opening LED 39d, etc.) You can use the display screen of.

[Lottery table of initial light emission mode]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the selection rate of the initial light emission mode (initial color) of the setting suggestion effect drawn by the effect control device 300 when the setting value is received will be described. FIG. 56 is a table for determining an initial light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect of the fourth embodiment (initial color determination).

The initial color of the setting suggestion effect is selected from, for example, six types of white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow, as shown in FIG. 56, according to the received setting values 1 to 6 (settings 1 to 6) Selectivity and selectable types change.

First, the change in the type of selectable initial color according to the received setting value will be described. When the received setting value is the settings 1 to 3, the initial color of the setting suggestion effect is selected from white, blue and green. On the other hand, in the case of setting 4, green can be selected as the initial color in the case of setting 4, and in the case of setting 5, red and green can also be selected. In the case of setting 6, all types are selected It will be possible. Therefore, the player is the setting 4 or more when the initial color of the predetermined light emitting unit of the gaming machine 10 is green, the setting 5 or more when the color is red, and the setting when the color is rainbow It can be estimated to be 6.

Next, the change in the selection rate of the initial color selected by lottery in accordance with the received set value will be described.

When the received setting value is setting 1, the initial color selection rate is 80% for white, 15% for blue, and 5% for yellow. The selection rate of white as the initial color is set to 75% in case of setting 2 and 70% in case of setting 3 so that the selection rate becomes lower as the received set value becomes higher. . In the present embodiment, the selection ratio of white is set to decrease by 5% every time the received set value is increased by one, but a range of certain set values (for example, settings 4 to 6) May be set to be the same. As described above, since the selection rate of white as the initial color is higher as the setting value is lower, the player finds the gaming machine 10 in which the initial color of the predetermined light emitting part is white. It becomes easy to estimate that 10 is likely to be a low setting platform.

On the other hand, the yellow selectivity as the initial color is 5% in case of setting 1 and 10 in case of setting 2
%, And in the case of settings 3 to 6, the selection rate is set to be higher as the received set value becomes higher. In the present embodiment, the yellow selectivity in the settings 3 to 6 is fixed at 15%, but the selectivity may be set higher as the set value becomes higher.

Further, the selection rates of the initial colors (green, red) selectable in setting 4 or setting 5 and the initial colors (green, red, rainbow) selectable in setting 6 are respectively set to 5%. Therefore, since the probability that non-white is selected as the initial color is higher as the setting value is higher, the player finds the gaming machine 10 in which the initial color of the predetermined light emitting part is other than white. It becomes easy to estimate that the gaming machine 10 is highly likely to be at a high setting.

In addition, the selectivity of each initial color is not limited to the aspect of FIG. 56, and the value may be changed as appropriate. For example,
The rainbow selection rate in setting 6 is not limited to 5%, and may be 1% or 10%. In this case, the selectivities of the other colors are appropriately adjusted such that the overall selectivity is 100% in accordance with the change in the rainbow selectivity.

[Fanfare production setting process]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 57, details of the fanfare effect setting process (B2102) in the above-mentioned big hit system command process (FIG. 45) will be described as an aspect in which the light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect changes. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fanfare effect setting process according to the fourth embodiment.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether the received fanfare command is a normal command (B4101). If the command is not normal (the result of B 4101 is “N”), the fanfare effect setting process is ended. If the command is normal (B4
The result of 101 updates the number of big hits stored in the RAM or the like of the effect control device 300 by +1 (B4102).

Then, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the number of big hits has reached a predetermined number (B
4103). When the number of big hits is a predetermined number (the result of B4103 is “Y”),
The effect control device 300 draws the light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit according to the received setting value (B4104), and sets the fanfare display on the display device 41 and the fanfare sound from the speaker according to the setting value. (B4105). The predetermined number of times is three times, six times, nine times ...
And specific (for example, 3) multiples can be set. Also, the predetermined number of times may be a natural number, for example, every odd number of times (once, three times ...) or every integer number of times (twice, four times ...
Or may be set to be a specific number sequence (for example, Fibonacci number sequence of once, twice, three times, five times, eight times, thirteen times, etc.).

On the other hand, when the number of big hits is not the predetermined number (the result of B4103 is "N"),
The effect control device 300 sets the fanfare display and the fanfare sound according to the setting values (B4105). Here, the fanfare display and the fanfare sound may be set by lottery with a selection rate (probability) according to the setting value. Thereafter, when the process of B4105 ends, the effect control device 300 ends the fanfare effect setting process.

[Promotion lottery table of light emission mode]
Next, referring to FIG. 58, about the selection rate of the light emission mode (promoted lottery color) by the promotion (step-up) lottery of the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare production setting process at the big hit start explain. FIG. 58 is a table for determining a light emission mode (a promotion lottery color determination) based on a promotion lottery of setting suggestion effects of the fourth embodiment. Figure 5
8 (A) is a table for determining the advanced lottery color when the current color of the predetermined light emitting part is white, and FIG. 58 (B) is a table for determining the advanced lottery color when the current color is blue. is there.

As shown in FIG. 58A, for example, the promotion lottery color of the setting suggestion effect when the current color of the predetermined light emitting part is white is, for example, without promotion (white continuation), blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow It is selected from six types, and the selection rate and selectable types change according to the current setting values (settings 1 to 6).

First, it will be described that the types of selectable elevation colors that can be selected change according to the current setting value. When the current setting value is the settings 1 to 3, the promotion lottery color of the setting suggestion effect is selected from among none, blue and yellow. On the other hand, if the current setting value is setting 4, green can also be selected as the elevated lottery color, if setting 5 it is possible to select green and red as well, and if setting 6, all types It becomes selectable. Therefore, the player is the setting 4 or more when the elevation lottery color of the predetermined light emitting portion of the gaming machine 10 is green, the setting 5 or more when the color is red, and the setting when the color is rainbow. It can be estimated to be 6.

Next, it will be described that the selection rate of the promoted lottery color selected by the lottery changes in accordance with the current setting value.

When the current setting value is setting 1, the selection rate of no promotion (white continuation) is 8 as the promotion lottery color
0%, blue selectivity 15%, yellow selectivity 5%. Then, the selection rate without promotion as the promotion lottery color is set such that the selection rate becomes lower as the current setting value becomes higher, such as 75% in the case of setting 2 and 70% in the case of setting 3 Be done. In the present embodiment, the selection rate without promotion is set to decrease by 5% every time the current set value increases by one, but a range of certain set values (for example, settings 4 to 6) ) May be set to be the same.
As described above, since the selection rate of no promotion (white continuation) as the elevated lottery color is higher as the setting value is lower, the player becomes a state where the elevated lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit is not promoted during the game. By confirming that the game is in progress, it is easy to estimate that the gaming machine 10 in the game is highly likely to be at a low setting.

On the other hand, the yellow selection rate as the promotion lottery color is 5% in the case of setting 1, 10% in the case of setting 2, 15% in the case of setting 3 to 6, and the current setting value is high. The selectivity is set to be higher as In the present embodiment, the yellow selectivity in the settings 3 to 6 is fixed at 15%, but the selectivity may be set higher as the set value becomes higher.

In addition, the selection rates of the elevated lottery colors (green, red) selectable in setting 4 or setting 5 and the elevated lottery colors (green, red, rainbow) selectable in setting 6 are set to 5%, respectively. . Therefore, the higher the setting value is, the higher the probability that anything other than no promotion (white continuation) is selected as the promotion lottery color becomes high, so the player changes the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit by promotion during the game. By confirming that the game is in progress, it is easy to estimate that the gaming machine 10 in the game is highly likely to be a high setting stand. In addition, it can be connected to the motive for the player's continuation game by being able to estimate that there is a high possibility that the gaming machine 10 in the game is a stand of high setting by the promotion lottery.

Subsequently, the promotion lottery color of the setting suggestion effect when the current color of the predetermined light emitting part is blue is shown in FIG.
As shown in B), for example, no promotion (blue continuous), yellow, green, red and rainbow are selected from 5 types,
As in the case where the current color is white as described above, the selectivity and the selectable types change according to the current setting values 1 to 6 (settings 1 to 6).

First, it will be described that the types of selectable elevation colors that can be selected change according to the current setting value. When the current setting value is setting 1 or setting 2, the promotion lottery color of the setting suggestion effect is selected as either non-promotion or yellow. On the other hand, if the current setting value is setting 3, green can also be selected as the enhanced lottery color, and if setting 4 or setting 5, green and red can also be selected, and setting 6 All types can be selected. Therefore, the player is the setting 3 or more when the elevation lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit of the gaming machine 10 is green, and the setting 4 when the promotion lottery color is red.
If it is a rainbow, it can be estimated that the setting is 6.

Next, it will be described that the selection rate of the promoted lottery color selected by the lottery changes in accordance with the current setting value.

If the current setting value is setting 1, the selection rate of no promotion (continuous blue) is 9 as the promotion lottery color
5%, yellow selectivity will be 5%. Then, the selection rate without promotion as the promotion lottery color is 80% in the case of setting 2 and setting 3, 75% in the case of setting 4, etc., and the selection rate decreases as the current setting value increases. Is set as In the present embodiment, the selection rate without promotion is set to be the same value or lower every time the current setting value is increased by one. Thus, the lower the setting value, the higher the selection rate without promotion (continuation of blue) as the elevated lottery color.
The player estimates that the gaming machine 10 in the game is likely to be at a low setting by confirming that the elevated lottery color of the predetermined light emitting part is in the state of no promotion during the game. It becomes easy to do.

On the other hand, the yellow selection rate as the promoted lottery color is 5% in case of setting 1, 20% in case of setting 2, 15% in case of setting 3 or 4 and setting 5 or 6 In the case it is set to 20%. Here, in the case of setting 3 or setting 4 (15%), the yellow selection rate as the promoted lottery color is
In the case of setting 2 (20%), which is a low setting, the selectivity is higher than in the case of. However, the selection rates that are promoted for setting 3 are yellow selectivity (15%) and green selectivity (20
It becomes the sum with%) and becomes equal to the selection rate with promotion in case of setting 2. In addition, setting 2
In the case of setting 3, there is a possibility that it will be promoted to green in two steps at once in the case of setting 3, and setting 4
In the case of, there is a possibility that it will be promoted to three stages and become red. In the case of setting 5, there is a possibility that the promoted lottery color will be immediately promoted to red by three steps, and in the case of setting 6, there is a possibility of being promoted to four steps by rainbow. Therefore, it is easy for the player to estimate that there is a high possibility that the gaming machine 10 in the game is a high setting by confirming that the elevated lottery color of the predetermined light emitting part has been promoted in multiple stages during the game. Become.

In addition, in the case of the promotion lottery color (not shown) of the setting suggestion effect when the current color of the predetermined light emitting part is green or later, as in the case where the current color is blue, only the promotion is promoted and the upper color is promoted It is possible to determine whether to change to the elevated lottery color. According to such an aspect, the game machine 10 in the game is set high by the player confirming that the elevated lottery color of the predetermined light emitting part has been promoted to a higher rank (red or rainbow) during the game. It is easy to estimate that it is likely to be on the platform.

In the present embodiment, although the case where the promotion lottery is performed in the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare effect setting process has been described, a demotion lottery may be performed. By performing the demotion lottery, for example, when the current color of the predetermined light emitting unit is blue, it can be changed to white.

In addition, in the case of performing the demotion lottery, for example, after the promotion to the rainbow, the demotion lottery may not be performed. In this way, by not performing the demotion lottery after reaching the rainbow, the player can continuously obtain a sense of achievement that the setting suggestion effect of the high setting (setting 6) is reached, and the interest of the game is improved. It can be done.

Furthermore, although a multi-level promotion was possible in the promotion drawing, it may be possible to demote the color to a lower color one by one in the demotion drawing. As described above, in the relegation lottery, by avoiding the multi-stage demotion mode, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by the setting suggestion effect falling rapidly to the low setting, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the selection rate of each promoted lottery color is not limited to the aspect of FIG. 58 but can be appropriately changed in value similarly to the selection rate of the initial color described with reference to FIG. For example, the rainbow selection rate in setting 6 is not limited to 5%, and may be 1% or 10%. Further, as the current color becomes the upper color, the selection rate of the higher color may be higher. Specifically, for example, setting 6
In this case, if the current color is green, the rainbow selection rate is set to 10%, and if it is red, the rainbow selection rate is set to 35%, etc., the upper colors according to the current color hierarchy The selectivity of can be increased.

[Ending effect setting process]
The mode in which the light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect in the big hit system command processing (FIG. 45) described above changes is not limited to the fanfare effect setting process (B2102) (see FIG. 57), and the ending effect setting as shown in FIG. It may be generated in the process (B2111). FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ending effect setting process according to the modification of the fourth embodiment.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether the received ending command is a normal command (B4201). If the command is not normal (the result of B4201 is “
N ”), end the ending effect setting process. If the command is normal (B420
The result of 1 is “Y”), and the number of big hits stored in the RAM or the like of the effect control device 300 is +1.
Update (B4202).

Then, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the number of big hits has reached a predetermined number (B
4203). When the number of big hits is a predetermined number (the result of B4203 is “Y”),
The effect control device 300 draws the light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit according to the received setting value (B 4204), and sets the ending display on the display device 41 and the ending sound from the speaker according to the setting value. (B4205). Here, the ending display and the ending sound may be set by lottery with a selection rate (probability) according to the setting value. The predetermined number of times may be a natural number, and may be set for each specific multiple, each odd number, or each integer number, or may be set to be a specific number sequence.

On the other hand, when the number of big hits is not the predetermined number (the result of B 4203 is “N”),
The effect control device 300 sets the ending display and the ending sound according to the set value (
B4205). Thereafter, when the process of B4205 ends, the effect control device 300 ends the ending effect setting process.

The selection rate of the light emission mode (elevated lottery color) by the promotion lottery of the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery (B4204) in the ending effect setting process at the start of the big hit is the fanfare effect setting process described in FIG. It may be the same as the lottery (B4104).

[Process when receiving out ball number]
In addition, the light emission mode of the setting indication effect may be changed at the time of reception of the out-of-sphere number. Figure 60 shows
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process (B1320 of FIG. 39) at the time of out sphere number reception which concerns on 4th Embodiment.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether the received out-sphere number command is a normal command (B4301). If the command is not normal (the result of B4301 is “N
"), The processing at the time of reception of the out ball number is ended. If the command is normal (the result of B4301 is "Y"), the out-of-ball number is stored in the RAM or the like of the effect control device 300 (B4302).
The number of out balls can be counted, for example, in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (FIG. 8).

Then, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the number of out balls has reached a predetermined number (B4).
303). When the number of out-of-spheres is a predetermined number (the result of B4303 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 draws a light emission mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit according to the received set value (
B4304). The predetermined number may be a natural number, and can be set, for example, every multiple of a specific number (every 1000 spheres, ie, 1000, 2000, 3000...). Note that
The selection rate of the light emission mode (promoted lottery color) by the lottery (B4304) may be the same as the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare effect setting process described above with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when the number of out-of-field balls is not a predetermined number (the result of B4303 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the out-of-ball number reception process.

[RTC read processing]
Furthermore, at the time of RTC reading processing (B 0009) in the main processing (FIG. 36), the light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect may be changed. FIG. 61 shows an RTC reading process (B according to the fourth embodiment).
0009) is a flow chart showing the procedure.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether the received signal from the RTC 338 is a normal signal (B4401). If the signal is not normal (the result of B4401 is "N")
, Finish the RTC reading process. If the signal is normal (the result of B4401 is “Y”),
The effect control device 300 acquires information indicating the current time (B4402). The information indicating the current time is generated by a signal from the RTC 338 that forms a clock.

Then, the effect control device 300 calculates the elapsed time from the game start (or the power on) (
B4403) It is determined whether the elapsed time has reached a predetermined time (B4404). If the elapsed time has reached the predetermined time (the result of B4404 is “Y”), the effect control device 300
A light emission mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit is drawn according to the received set value (B4405). The predetermined time can be set, for example, every two hours (for example, 11 o'clock, 13 o'clock, 15 o'clock, etc.). In addition, the selection rate of the light emission aspect (promotion lottery color) by lottery (B4405) is shown in FIG.
It may be the same as the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare effect setting process described above.

On the other hand, when the elapsed time has not reached the predetermined time (the result of B 4404 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the RTC reading process.

[Count information setting process]
Also, at the time of count information setting processing in single-shot system command processing (FIG. 39) (B1322)
The light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect may be changed. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the count information setting process according to the fourth embodiment.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether the received command of the count (large winning opening count command) is a normal command (B4501). If the command is not normal (the result of B4501 is "N"), the count information setting process is ended. If the command is a normal command (the result of B4501 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the jackpot operation is in progress (B4502). When the jackpot is not in operation (the result of B4502 is “N”), the count information setting process is ended.

When the jackpot operation is in progress (the result of B4502 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 updates the count number by +1 (B4503). Add the number of winning balls in the big winning opening to the number of winning balls earned (B45
04) Perform update settings for the acquired ball number display and the count display (count number display) (B45)
05). Here, the number of counts and the number of balls obtained are the number of counts and number of balls obtained in a row from the start of the big hit to the return to the normal gaming state, but the number of counts in one big hit and It may be the number of winning balls, or may be the total count number from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 and the number of winning balls.

Then, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the number of balls obtained has reached a predetermined number (B4).
506). When the number of balls obtained is a predetermined number (the result of B 4506 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 lottery the light emission mode (color) of the special winning opening LED 39 d in accordance with the received setting value (B4507). The predetermined number may be a natural number, and can be set, for example, every multiple of a specific number (every 5,000 balls, that is, 5,000, 10,000, 15,000, etc.). The selection rate of the light emission mode (promotion lottery color) by the promotion lottery (B4507) may be the same as the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare effect setting process described above with reference to FIG.
Next, the acquired balls-out number display, the count display, and the like are displayed and set according to the set values as described later with reference to FIGS. 63A, 63B, and 64 (B4508). Here, the display modes such as the number-of-obtained-balls-in-one display and the count display are drawn at a selection rate according to the set value.

On the other hand, when the number of balls obtained is not a predetermined number (the result of B 4506 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the count information setting process.

In the count information setting process, when the jackpot is in operation (the result of B4502 is “Y”), the winning ball number of the big winning opening is added to the winning ball number (B4504), and the big winning opening LED3
9d light emission mode (color) was raised for lottery (B4507), but by adding winnings to start winning hole 36 and normal fluctuation winning device 37 to the number of balls obtained during the normal gaming state, to the number of balls obtained,
The light emitting unit (LED) provided in the start winning opening 36 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37 may emit light in accordance with the set value.

Here, the setting of updating the display of the number-of-obtained-out-of-balls display and the count display according to the setting value will be described with reference to FIGS. 63A and 63B. FIG. 63A is a view showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 at the time of big hit in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 63B is a view showing another example. In the example of FIG. 63A and FIG. 63B, when the number of obtained balls has become a predetermined number, the display mode of the display of the number of obtained balls, the count display, and the display of other information is drawn at a selection rate according to the setting value. Set the display.

When the number of balls obtained has not reached a predetermined number (for example, 5000) (the result of B4506 is “N
The display screen of the display device 41 during the big hit round of “)” is, for example, as shown in FIG. 63A.

In the upper left corner of the display screen, a round number display 676 for displaying the current number of big hit rounds is displayed by, for example, “1” R and numeral notation (Arabic numerals (“1, 2, 3...”)). Further, in the upper right corner and the lower left corner of the display screen, a right hitting instruction notification 691 which is a notification instructing to hit the right is displayed. Furthermore, at the left end of the display screen, the big hit result mode (big hit stop symbol,
The big hit stop symbol "7, 7, 7" (stop result, stop symbol) of the special variation display game immediately before becoming the special result aspect) is displayed, for example, as "7" and numeral notation (Arabic numeral). And
In the lower right corner of the display screen, an effect point display 678 for displaying effect points is, for example, “00
Displayed in 30 "pt and numerical notation (Arabic numerals). In the right middle corner of the display screen, the acquired ball number display 681 and the count display 682 are numerically written as, for example, “4910” and “150”.
Displayed in Arabic numerals).

Next, the display screen of the display device 41 during the big hit round when the number of acquired balls is a predetermined number (for example, 5000) (the result of B 4506 is “Y”) is as shown in FIG. 63B, for example.

Here, for example, as the setting value is lower, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), the current jackpot round number display 676 ("壱" R) and the presentation point display 678 ("30" pt)
It becomes easy to be displayed in kanji ("壱, 弐, 参 ・ ・ ・"). In addition, the number 68 of the current winnings display
1 ("five thousand") and count indication 682 ("one hundred fifty-seven") are kanji notation (Kanji ("壱, 弐,
It becomes easy to be displayed by "...")).

FIG. 64 is for determining the display mode of the display of the number of acquired balls display 681 as the setting suggestion effect, the count display 682 and other information (big hit round display 676, effect point display, etc.) in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a table of. FIG. 64 (A) is a table showing that the selection rate (allocation ratio) of Arabic numerals (numeric notation) or kanji (kanji notation) changes according to the setting value, and FIG. 64 (B) shows the setting value. It is a table which shows that the selectivity of a color changes according to.

For example, in the case of setting 1, the selection rate of numerical notation is 45%, and the selection rate of kanji notation is 5
It will be 5%. On the other hand, in case of setting 6, the selection rate of numerical notation is as high as 75%, and the selection rate of kanji notation is as low as 25%. Therefore, the player can estimate the setting value by confirming whether the display on the display screen is numeric notation or kanji notation when the setting suggestion effect is performed.

In the case of numerical notation, as shown in FIG. 63A, the display screen is the same as in the case where the number of acquired balls is not a predetermined number. Also, when the number of winning balls is a predetermined number, the big hit stop symbol 677 may be displayed in kanji notation ("seven (or lacquer)") according to the set value, "setting suggestion effect occurrence!", Etc. Characters or the like may be displayed on the display screen to notify the player that the setting suggestion effect has occurred. Furthermore, in addition to numeric notation and kanji notation, other notation formats (for example
The selectivity may be set to be displayed as "I, II, III ...")).

In addition, the determination of the display mode of the setting suggestion effect changes the selection rate of numeric notation, kanji notation, etc. and changes the selection rate of the color displayed according to the setting value as shown in FIG. 64 (B). You may

For example, in the case of setting 1, the selectivity for black is 35%, and the selectivity for blue is 45%. On the other hand, in case of setting 6, the black selectivity is as high as 70% and the blue selectivity is as low as 20%. Therefore, the player can estimate the setting value by confirming what color the display on the display screen shows when the setting suggestion effect is being performed.

When the setting value is odd (1, 3, 5), the red selectivity is 20%, even (2, 4, 5).
In the case of 6), the red selectivity is 10%. Therefore, the player can estimate that the setting value is an odd number or an even number by checking whether the display on the display screen is red when the setting suggestion effect is being performed.

As described above, the player can estimate the setting value from the display screen by determining the display mode of the display screen of the display device 41 during the big hit round according to the setting value and performing the setting suggestion effect. Note that the display mode of the display screen is not limited to numerical notation or the like and colors, and may be performed by changing the size, font, and the like of characters. In addition, a predetermined symbol or figure or the like corresponding to the setting value may be displayed on the display screen by the setting suggestion effect.

[Modification of light emission mode change (promotion etc.)]
The light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit may be changed (promoted) from the initial light emission mode (initial color) during execution of the special view variation display game. Regarding the relationship of the degree of expectation of the big hit in this case, when it is not a big hit (when the degree of expectation is low), the light emission mode (initial color) corresponding to the set value
In this case, the light emission mode (initial color) corresponding to the setting value may be changed to the light emission mode corresponding to the expectation of the effect. In addition, after the end of the special view variation display game, the predetermined light emitting unit may be returned from the light emission mode corresponding to the expectation degree to the light emission mode (initial color) corresponding to the setting value. Furthermore, when it is not a big hit (when the degree of expectation is low), it is easy to promote the light emission mode of a predetermined light emitting part with a low setting value so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming will. In a mode in which the selection ratio of settings 1 to 6 in the promotion lottery table such as 58 etc. is reversed (for example, a mode in which the selection ratio between settings 1 to 3 and settings 4 to 6 is reversed), the player May be interested.

On the other hand, in the case of a big hit (when the degree of expectation is high), similarly, the light emission mode corresponding to the set value is not changed as it is, or from the light emission mode corresponding to the set value to the light emission mode corresponding to the expectation And may be changed. In addition, after the end of the special figure variation display game,
The predetermined light emitting unit may be returned from the light emission mode corresponding to the degree of expectation to the light emission mode (initial color) corresponding to the setting value. As described above, in the execution period in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, during the special figure variation display game), the setting value is set according to the degree of expectation that the result of the special figure variation display game becomes a big hit (special result). It is possible to switch between the corresponding light emission mode (setting suggestion effect) and the light emission mode (expected degree notification effect for notifying the expectation degree) corresponding to the expectation degree of the effect.

Therefore, when the expectation of the big hit is high, if the expectation of the big hit is notified by changing from the setting suggestion effect to the expectation information effect, the game can be enjoyed and the interest of the game can be improved.
Conversely, when the degree of expectation is low, if the expectation degree notification effect is changed to the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to give the player an expectation and the possibility of improving the interest of the game and the operation of the gaming machine may be improved. There is.

Furthermore, in the case of a big hit (when the degree of expectation is high), it is difficult to promote the light emission mode of a predetermined light emitting unit with a high setting value so as to make it easy to focus attention on effects on the display device 41. 58 is a mode in which the selection ratio of settings 1 to 6 in the elevation lottery table in FIG. 58 is reversed (for example, a mode in which the selection ratio between settings 1 to 3 and settings 4 to 6 is reversed) The light emission mode of the predetermined light emitting unit at the high setting may be made uninteresting to the player. As described above, it is possible to make it difficult to promote the light emission mode of the predetermined light emitting unit with the high setting value. As a result, the player can be expected to have a sense of expectation in a well-balanced manner without excessively expecting a sense of expectation by the highly expected effect on the display device 41 and the light emission mode having a low degree of expectation of the predetermined light emitting portion. Since the effect on the display device 41 and the light emission mode of the predetermined light emitting portion do not correspond to each other, the effect is surprising and the interest can be improved.

Also, in other cases (when the player gazes at the display device 41 at the moment of a notice of a drop or a big hit, etc.), the predetermined light emitting unit is temporarily switched to the light emission mode based on the effect and ceases to gaze at the display device 41 It may return to the light emission mode of the rate based on a setting value by becoming a state (condition). Furthermore, even when the effect to be watched by the display device 41 is performed, the light emission mode may be set to a ratio based on the setting value regardless of the effect. In addition, once the light emission mode (color) has a low degree of expectation, it may be changed to the light emission mode based on the effect.

[Hole / player setting mode processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the details of the hall / player setting mode process (B0011) in the main process (FIG. 36) described above will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a procedure of hall / player setting mode processing according to the fourth embodiment executed by the effect control device 300.

A hall setting mode in which a person in charge of a hall (gaming shop) can perform various settings of the gaming machine 10 or a player setting mode in which the player can perform various settings of the gaming machine 10 is activated by the hall / player setting mode processing. It can be done.

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the hole setting mode is in progress (B4601).
). When the flag in the hole setting mode described later is set, it can be determined that the hole setting mode is in progress. When in the hole setting mode (result of B4601 is “Y”), B4
Perform the processing of 606-B4616, the effect button 25 by the person in charge of the hall (game arcade), etc.
Various settings and various adjustments are performed based on the operation of (effect button switch 25a, touch panel 25b).

When the hall control mode is not in progress (the result of B4601 is "N")
), It is determined whether or not the player setting mode is in progress (B4602). When the player setting mode in progress flag described below is set, it can be determined that the player setting mode is in progress. When the player setting mode is in progress (the result of B4602 is "Y"), the processing of B4620-B2425 is performed, and various settings and various adjustments are performed based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player.

If the effect control device 300 is not in the player setting mode (the result of B4602 is “N”
), It is determined whether the hole setting mode start condition is satisfied (B4603). For example, when an operation of the effect button 25 for entering the hall setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010) while waiting for a guest, it can be determined that the hole setting mode start condition is satisfied. Here, “waiting for a customer” means, for example, a state in which a video for waiting for a customer (a demonstration for waiting for a customer) is displayed on the display device 41. When the hole setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B4603 is "N"), the processing of B4617 is executed.

When the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B 4603 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 draws a screen for starting screen drawing (drawing of a hole setting screen) on the display device 41 in the hole setting mode. The start setting is made (B4604). Then, a flag is set during the hole setting mode (B4605).

Next, the effect control device 300 adjusts the volume of the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the person in charge of the hall or the like (H4).
606), Hall LED adjustment processing (B4607) for adjusting the luminance (brightness) and light emission color of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, the display part of the display device 41 (liquid crystal display etc.)
The liquid crystal brightness adjustment process (B4608) for adjusting the brightness of B. and the power saving setting process (B4609) for setting the power saving are executed. Next, the effect control device 300 executes logo color setting processing for setting the light emission color and the like of the logo combination (B4610).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation input (B4611). When the operation signal by the setting confirmation operation of the effect button 25 is detected in the effect button input process (B0010),
It can be determined that there is a setting confirmation operation input. When there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B4611 is "N"), the hall / player setting mode process is ended.

Then, when there is a setting confirmation operation input (the result of B4611 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the setting at the time of factory shipment has been confirmed (B4612). When there is no operation of the effect button 25 other than the setting confirmation operation, it can be determined that the setting at the time of shipment from the factory is confirmed. If it is not confirmed by the factory settings (the result of B4612 is “N”), B461
Proceed to step 4. When it is decided by the factory default settings (the result of B4612 is "Y"), the factory default setting processing is performed to perform various settings and adjustments in the factory default settings (B4613)
). The factory default settings are default settings stored in a memory such as the ROM 321. Next, backup memory (for example, FeRAM 32) is set as the hole setting data (or the hole adjustment data) such as the volume and various luminances determined in B4606-B4610 and B4613.
3) Write (B4614).

Next, the effect control device 300 performs screen drawing end setting for ending the screen drawing on the display device 41 in the hole setting mode (B4615). Then, the flag in the hole setting mode is cleared (B4616).

If the hall setting mode start condition is not satisfied (B460
It is determined whether the result of 3 is “N”) and the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (B4617)
). It can be determined that the player setting mode start condition is satisfied, for example, when an operation of the effect button 25 for entering the player setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010) while waiting for a guest. If the player setting mode start condition is not satisfied (B
The result of 4617 is “N”), and the hall / player setting mode process ends.

When the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B 4617 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 performs screen drawing start setting for starting screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode ( B4618). Then, a flag is set during the player setting mode (B4619).

Next, the effect control device 300 adjusts the volume of the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player, the player volume adjustment process (B4620), the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration A player LED adjustment process (B4621) for adjusting the brightness (brightness) of the LED of the device 46 is executed.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 executes effect customization processing for customizing (individual setting) effects based on the player's operation of the effect button 25 or the like (B4622). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation input (B4623). If there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B 4623 is “N”), the hall / player setting mode processing is ended. When the setting confirmation operation is input (the result of B 4623 is “Y”), the screen drawing end setting for ending the screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode is performed (B 4624)
. Then, the flag during the player setting mode is cleared (B4625). In addition, B4620-
Since player setting data (or player adjustment data) such as volume and brightness determined in B4622 may be erased, it is not written in the backup memory.

[Display screen example of hall setting mode]
FIG. 66A shows the display device 4 when in the hole setting mode in the fourth embodiment.
It is a figure which shows an example of a display screen of 1. FIG.

When the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B 4603 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 starts screen drawing in the hole setting mode (B 4604), and as shown in FIG. 66A, the volume is displayed on the display screen. Setting window 711, luminescent color setting window 712, and brightness setting window 713
Display The volume setting window 711 is a display used for the hall volume adjustment processing (B4606), and the luminance setting window 713 is a hall LED adjustment processing (B4607) or a liquid crystal luminance adjustment processing (B
4608). Luminescent color setting window 712 is a hall LED adjustment process (B
4607), and is a display for switching the setting suggestion effect performed according to the lottery table by the predetermined light emitting unit as described above to the hole emission color selected in the hole setting. As described above, the volume setting window 711, the light emission color setting window 712, and the brightness setting window 713 are operated by the person in charge of the hall or the like (the touch panel 25b).
(Including the operation of

By selecting one of the colors as the hole light emission color in the light emission color setting window 712, the hole light emission color can be preferentially displayed on a predetermined light emitting unit. Therefore, for example, by setting the hole emission color to red or rainbow (specific light emission color) that suggests high setting, it seems that high setting stands are abundantly arranged in an event etc. it can. As described above, the light emission color setting window 712 and the hall LED adjustment process can not be set by the player as the setting regarding the light emission mode of the predetermined light emitting unit, and can be set only by the person in charge of the hall or the like as the second setting means. Function. In addition, during the hole setting mode, the decoration special symbol (identification information) and the hold display unit 630, the hold display 633, the hold digestion area 640, the special view fluctuation hold display 64
The display related to the game such as 3 may be hidden. Since the hall setting mode is not performed during the game, by excluding the unnecessary ones, it is possible to make the display related to the hall setting mode easy to view and reduce the processing load. When the display related to the game is not displayed, only the ornament reduced symbol (small symbol) 616 may be displayed.

In addition, although the setting suggestion effect was made to display the hall light emission color prior to the one performed according to the lottery table, it is made to be displayed preferentially only while waiting for customers, and the actual game is being played. Can give priority to setting suggestion effects performed according to the lottery table over the hall light emission color. Therefore, the player can estimate the setting of the gaming machine 10 in the game in more detail by actually playing the game.

[Display screen example of player setting mode]
FIG. 66B shows the display device 4 in the player setting mode according to the fourth embodiment.
It is a figure which shows another example of the display screen of 1. FIG.

The effect control device 300 starts screen drawing in the player setting mode (B4618) as shown in FIG. 66B, as the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B4617 is “Y”). The light emission setting window 714 is displayed together with the volume setting window 711 and the luminance setting window 713. The operation of the volume setting window 711, the brightness setting window 713, and the light emission / non-existence setting window 714 is performed based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player (B4620, B462)
1). In the player setting mode, the volume setting window 711 is a player volume adjustment process (B4620
), And the brightness setting window 713 and the light emitting / non-setting
It is a display used for adjustment processing (B4621).

It is possible to select whether or not to emit light of a predetermined light emitting part by the light emission presence / absence setting window 714. For example, when the player selects no light emission, the light emission related to the setting suggestion effect of the predetermined light emitting part is not performed. it can. As described above, the light emission / non-existence setting window 714 and the player LED adjustment process function as a first setting unit capable of setting the setting regarding the light emission mode of the predetermined light emitting unit by the player. In addition, since the light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit is controlled according to the set value as described above (FIG. 55 to FIG. 62) during the game, unlike the hall setting mode, in the player setting mode The light emission color setting window 712 is not displayed.

In the player setting mode, it is possible to select only the presence or absence of light emission of a predetermined light emitting portion, but the effect mode of the rendering device including the light emission aspect (color) of the predetermined light emitting portion etc. Whether it can be displayed in the range may be settable, and the light emission color setting window 7 as in the hole setting mode
The effect mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit of the effect apparatus may be set by 12. The effect mode of the effect device depends on the setting value of the effect control device 300 (FIG. 44, FIG. 55 to FIG. 62)
For example, the light emission aspect of the illumination member, the internal character 44a, 44
It is an operation mode of b or the external part 95a, an effect mode on the display screen of the display device 41, and the like. Also,
In the player setting mode or the like, it is possible to check in which range the effect mode of the effect device is set to be displayable by the player, or whether the setting suggestion effect depending on the setting value is performed or not. You may

Further, the effect control device 300 may not perform the setting suggestion effect when the fraud due to the magnet fraud monitoring process (A 1315) or the radio wave fraud monitoring process (A 1316) is detected. Default color (for example, white) by resetting the lottery color etc.
It may be displayed by.

[Customer waiting demo setting process]
In addition, at the time of customer waiting demo setting processing (B1308) in the one-shot system command processing (FIG. 39), it is not the light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect but the hole setting mode (light emission color setting window 712 and hole L
The predetermined light emitting unit is caused to emit light in the hole emission color set in the ED adjustment processing). FIG. 67 shows the fourth.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the customer waiting demo setting process which concerns on embodiment.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether the received set value is a normal command (B4701). If the command is not normal (the result of B4701 is "N"), the customer waiting demo setting process is ended. If the command is normal (the result of B4701 is "Y"),
The effect control device 300 sets the light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit to the light emission mode (hole light emission color) of the hole setting set in the hole setting mode (B4702). Then, the customer waiting demo start setting is performed (B4703), and the customer waiting demo setting process is ended.

Thus, while waiting for a customer (during a customer waiting demo), not the light emission mode (color) of the setting suggestion effect but the light emission mode (hole light emission color) set in the hole setting mode is preferentially used.
Therefore, by setting the light emission mode (hole light emission color) to a specific light emission mode (specific color = red, rainbow, etc.), it seems that a high setting table is abundantly arranged in an event etc. it can. In addition, while waiting for a customer, the light emission mode (color) of the setting suggestion effect is not displayed on the predetermined light emitting portion, and the player plays a game and tries to check the light emission mode (color) of the setting suggestion effect. The operation of 10 may be improved.

When the light emission mode (color) is set in the player setting mode, the light emission mode (color) set in the player setting mode is preferentially used while waiting for a customer (during a customer waiting demo) Configuration is also possible.

In the above fourth embodiment, an example in which the color is controlled depending on the setting value is mainly shown as the light emission mode of the rendering device (predetermined light emitting unit), but the luminance (the light emission mode of the rendering device) (Brightness), turning on / off or blinking is included, and in the case of blinking, a blinking cycle or the like is also included. In addition, if the rendering device is a movable body, the operation mode of the rendering device may be controlled depending on the set value, as in the light emission mode.

[Operation and Effect of Fourth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment includes a rendering device (for example, a predetermined light emitting unit) capable of executing a predetermined rendering, and a rendering control unit (a rendering control device 300) for controlling the rendering device. The gaming machine 10 includes setting change means (a setting change device 42 (a setting key switch 93 and a setting value change switch 102)) capable of changing a setting value corresponding to a setting relating to a game. The effect control means can execute the setting suggestion effect which can suggest the setting value by changing the effect mode of the effect device according to the setting value.

According to such a gaming machine 10, it becomes possible for the player to estimate the setting of the gaming machine 10 only from the state of the gaming machine 10 before or during playing a game, and the suggestion of the setting value is appropriately made. Since the game can be executed, the interest of the game can be improved. Further, since the player can estimate the setting of the gaming machine 10 only from the gaming machine 10 in this manner, a setting suggestion tag (for example, setting 4 is suggested to imply setting values in the vicinity of the gaming machine 10 in hall sales) Shark bills,
There is no need to install a shrimp tag that suggests setting 5 and a bill that suggests setting 6, and it is possible to secure a wide space around the gaming machine 10 and improve appearance, and reduce the burden on hall personnel etc. can do.

The effect control means (effect control device 300) of the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is a first setting means (light emission presence / absence setting window 714) capable of setting the setting regarding the effect mode of the effect device by the player.
, Player LED adjustment processing), and second setting means (emission color setting window 712, hall LED adjustment processing) that can not be set by the player with respect to settings relating to the rendering mode of the rendering device. The effect control means can change the effect mode of the setting indication effect by the setting value or the second setting means.
According to such a gaming machine 10, a person in charge of the hall, etc., is an effect mode (eg, for example, the second setting means etc.) that suggests that the setting is high as the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect in the effect device.
By setting the hole emission color (red, rainbow, etc.), the appearance of the gaming machine 10 can be made as desired, and it can be seen that the high setting stands are lined up abundantly in the event etc. It can improve the interest. In addition, since it is possible to set the effect mode to suit the player's preference also for the player, the interest can be improved. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect mode that takes into account the needs for both settings on the hall side and the player side.

The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment performs the setting suggestion effect and the expectation according to the degree of expectation that the result of the game (for example, the special view variation display game) becomes a special result in the execution period in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed. It is possible to switch between the expectation degree notification effect of notifying the degree. Therefore, when the expectation to be a special result is high, if the setting suggestion effect is changed to the expectation degree notification effect and the anticipation degree to be a special result is notified, the game can be enjoyed and the interest of the game can be improved. Conversely, when the degree of expectation is low, if the expectation degree notification effect is changed to the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to give the player an expectation and the possibility of improving the interest of the game and the operation of the gaming machine may be improved. There is.

Fifth Embodiment
The fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 69B. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fourth embodiments.

[Example of screen transition when start memory of pending digest area changes]
FIG. 68 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order according to the fifth embodiment, and the screen of the entire game when the special display changing in reserve display 643 of the reserve digest area 640 changes in reserve. It is an example of a transition. In addition, the lottery of the holding change (the holding change during digestion) of the special figure fluctuation holding display 643 is, for example, a notice lottery (B2006 or B20) of the fluctuation effect setting process (FIG. 44).
You may go to 09).

(A) of FIG. 68 is a display screen of the display device 41 before the decoration special figure variation display game is started.

A plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, and middle area 610C) are provided at the center of the display screen of the display device 41. The first pattern A for decoration is displayed on the left area 610A and the right area 610B. The first symbol pattern B is displayed in the middle area 610C, and the first pattern symbol C is displayed in an enlarged manner in the middle area 610C, and stopped and displayed with the symbols "2, 4, 5".

In the lower central part of the display screen, a reserve digest area 640 (a specific display unit, a floating reserve display area) and a reserve display unit 630 are displayed as a start storage display area. The reserve consumption area 640 and the reserve display unit 630 are displayed in preference to the front (upper layer) over the variable display of the variable display area 610. The setting of such preferential display may be executed, for example, in the effect display editing process (B 0015)

In the reserve consumption area 640, a special view in-process suspension display 643 (start memory display, special view in-process reserve display) corresponding to a running (digesting) special-figure variation display game is displayed. In addition, in the reserve digest area 640, the start storage display background 640A as a base for the special view reserve display 643 is displayed in a low image quality state on the back surface (layer under the special view reserve display 643). . In FIGS. 68 to 69B, rough hatching of the start storage display background 640A indicates that the start storage display background 640A is displayed in a low image quality state (first display mode).

Here, the low image quality state (the first display mode) is a state in which the improvement of the power saving performance and the reduction of the graphic processing load are prioritized over the improvement of the visibility to the player. The reduction of the number (for example, display with less than 921,600 pixels), the suppression of brightness, contrast, gamma, saturation, etc. (for example, less than 50 in 100 steps,
Displayed with less than ± 0 when adjustable from -100 to +100, low resolution (eg displayed with resolution less than 720p (1280 x 720)), frame rate per second (fps) Is lower (eg, less than 30 fps), or a highly compressed image is displayed. For example, low quality processing is performed on the image of the original high-quality start storage display background 640A in the gaming machine 10 by the processing of the VDP 312 or the like.
It becomes possible to display a low quality start storage display background 640A on the display screen of the display device 41 instead of the high quality one. Also, for example, both the low quality image and the high quality (or normal quality) image of the starting storage display background 640A are stored in the image ROM 325, and the low quality image and the high quality image are replaced according to the situation. By using it, the starting memory display background 640A is displayed with low image quality (or high image quality).

At the top of the start memory display background 640A, a background object 640B that changes in conjunction with the start memory display background 640A is disposed. The background object 640B is displayed, for example, in two display modes in the form of two leaves arranged at the left and right ends as shown in FIG. The background object 640B is also displayed in a low quality state, similar to the start storage display background 640A. Also, the background object 640B is displayed in the same priority (layer in the same layer) as the start memory display background 640A, that is, in an integral manner. The start storage display background 640A and the background object 640B may be displayed and set, for example, in step B2013 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 44). In addition, the background object 640 B starts memory display background 640
It may be displayed prior to A's front (upper layer). In addition, conversely, the start memory display background 640A may be displayed in preference to the front surface (upper layer) of the background object 640B.

In the hold display unit 630, a hold display 633 (start memory display, corresponding to unsaved start memory,
Up to four special figure hold displays are displayed. In (a) of FIG. 68, three hold displays 633 are displayed on the hold display unit 630. The hold display 633 is arranged to overlap a part of the start memory display background 640A, and is displayed in front of the start memory display background 640A. As described above, the effect control device 300 functions as a start storage display control unit that controls the display of the hold display 633 on the hold display unit 630 and the display of the special view changing hold display 643 on the hold region 640. The effect control device 300 executes the display setting of the hold display 633 and the special view fluctuation hold display 643 in step B2015 of the fluctuation effect setting process (FIG. 44) at the hold shift, for example, The processing may be executed in the special view 1 suspension information setting process (B1310) or the special view 2 suspension information setting process (B1312).

(I) of FIG. 68 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the decorative special figure variation display game is being executed corresponding to the special figure variation pending display 643. Multiple variation display areas 6 of the display screen
At 10, the decorative first design A to C is variably displayed in a normal fluctuation manner. In the following figures, when the decorative first symbols A to C are variably displayed in the normal fluctuation mode, the decorative first symbols A to C being variably displayed are indicated by “↓”.

(G) of FIG. 68 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the on-hold change is made due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, on-hold change or pre-reading advance notice) while the special view variable display game is being executed.
Here, while the special view fluctuation pending display 643 is on hold change, the on-hold display 633 may be on hold change as the advance notice effect. In the case of the reserve change during digestion, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 ()), the special display during change reserve display 643 suggests that the change from the normal round display mode to the high expectation by changing the reserve. It becomes a star-shaped display mode.

Further, the display of the start storage display background 640A is switched from the low image quality state to the high image quality state simultaneously with the hold change. In FIG. 68 to FIG. 69B, the start memory display background 64
Fine hatching at 0A indicates that the start memory display background 640A is displayed in a high quality state. Similar to the start storage display background 640A, the background object 640B is also displayed in a high quality state (second display mode). The background object 640B changes from a normal bilobal display mode to a flower-like display mode that indicates that the degree of expectation is high. It should be noted that changes in the image quality and display mode of the start memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are executed at the same timing as the hold change (hold change during digestion) of the special view fluctuation hold display 643 drawn as a notice. For example, display setting may be performed in step B2013 of the fluctuation effect setting process (FIG. 44).

Here, the high-quality state (second display mode) is a state in which the improvement of the visibility to the player is prioritized over the improvement of the power saving performance and the reduction of the graphic processing load. Increase in number (for example, display with 921,600 pixels or more), and increase in brightness, contrast, gamma, saturation, etc. (for example, 50 or more in 100 steps, or
Displayed at ± 0 or more when adjustable from 100 to +100, high resolution (eg displayed at 720p (1280 × 720) or higher resolution), frame rate per second (fps) The image may be increased (for example, 30 fps or more), or an uncompressed image or an image with a small compression rate may be displayed.

In (e) of FIG. 68, the display of the display device 41 in the case where the stop result (stop symbol) of the variable display area 610 becomes the disappointing result mode (disengagement stop symbol) when the special view variation display game under execution ends. It is a screen. In the decorative first design A to C of the variable display area 610, "off" stop design "
"3, 7, 2" is displayed stopped. In addition, while the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 is digested and becomes non-display, the start storage display background 640A and the background object 640B are switched from the high image quality state to the low image quality state and displayed. The background object 640B returns from the flower-like display mode to the bi-leaf-like display mode. Start memory display background 6 at the end of the special view variation display game
The display setting of the 40A and the background object 640B may be executed, for example, as part of the stop setting (B1331) of the one-shot system command processing based on the symbol type (lost symbol or big hit symbol). Thereafter, the oldest starting memory of the hold display 633 moves to the special view fluctuation hold display 643 and the next special view fluctuation display game is started. The timing at which the start storage display background 640A and the background object 640B are switched from the high image quality state to the low image quality state is not limited to when the special display changing hold display 643 is digested and becomes non-displayed, but a predetermined effect Or when the first decorative symbols A to C are stopped and displayed, or when the next special figure variation display game is started.

In (o) of FIG. 68, the display when the stop result (stop symbol) of the variable display area 610 becomes the big hit result aspect (big hit stop symbol, special result aspect) when the special figure change display game under execution ends. 7 is a display screen of the device 41. In the decorative first symbol A to C of the variable display area 610, "3, 3, 3" is stopped and displayed as a big hit stop symbol, and below the variable display area 610, "big hit!
! "" Is displayed. Also, while the special view fluctuation hold display 643 is digested and hidden, the start memory display background 640A and the background object 640B maintain the high image quality state. The flower-like display mode of the background object 640B is also maintained as it is. Thereafter, the game of the big hit round is started, and the big hit round effect is executed.

It should be noted that switching from the low image quality to the high image quality of the start storage display background 640A and the background object 640B is performed when the special display changing hold display 643 changes to a star-like display mode (FIG. 68)
(E)), but before starting it, that is, when starting the special figure variation display game (Fig. 68).
(Immediately after (A)), or may be switched to high image quality at the stage immediately before the occurrence of the retention change during digestion ((I) in FIG. 68). Further, when the hold change is made in stages or in continuous rendering (at the time of continuous notice effect or at the time of pseudo continuous effect), the image quality of the start memory display background 640A may be switched in stages.
Also, for example, when the special display during suspension display 643 or the suspension display 633 is displayed in a bright color such as white, the color of the start memory display background 640A is switched to a darker color such as black, and the special image is in transition. It may be easy to distinguish the hold display 643 and the hold display 633. Furthermore, when the starting memory is stored and a new hold display 633 occurs, or, for example, the upper limit of 4 is displayed.
When the game ball reaches a piece and overflows, or when the game ball is won in the general winning opening 35, etc., the start memory display background 640A may be switched to high image quality to make it easy for the player to visually recognize. Also,
Start decoration when the first symbol A to C is stopped or temporarily stopped at a specific symbol (such as when the hold change symbol or chance eyes stop or suggest a hold change) by the execution of the decoration special figure change display game The stored display background 640A may be switched to high image quality.

In addition, the first display mode is not limited to a mode in which the start storage display background 640A or the background object 640B is displayed with low image quality, but a mode in which thin view is possible but makes the start storage display background 640A or the background object 640B inconspicuous It may be displayed by. For example, another aspect may be displayed in front of the start storage display background 640A or the background object 640B (a front layer, upper layer) so as to cover the start storage display background 640A or the background object 640B as a mode to make the background invisible. it can. As another image in this case, for example, an image or a mosaic image which is the same as but thinner than the start memory display background 640A or the background object 640B, the start memory display background 640A of the back (rear layer, lower layer) or the background Object 6
A transmissive image or the like that can visually recognize 40 B can be used. Then, the second display mode is not limited to a mode in which the start storage display background 640A and the background object 640B are displayed with high image quality, and hides another image displayed in front of the start storage display background 640A and the background object 640B. You may display in an aspect.

[Screen transition example when predetermined effect occurs in effect display area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69A, an example of screen transition when the effect display area 641 is displayed together with the reserve consumption area 640 will be described. FIG. 69A is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the fifth embodiment, which is an example of the screen transition of the entire game when a predetermined effect is generated in the effect display area 641. is there. 69A and 69B below.
In the explanation of FIG. 68, the explanation overlapping with FIG.

(A) of FIG. 69A is a display screen of the display device 41 before the decorative feature variation display game is started.

In the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of variable display areas 610 are displayed with the decorative first symbol A to C
Is stopped and displayed as a symbol "2, 4, 5", and a special figure in-progress change indication 643 corresponding to the special figure variation display game being executed is displayed in the pending consumption area 640. Also, the reserve digest area 64
At 0, a pedestal 640C of the special view during suspension display 643 and a low-quality start storage display background 640A are displayed on the back surface (lower layer) of the special view during suspension display 643. The pedestal 640C is displayed in preference to the front surface (upper layer) of the start memory display background 640A. The start storage display background 640A is narrower in the upper and left regions than the start storage display background 640A of FIG.

Furthermore, at the lower left end of the display screen of the display device 41, an effect display area 641 capable of displaying an effect relating to the special view variation display game is displayed, and in the effect display area 641 of the walking girl whose display mode can be changed The character 641A is displayed. The effect display area 641 and the character 641A are displayed in a low image quality state. In FIGS. 69A and 69B, a thin line representing the character 641A indicates that the character 641A is displayed in a low image quality state. The effect display area 641 is displayed preferentially to the front (upper layer) rather than the variable display area 610, similarly to the reserve consumption area 640 and the reserve display unit 630. For example, the effect display area 641 is displayed on the same layer as the reserve consumption area 640 and the reserve display unit 630, and the display priority order is the same. Also, the character 641A is displayed with priority over the front surface (upper layer) of the effect display area 641. In addition, character 6
41A and the effect display area 641 may be displayed in the same priority order (layer of the same layer), that is, in an integral manner. In addition, the character 641A is stored in the reserve digest area 640 or the reserve display unit 6
30 may be displayed in priority to the front surface (upper layer), and conversely, the holding region 640 and the holding display unit 630 may be displayed preferentially to the front surface of the character 641A. Thus, the priority order of display can be changed as appropriate.

(G) of FIG. 69A is a display screen of the display device 41 when the decorative special figure variation display game is being executed corresponding to the special figure variation pending display 643. FIG. In multiple variable display areas 610,
The decorative first design A to C is variably displayed ("↓") in a usual manner of fluctuation.

Here, the low-quality character 641A may be displayed as another character (another character different from the high-quality character 641B described later) different from the one shown in FIG. 69A.
Also, the low image quality character 641A may be displayed in a mode different from that shown in FIG. 69A. For example, another aspect of the low-quality character 641A may be a sleeping aspect with respect to the standing aspect of FIG. 69A, or a walking aspect of FIG. 69A. It may be a mode that is stationary. Note that the character 641A is in a standing still state before the decoration special view variable display game is started ((?) In FIG. 69A),
After the start of the decoration special figure variation display game ((a) in FIG. 69A), it may be a mode of walking and operating.

In (G) of FIG. 69A, the character 641A of the effect display area 641 generates a character 641B due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a change during suspension or advance notice, occurrence of advance notice, etc.) It is a display screen of the display apparatus 41 when changing. The character 641 B is a girl who enjoys eating rice balls that suggest high expectation, and is displayed in high quality. In FIGS. 69A and 69B, a thick line representing the character 641B indicates that the character 641B is displayed in a high quality state. In addition, start memory display background 640A, pedestal 640C, reserve digestion area 640 and effect display area 64
1 is also displayed in high quality. Also, the predetermined condition is specifically the character 641A.
When (641B) partially intrudes into the start memory display background 640A and acts on the special display during the suspension display 643 or the hold display, or is displayed near the start storage display background 640A, the special view during the suspension display 643 or hold This is a case where a pending change presentation is performed such as waiting until the timing of acting on the display 633. Then, the timing when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the switching to the high quality character 641B is performed when the character 641A moves toward the start storage display background 640A or when displayed near the start storage display background 640A. it can. The character 641A may switch to the high-quality character 641B when acting on the special display changing hold display 643 or the hold display, when the character 641A moves toward the start storage display background 640A, or the start storage display background The character may be switched to the high-quality character 641 B at the start of the next special-image variation display game or the like when displayed near 640 A.

Here, the high-quality character 641B may be displayed as a character different from that shown in (G) of FIG. 69A (another character different from the low-quality character 641A described later).
In addition, the high-quality character 641B may be displayed in a mode different from that shown in (G) of FIG. 69A. For example, another aspect of the high-quality character 641B may be one in which the walking speed (operating speed) is increased from (ki) in FIG. 69A. In FIG. 69A, the low-quality character 641A may stand still, and in FIG. 69A, the high-quality character 641B may be walked and operated.

In FIG. 69A, the display of the display 41 is shown when the special symbol variation display game in progress is over and the stop symbol of the variation display area 610 becomes the disengaging stop symbol (“3, 7, 2”). It is a screen. The special display changing hold display 643 is digested and hidden, and the start memory display background 6
The display 40A, the pedestal 640C, and the effect display area 641 are displayed in a low image quality state. Also, the character 641B returns to the normal character 641A and is displayed in a low quality state. After that, the start memory is stored, and the next special figure fluctuation display game is started.

In FIG. 69, the display of the display device 41 in the case where the special figure variation display game in progress is over and the stop symbol of the variation display area 610 becomes the big hit stop symbol (“3, 3, 3”) It is a screen. Below the variation display area 610, the characters "big hit !!" are displayed. While the special view changing hold display 643 is digested and hidden, start memory display background 640A, pedestal 640C,
The effect display area 641 maintains the high image quality state. In addition, the effect display of the girl who is pleased to eat the rice ball of the character 641B is also maintained as it is. Thereafter, the game of the big hit round is started, and the big hit round effect is executed.

[Another screen transition example when a predetermined effect occurs in the effect display area]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 69B, another example of screen transition when the effect display area 641 is displayed together with the reserve consumption area 640 will be described. FIG. 69B is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order according to the fifth embodiment, and the entire game when a predetermined effect is generated in the storage area 640 or the effect display area 641. It is another example of the screen transition of.

69B is a display screen of the display device 41 during the special view variation display game when a predetermined effect (for example, a preliminary effect etc.) occurs in the effect display area 641 from (ki) in FIG. 69A. is there. Due to the generation of the predetermined effect, the character 641A of the effect display area 641 changes to a character 641B that suggests that the degree of expectation is high. Then, the character 641B and the effect display area 641 are displayed in high image quality. On the other hand, the start memory display background 640A of the reserved digestion area 640 and the pedestal 640C maintain the display in the low image quality state. After that, if the stop symbol of the variable display area 610 becomes a disengaging stop symbol (for example, "3, 7, 2"), the process proceeds to (A) of Fig. 69A and a big hit stop symbol (for example, "3, 3, 3" In the case of
Go to 9A. When a predetermined effect is generated in the effect display area 641, the effect display area 641 may be displayed preferentially to the front (upper layer) rather than the hold region 640. By doing this, for example, the effect display area 641 can be enlarged and displayed in the foreground, and the effect of the character 641B can be emphasized. In addition, according to the announcement effect, when the decorative first symbols A to C in the variation display area 610 reach the reach, or the player responds to the button operation promotion display (operation promotion image) displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. It can be generated, for example, when the effect button 25 is operated.

(B) of FIG. 69B shows a predetermined effect in (A) of FIG.
For example, it is a display screen of the display device 41 in the special view variation display game when a reserve change, a pre-reading advance notice, etc. occurs. Due to the occurrence of a predetermined effect, the special display during change display 643 changes to a star-shaped display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is high. Then, the display of the pedestal 640C, the special view changing hold display 643 and the start storage display background 640A is switched from the low image quality state to the high image quality state. On the other hand, the character 641A of the effect display area 641 continues to be displayed as it is, and the display of the effect display area 641 and the character 641A in a low image quality state is maintained. Note that the shape of the pedestal 640C is related to the display mode of the special display during the suspension display 643 such as a crescent moon corresponding to the change of the suspension during the special channel change display 643 to the display mode of the star shape. It may be changed to a certain shape. After that, the stop symbol of the variable display area 610,
In the case of the off stop symbol (for example, "372"), the process proceeds to (Fig. 69A), and in the case of the big hit stop symbol (for example "333"), the process proceeds to (Fig. 69A).

When a predetermined effect is generated in the holding region 640, the holding region 640 may be displayed preferentially to the front (upper layer) rather than the effect display region 641. By doing this, for example, the reserve digestion area 640 can be enlarged and displayed in the foreground, and changes in the display mode of the special view during suspension display 643 and the reserve display 633 can be emphasized.

In addition, when the predetermined effect is generated, for example, when the pedestal 640 c changes to the same color as the color changed in the effect corresponding to the hold change, the pedestal 640 c also has high image quality as in the special view fluctuation hold display 643. However, the degree of high image quality may be made lower than the special display fluctuation pending display 643 (the image quality may be made lower than the special display fluctuation pending display 643). As described above, even if the image quality of the pedestal 640c is reduced relatively to the image quality of the reserve display 643 during the special figure change, the player can easily gaze at the special view change reserve display 643 which is the main part of the effect. Processing burden can be reduced while maintaining the interest of

On the other hand, when the predetermined effect is generated, for example, when the pedestal 640 c changes to the same color as the color changed in the effect corresponding to the hold change, the degree of high image quality of the pedestal 640 c It may be made higher (it is made to have a higher image quality than the special view changing hold display 643). Unexpectedness is caused by the relatively low image quality holding display 643 being displayed with relatively low image quality on the high-quality pedestal 640c, and rather the special drawing fluctuation holding display 643 is highlighted to make the game interesting. Can be improved.

Furthermore, the pedestal 640 c may be configured to maintain low image quality when the special view changing hold display 643 has high image quality. Decoration of special view during change display 643 and special view during change display 64
It is sufficient for the pedestal 640 c to have a function to indicate that 3 is a reserve during digestion, and the function is maintained even if it is displayed with low image quality.

[Operation and Effect of Fifth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is a variation display game (special figure variation display game) by a plurality of identification information (identification symbol, decoration special symbol, decoration first symbol A to C) based on establishment of start condition.
The display of the variable display game has a special result (big hit result aspect,
It is possible to generate an advantageous special game state for the player when the jackpot stop symbol (special result mode) is obtained. The gaming machine 10 is displayed on the display device 41 prior to the variable display game with start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing the start memory which becomes the right to execute the variable display game based on the establishment of the start condition. A start storage display control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing control to display a start storage display (a special display fluctuating display 643, a hold display 633) corresponding to the start storage in the start storage display area; Prepare. The start storage display control means displays the start storage display background 640A in the first display mode (for example, low image quality) on the back surface of the start storage display so as to overlap with the start storage display in the start storage display area. Based on this, the start storage display background 640A can be switched to a second display mode (for example, high image quality) different from the first display mode.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the start memory display background 640A can be displayed in the second display mode (for example, high image quality) when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when the display mode of the start memory display changes. In this case, the start storage display background 640A can be displayed in the first display mode (for example, low image quality). Therefore, if there is no pedestal 640c, for example, the special view during suspension display 64
Although there is a problem that 3 may appear to be mixed with the decorative first symbol A to C etc., the start memory display can be displayed easily when it is necessary to make the player visually recognize and it can be made visible to the player When the need is relatively small (such as when the degree of expectation is low), it is possible to improve the power saving performance of the gaming machine 10 and reduce the processing load of graphics and the like. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both improvement of the visibility to the player and improvement of the power saving performance of the gaming machine 10 and reduction of the processing burden, and in the gaming machine, the way of displaying the start memory display area is improved. be able to. Also, for example, when it is relatively less necessary for the player to visually recognize the start memory display, the identification information (decorative first symbol A to C) of the variable display area 610 to be relatively conspicuous is better than the start memory display. Since the image is displayed in high quality, the player can easily recognize the identification information. In addition, since the start memory display background 640A is displayed with low image quality in other cases, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that there is important information in the start memory display area, and an image of the display screen on the liquid crystal Can be suppressed.

An effect control means capable of executing control to display effects related to the variable display game in the effect display area 641 which is displayed on the display device 41 in priority to the variable display game (special view fluctuation display game) The presentation control device 300) is further provided. The effect control means displays the effect in the first display mode (for example, low image quality) in the effect display area 641, and can switch the effect to the second display mode (for example, high image quality) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. According to such a gaming machine 10, for example, there is a problem that the effect display area 641 may appear to be mixed with the decorative first symbols A to C etc., but the start memory display (the special display changing hold display 643, Pending display 633)
Not only the effect display area 641 can also be displayed easily for the player to visually recognize when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the same effect as the above-described effect can be exhibited.

The gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment displays the effect game (the decoration special view fluctuation display game) corresponding to the fluctuation display game (the fluctuation display game in the collective display device 50) on the display device 41 based on the establishment of the start condition. The effect game means (effect control device 300) which can be executed, the specific display area (effect display area 641) displayed with priority over the effect game (the decoration special view variable display game) on the display device 41, and the specific display Specific character displayed in the area (character 641A
, 641 B) display control means (effect control apparatus 300) capable of executing display control. The display control means (effect control device 300) operates in the first display mode (specific display area) in the normal state.
For example, while displaying with a low image quality, a specific character is displayed with a first effect mode (for example, a low image quality), and a second display mode (for example, different from the first display mode based on the establishment of a predetermined condition) While switching to the high image quality), the specific character can be switched to the second effect mode (for example, the high image quality).

Therefore, when there is relatively little need for the player to visually recognize, the specific display area (effect display area 641) is displayed in the first display mode (for example, low image quality) and the specific character is displayed in the first effect mode (for example, low image quality) ), Thereby improving the power saving performance of the gaming machine 10 and reducing the processing load of the graphic of the display control means (the presentation control device 300). Conversely, when it is necessary to make the player visually recognize (when the predetermined condition is satisfied), the specific display area is switched to the second display mode (for example, high image quality) different from the first display mode (for example, low image quality) ,
The specific character is switched from the first display mode (for example, low image quality) to the second effect mode (for example, high image quality), and the player is given a specific display area (effect display area 641) and a specific character (character 6)
41A, 641 B) can be easily viewed.

Sixth Embodiment
The sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 88. FIG. The present embodiment relates to the driver 150 (here, the LED driver 153) of the status display device 152 and its initial setting. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fifth embodiments.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process according to the sixth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 70, the timer interrupt process of the sixth embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment (FIG. 6), but the LED driver 153 (FIG. 71) is after the status display edit output process (A1318).
It is characterized in that an LED driver initial setting process (A15001) for initially setting is added. In addition, after the initial setting of the LED driver 153, an output mode of the LED driver 153, that is, an LED data transmission process for setting a display mode of the state display device 152 (A
16001) is performed. In the present embodiment, after the configuration of the LED driver 153 is described, initial setting processing of the LED driver 153 and LED data transmission processing will be described.

The LED driver initial setting process (A15001) and the LED data transmission process (A16)
The order of 001) may be switched. In this case, the LED driver initialization process (A1
5001) is the LED data transmission process (A16001) in the next timer interrupt process
The LED driver 153 is to be initialized in order to

[LED driver]
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the configuration of the LED driver 153 according to the sixth embodiment. The LED driver 153 of this embodiment is the same as the driver 150 (FIG. 3) of the first embodiment. Further, the collective driver 153a, the duty ratio driver 153b, and the ball-out rate / discharge ball number driver 153c described later are also the same as the LED driver 153.

The LED driver 153 displays the indicators 900 (900-3 (digit 3), 900-2 (digit 2), 900-1 (digit 1) of the digit sequentially selected by the dynamic drive method (dynamic lighting method).
, 900-0 (digit 0)) The LED is turned on. The digit display 900 constituting the status display device 152 is a seven-segment (or eight-segment) type, and eight point-like LEDs
Includes a collection of lamps. The LED driver 153 may be either common anode or common cathode.

The LED driver 153 is a driver for a duty ratio 153 b and a driver for an output ball rate / discharged ball number 15.
In the case of 3c, as indicated by the dotted line, a 16-bit command from the gaming microcomputer 111 via the LED driver 153 of the previous stage (the first stage driver 153a and the second stage driver 153b). Is sent. When the LED driver 153 is the batch driver 153a, a 16-bit command is directly transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 without the intervention of the LED driver 153 at the previous stage.

The LED driver 153 includes a 16-bit shift register 163 and a 16-bit latch circuit 1.
64, latch selector 165, four 8-bit latches (latch circuit: digit 0, digit 1, digit 2,
For digit 3) 167a-167d, control unit 173, oscillating unit 174, 4 to 1 data selector 1
A character generator (decoder) 185, a 2-to-1 data selector 187, a segment driver 193, and a digit driver 195 are provided. Note that control unit 173 has digit number setting unit 175, duty setting unit 176, data selection unit 177, and standby mode setting unit 1
It has 78. The oscillating unit 174 generates and transmits a signal used in the control unit 173 (in particular, the number-of-digits setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176). The 8-bit latch functions as a data register. Furthermore, the LED driver 153 may include an emission color control unit that controls the emission color of the LED (or segment).

The 16-bit command is input from the data input terminal to the 16-bit shift register 163 of the LED driver 153, and can be output from the data output terminal to the other LED driver 153 as it is. The data of the 16-bit shift register 163 is 1-bit latch circuit 1
At timing (latch timing) when the latch signal 64 receives a latch signal (load signal) from the gaming microcomputer 111, it is held (set) in the 16-bit latch circuit 164.

Among the commands held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the upper 8 bits are sent to the latch selector 165, the number-of-digits setting unit 175, the duty setting unit 176, the data selection unit 177, and the standby mode setting unit 178. Of the commands held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the lower 8 bits (data portion) are sent to the 8-bit latches 167a-167d. In addition, the lower 8 bits of data (only necessary bits (for example, 4 bits) may be sent) are also sent to the number of digits setting unit 175, the duty setting unit 176, the data selection unit 177, and the standby mode setting unit 178.

When the upper 8 bits (address portion) indicate the address (for example, 21H (hexadecimal number)) of the digit number setting unit 175, the digit number setting unit 175 controls data held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164 (initial The lower 8 bits (or only necessary bits) of the setting data) are taken in, and the corresponding digit number (for example, X0H to X3H (hexadecimal expression, X is arbitrary)) is set (initial setting). Note that the number of digits set is the indicator 90 driven by the LED driver 153.
The number (digit number) of 0 is 4 in the present embodiment.

The upper 8 bits are the address of the duty setting unit 176 (for example, 20H (hexadecimal notation))
The duty setting unit 176 takes in the lower 8 bits (or only necessary bits) of the control data (initial setting data) held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, and sets the corresponding duty ratio For example, X0H to XFH (hexadecimal expression, X is arbitrary) are set (initial setting). In addition, the brightness (emission intensity) of the segment (LED) of the display 900
The duty ratio representing corresponds to the output time width of the source driver. The source driver corresponds to the digit driver 195 in the case of anode common, and corresponds to the segment driver 193 in the case of cathode common.

When the upper 8 bits indicate the address (for example, 27H (hexadecimal notation)) of the data selection unit 177, the data selection unit 177 determines the lower 8 bits (necessary of the control data stored in the 16-bit latch circuit 164). (Only one bit can be used) and the use / non-use of the decoded data by the character generator 185 is set. The addresses of the data selection unit 177 and the digit number setting unit 175 may be the same, and setting of use / non-use of decoded data by the data selection unit 177 and digit number setting of the digit number setting unit 175 may be performed simultaneously ( Data selection unit 1
77 and the number-of-digits setting unit 175 are distinguished by the lower 8 bits).

That is, the data selection unit 177 sets the data of the 8-bit latch to the character generator 18.
It is selected whether the data is decoded by 5 and used as decoded data or whether the data of the 8-bit latch is used as non-decoded data as it is. 8 if decoded
The data of the bit latch is regarded as a character code and is decoded into lighting pattern data of the character. When the data selection unit 177 uses the data of the 8-bit latch as non-decoded data as it is, the data selection signal 177 indicating selection of non-decoded data is selected.
This is sent to the data selector 187 of one-to-one. As described above, the data selection unit 177 issues a command (instruction, or the like) from the game control device 100 (game microcomputer 111) as to whether or not the decode function is used.
It can be set based on the control data).

When the upper 8 bits indicate an address of standby mode setting unit 178 or a command for standby mode setting unit 178 (for example, 41H, 1XH, 0XH (hexadecimal expression: X is arbitrary), etc.), standby mode setting unit 178 Of the control data held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the lower 8 bits (or only necessary bits) are taken. Then, for example, the standby mode setting unit 178 transmits a standby signal to turn off the segment drive unit 193 or the digit drive unit 195 to shift the LED driver 153 to the standby mode (in the case of 41H), segment drive unit 193 and digit driver 1
95 is forcibly turned off to turn off the display 900 for all digits (in the case of 0XH (BLANK data)), or the segment driver 193 and the digit driver 195 of the LED driver 153 are normally operated by the dynamic drive method. (In the case of 1XH). In the standby mode, each setting is not cleared, and the previous setting is held. Also, in normal operation, once segment drive unit 193 and digit drive unit 195 are driven, data in the 8-bit latch is immediately reflected on the display of display 900 simply by storing the data in the 8-bit latch. Ru.

The upper 8 bits are the address of the 8-bit latch 167a (for example, 22H (hexadecimal notation))
Latch selector 165 transfers the latch signal to 8-bit latch 167a. As a result, the 8-bit latch 167a latches (holds) and sets (sets) lighting pattern data or character code of lower 8 bits (data portion). Similarly,
The upper 8 bits are an address (for example, 23 H) of any of the 8-bit latches 167 b to 167 d.
, 24H, 25H (hexadecimal expression), the latch selector 165 transfers the latch signal to any one of the 8-bit latches 167b to 167d corresponding to the address. As a result, 8-bit latches 167b-167d receive the lower 8 bits (data portion) addressed to itself.
The lighting pattern data or the character code can be latched and captured.

A latch signal (load signal) from the gaming microcomputer 111 is input to the latch selector 165, and the latch selector 165 receives the latch signal as an 8-bit latch 167a-16.
7d to select one of the 8-bit latches 167a-167d. The 8-bit latches 167a-167d respectively have digit 0 and digit 1 addressed to themselves.
The display data for the display unit 900 of the second digit and the third digit can be held.

The 4-to-1 data selector 183 sequentially selects the data of the 8-bit latches 167a-167d corresponding to the digit line of each digit selected by the digit driver 195 in order to realize the dynamic drive method (dynamic lighting method). Do. The 4 to 1 data selector 183
Data of any one of the selected 8-bit latches 167 a-167 d is output to the character generator 185 and the 2-to-1 data selector 187. The digit line is selected by outputting an on / off drive signal to the digit line. In the case of the anode common, the on voltage is applied to the digit line, and in the case of the cathode common, the current drawing voltage (off voltage) to the digit line ) Is applied. Information indicating which digit line is selected by the digit driver 195 may be transmitted to the 4-to-1 data selector 183.

For example, when the digit drive unit 195 outputs a drive signal to select the digit line of digit 0, the data of the 8-bit latch 167a is selected. Similarly, digit driver 19
When 5 outputs a drive signal to select digit lines of digit 1, digit 2 and digit 3, data of 8-bit latches 167b, 167c and 167d are respectively selected.

The character generator 185 decodes the data sent from the 4-to-1 data selector 183. When the data sent from the 4-to-1 data selector 183 is a character code, the character generator 185 decodes the character code (character code) by the lighting pattern data of the character (character) indicated by the character code. Convert to

FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating a character code (character code) and a lighting pattern of a character corresponding to the character code. In FIG. 72, X is arbitrary (0 or 1), and the character code “X10... B” corresponds to lighting pattern data in the case of lighting the decimal point (Dp). Although it can be defined variously as to which character code the character is associated with, the character generator 185 is a logic circuit that defines the correspondence between the character code (input) and the character (output) (lighting pattern data of the character) And so on. For example, the character code "X0011010B" is a character "-"
Lighting pattern data ((a, b, c,
d, e, f, g, Dp) = (0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0)) (e.g.
It corresponds to 010B "). In order to use the non-decoding data, the batch driver 153a uses the lighting pattern data (for example, "00000010B") transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 as it is when lighting (turning on) only the segment g. .

The description returns to the description with reference to FIG. If the LED driver 153 is the duty ratio driver 153 b or the payout rate / discharge ball number driver 153 c, the character code transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 is held in the 8-bit latch 167 a-167 d, so the character generator A step 185 outputs lighting pattern data of the character indicated by the character code. However, if the LED driver 153 is the batch driver 153a, the appropriate lighting pattern data transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 is the 8-bit latch 167a-1.
Since it is already held at 67 d, except for accidental cases, the character generator 18
5 only converts the appropriate lighting pattern data into inappropriate lighting pattern data by the decoding process. If the appropriate lighting pattern data accidentally matches any of the character codes, the character generator 185 of the batch driver 153a may output lighting pattern data of a character.

The 2-to-1 data selector 187 directly outputs the decoded data (decoded data) output from the character generator 185 and the 4-to-1 data selector 183 in response to the data selection signal from the data selection unit 177. Any one of the undecoded data to be selected is selected and output to the segment drive unit 193. The non-decoding data is data output from the 4-to-1 data selector 183 without passing through the character generator 185, and is 8-bit data itself of the 8-bit latches 167a-167d. When a data selection signal indicating selection of non-decoded data is input, the 2-to-1 data selector 187
The non-decoded data is output, and when the data selection signal is not input, the decoded data is output.

If the LED driver 153 is a batch driver 153a, then a 2-to-1 data selector 1
A data selection signal indicating selection of non-decoding data is input to 87, and the appropriate lighting pattern data held in the 8-bit latches 167a to 167d is always output to the segment driving unit 193. On the other hand, if the LED driver 153 is the duty ratio driver 153 b or the ball ratio / discharged ball number driver 153 c, the 2-to-1 data selector 187 does not receive the data selection signal, and the character (character) is always lit. The pattern data (decoded data) is output to the segment drive unit 193.

The segment drive unit 193 outputs lighting pattern data (decoded data or non-decoded data) from the 2-to-1 data selector 187 to the display 900 for the digit corresponding to the digit line selected by the digit drive unit 195 (see FIG. Dynamic drive system). The lighting pattern data is on / off data of the light emission of the eight LEDs (segment ag, Dp or eight LEDs in the form of dots) of the display 900 of the selected digit (i.e. the selected digit line). In the case of the common anode, the segment drive section 193 applies the current draw voltage (off voltage) to the segment line as a drive voltage to turn the LED on (light emission state). In the case of cathode common, LE is applied by applying on voltage as drive voltage to the segment line
D is turned on (light emission state).

8 LEDs of display 900 are 7 segments (8 segments including the point part)
In the display 900, the segments ag and Dp are obtained. On the other hand, in the case of FIG.
The eight LEDs of the display 900 are a group of eight LED lamps (D3-D7, D8,
D10, D18) or a group of eight LED lamps in a dot shape (D9, D11-D16, D
17) It can be.

The digit driver 195 outputs a drive signal to select a digit line of each digit. The digit driver 195 applies, as a drive signal, an on voltage to the digit line in the case of the anode common, and applies a current drawing voltage (off voltage) to the digit line in the case of the cathode common.

The resistor connection terminal 197 (R-EXT terminal) is a segment connected by a constant current circuit including the segment drive unit 193 and the segment drive unit 193 by connecting one external resistor between this terminal and the ground (GND) The value of the current flowing through the line can be set. By this,
A common current value can be supplied to all the LEDs.

Furthermore, a light emission color control unit (not shown) of the LED driver 153 controls the light emission color of the LED (or segment). In the main processing and timer interrupt processing, the light emission color control unit
A command (data for control) relating to the color of the LED can be received, and a command signal can be sent to the segment driver 193 to control the color of light emitted from the LED. Segment driver 1
In 93, a drive voltage is applied to a segment line of a color according to a command signal from the light emission color control unit to drive. Segment lines are provided for the LEDs (or segments) of the respective colors of the display 900.

As described above, the driver 150 of the first embodiment is initialized in the main process. At this time, initial setting is performed on the number-of-digits setting unit 175 of the driver 150 (LED driver 153) and the duty setting unit 176 (further, the data selection unit 177 and the standby mode setting unit 178). On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, at least one of the digit number setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176 is also initialized in the timer interrupt process. As a result, even after the main processing, even if the setting value of the LED driver 153 (driving means) becomes indefinite due to noise or the like, the driving data (LED command) is output after being set to the correct setting value in the timer interrupt processing. It is possible to avoid turning off due to noise or the like of the status display device 152. Also, when the digit number setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176 (and the data selection unit 177 and the standby mode setting unit 178) are initialized in the timer interrupt process, the initialization in the main process (A1016)
Can be omitted. In the sixth embodiment, the number of digits setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 1
A case where the initial setting is performed on 76 will be described as an example.

[Transmission timing chart of initial setting command]
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a relation between an initial setting command and a latch transmitted to the LED driver according to the sixth embodiment. In FIG. 73, the initial setting command has an address section (8
Bits are shown omitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 is an initial setting command (digit) including initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit number setting unit 175 ((digit is an initial setting value of digit number) (16 bits) (FIG. 74), Initial setting data (duty) for duty setting unit 176 ((
D) is an initial setting command (D) including the initial setting value of the duty ratio (8 bits)
(16 bits) (FIG. 74) are transmitted in order.

The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time an initialization command (16 bits) is transmitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the initial setting command. Thus, the initial setting command (digit) (FIG. 74) is held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164 of the LED driver 153, and the initial setting data (digit) is stored in the digit number setting unit 175 by the initial setting command (digit). Be done. Then, the next initial setting command (d) (FIG. 74) is held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164 by the next latch signal.
The initial setting data (due) is set in the duty setting unit 176 by the initial setting command (due)
Is stored. In FIG. 73, although the initial setting command for the number-of-digits setting unit 175 is transmitted before the initial setting command for the duty setting unit 176, the order may be reversed.

[LED driver initial setting process]
Referring to FIG. 74, the LED driver initial setting process (A15 in FIG. 70) according to the sixth embodiment.
001). FIG. 74 is a flowchart of an LED driver initial setting process according to the sixth embodiment. In this embodiment, the LED driver 153 is the ratio driver 153 b, and the character code (8 bits) stored in the ratio driver 153 b is the character ratio display data.

The gaming microcomputer 111 first generates an initial setting command (digit) relating to the number of used digits of the digit number setting unit 175 (A15002), writes the initial setting command (digit) in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit, and generates a clock. It transmits with a signal (A15003). Next, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates an initial setting command (due) related to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 (A15004), and transmits the initial setting command (due) in the same manner as described above
A15005).

[Transmission timing chart of LED command]
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing the relationship between the LED command and the latch transmitted to the LED driver according to the sixth embodiment. In FIG. 75, the LED command is shown with the address portion (8 bits) omitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 is an LED command (16 bits)
Output a latch signal each time you send. The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the LED command.

The first LED command (digit 0) is held by the first latch signal in the 16-bit latch circuit 164 of the LED driver 153, and the feature ratio display data (digit 0) in the 8-bit latch 167a by the LED command (digit 0). Is stored. Similarly, the second LED command (digit 1) is held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164 by the second latch signal,
Character ratio display data (digit 1) to the 8-bit latch 167b by the LED command (digit 1)
Is stored. The third LED command (digit 2) is held by the third latch signal in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, and the duty ratio display data (digit 2) is stored in the 8-bit latch 167c by the LED command (digit 2). It is memorized. The fourth LED command (digit 3) is held by the fourth latch signal in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, and the duty ratio display data (digit 3) is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d by the LED command (digit 3). It is memorized.

[LED data transmission process]
The LED driver transmission process according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart of an LED data transmission process according to the sixth embodiment. The gaming microcomputer 111 first generates an LED command (digit 0) (16 bits) including the character ratio display data (digit 0) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167a (A16003), and the LED command (digit 0). ) Is sent to the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit and transmitted together with the clock signal (A16005).

The gaming microcomputer 111 generates an LED command (digit 1) including the character ratio display data (digit 1) stored in the 8-bit latch 167b (A16009), and transmits the LED command (digit 1) as described above. (A16011). The gaming microcomputer 111 controls the LED command (digit 2) including the character ratio display data (digit 2) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167c.
) (A 16015) and transmits the LED command (digit 2) (A 16017)
. The gaming microcomputer 111 displays the character ratio display data (stored in the 8-bit latch 167d).
An LED command (digit 3) including digit 3) is generated (A16021), and the LED command (digit 3) is transmitted (A16023). In FIG. 76, LED commands (feature ratio display data = character code) are transmitted in the order of digit 0, digit 1, digit 2, and digit 3, but the transmission order can be set arbitrarily.

[Cascade connection of LED drivers according to the first modification]
FIG. 77 shows the LED driver 153 (ratio driver 1 according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment).
53 b shows the details of the cascade connection of the pop-out rate / discharge ball number driver 153 c). In the cascade connection, the ratio driver 153 b is the first stage, and the ball ratio / ball number driver 15
3c constitutes the second stage. The serial data (initial setting command, LED command) transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 is first transmitted to the duty ratio driver 153b, and is directly transmitted from the duty ratio driver 153b to the payout rate / discharged ball number driver 153c. Ru. That is, serial data such as initial setting data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code) and the like transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 are sequentially processed by the ratio driver 153 b and the payout rate /
It is transmitted to the discharge ball number driver 153c. Therefore, the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit initial setting data, lighting pattern data, and a character code in a serial manner using one serial communication circuit. The gaming microcomputer 111 transmits the clock signal and the latch signal (load signal) in parallel (parallel) to the duty ratio driver 153 b and the payout rate / discharge ball number driver 153 c.

[Status display device]
FIG. 78A is a diagram showing the details of the character ratio display section 68 displaying the character ratio. The character ratio display unit 68 in the status display unit 152 is a display in which four 7-segment type (8-segment types including point portions) indicators 900 are arranged in the horizontal direction. , A four-digit seven-segment display 900 showing two digits and three digits. The role ratio display section 68 displays the total role ratio (for example, "y50.8") and the continuous role ratio (for example, "r58.4").
Can be switched and displayed. In addition, the third digit (the fourth digit from the right) is a letter "y" indicating the total character ratio (generally used character ratio) or a character indicating the continuous character ratio
"r" may be displayed.

The combination ratio driver 153b (FIG. 77) converts the character code (character code) received from the gaming microcomputer 111 into lighting pattern data of the character (character) indicated by the character code, and based on the lighting pattern data Each digit of the character ratio display section 68 (digit 3,
The lighting of the display 900 of digit 2, digit 1, digit 0) is controlled. This character code (character-item ratio display data) is a character-item ratio calculated by the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 (FIG. 6 (FIG. 6).
70 correspond to the numerical value of each digit. The combination ratio driver 153 b has a character generator 185 (decoder) that generates lighting pattern data of the character indicated by the character code from the character code by decoding, and can set use / non-use of the decoded data by the character generator 185 In this case, it is set to use decoded data. That is, the duty ratio driver 153 b can set the use / non-use of the decoding function for generating lighting data of the character ratio display unit 68 from the character code.

FIG. 78 (B) is a view showing details of a discharged ball number display unit 66 that displays the discharged ball number and a pop rate display unit 67 that displays the pop rate. The number of discharged balls display portion 66 and the output rate display portion 67 in the status display unit 152 are four 7-segment type (8-segment types including the point portion) display 9
00 is arranged in the horizontal direction, and a display 900 showing digit 0 from the right, a display 9 showing digit 1
The numeral 00 corresponds to the discharged ball number display unit 66, the display 900 showing the digit 2 from the right, and the display 900 showing the digit 3 correspond to the pop rate indicator 67. Conversely, the display 900 showing digit 0 from the right, the display 900 showing digit 1 correspond to the pop rate display unit 67, the display 900 showing digit 2 from the right, the display 900 showing digit 3 are discharged You may make it respond | correspond to the number display part 66 of balls. The discharged ball number display unit 66 and the pop rate display unit 67 can be displayed simultaneously.

The payout rate / discharged ball number driver 153c (FIG. 77) lights the character (character) indicated by the character code, which is the character code (character code) received from the gaming microcomputer 111 via the duty ratio driver 153b. It converts to pattern data, and controls lighting of the indicator 900 of each digit of the discharged ball number display unit 66 and the ball out display unit 67 based on the lighting pattern data. The payout rate / discharged ball number driver 153 c decodes the character code into light pattern data (discharged ball number display data, or popping rate display data) of a character indicated by the character code (a decoder) (decoder When the use / non-use of the decoded data by the character generator 185 can be set, the decoded data is set to be used. That is, the payout rate / discharged ball number driver 153 c can set whether to use the decoding function for generating lighting data of the discharged ball number display unit 66 and the popped rate display unit 67 from the character code.

[Transmission timing chart of initial setting command according to the first modification]
FIG. 79 is a timing chart showing an initial setting command sent to a driver for a duty ratio and a driver for the rate of balls out / number of discharged balls according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment. Note that FIG.
The initial setting command is shown with the address portion (8 bits) omitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 sets initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit number setting unit 175 of the payout rate / discharged ball number driver 153 c, and initial setting data for the digit number setting unit 175 of the duty ratio driver 153 b (8 Initial setting data (8 bits) for transmission in the form of initial setting command (32 bits) in order of bit b)
The initial setting data (8 bits) for the duty setting unit 176 of the duty ratio driver 153b is transmitted in the order of being included in the initial setting command (32 bits).

The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time it transmits an initial setting command (32 bits). The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the initial setting command. Thus, the number-of-digits setting unit 1 of the driver 153c for the payout rate / discharged ball number
Initial setting data (digit) c is stored in 75. At the same time, initial setting data (digit) b is stored in the number-of-digits setting unit 175 of the duty ratio driver 153 b by the latch signal.

Then, in accordance with the next latch signal, the initial setting data (d) c is stored in the duty setting unit 176 of the driver for balls out / number of discharged balls 153 c. At the same time, the initial setting data (d) b is stored in the duty setting unit 176 of the duty ratio driver 153 b by the latch signal.

[Initial setting process of the driver for the percentage of ejected balls / the number of ejected balls and the driver for the duty ratio]
The LED driver initial setting process (A15001 of FIG. 70) according to the first modified example of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing a procedure of initial setting processing of a driver for a duty ratio and a driver for the rate of balls out / number of balls discharged according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment.

First of all, the gaming microcomputer 111 sets the digit number setting unit 17 of the payout rate / discharged ball number driver 153 c.
Initial setting command including initial setting data (digit) c (8 bits) related to the number of used digits of 5
Digit) c (16 bits) is generated (A15006), and initial setting command (digits) including initial setting data (digits) b (8 bits) related to the number of digits used of digit number setting unit 175 of duty ratio driver 153b B) (16 bits) is generated (A15007), initial setting commands (digits) c, and initial setting commands (digits) b connected in order of initial setting commands (digits) c, b (32 bits) to serial communication circuit Write to the transmit buffer of the
09).

Next, the gaming microcomputer 111 performs an initial setting command (initial setting data (due) c relating to a duty ratio of the duty setting portion 176 of the payout rate / discharged ball number driver 153 c (c).
Du) c (16 bits) is generated (A15011), and initial setting command (du) b (16 bits) including initial setting data (du) b related to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the duty ratio driver 153b To generate an initial setting command (d) c
, Initial setting command (due) b linked initial setting command (due) c, b (32
Bit) in the same manner as described above (A15014).

[Transmission timing chart of LED command according to the first modification]
FIG. 81 is a timing chart showing an LED command sent to the driver for the duty ratio and the driver for the ball out rate / the number of discharged balls according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment. Here, the character code stored in the duty ratio driver 153b is a character ratio display data (digit 0-digit 3)
The character code stored in the payout rate / discharged ball number driver 153 c is discharged ball number display data (digit 0, digit 1) or ball exit ratio display data (digit 2, digit 3). Note that FIG.
LED commands are shown with the address portion (8 bits) omitted.

The gaming microcomputer 111 is an 8-bit latch 16 of the driver 153 c for the payout rate / discharged ball number.
These are displayed in the order of discharge ball number display data (digit 0) c (8 bits) stored in 7a and combination product ratio display data (digit 0) b (8 bits) stored in 8-bit latch 167a of combination ratio driver 153b. Ejected ball number display data (digit 1) to be generated and transmitted included in the LED command (32 bits), and then stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the outfall rate / ejected ball number driver 153c
) C (8 bits) and combination ratio display data (digit 1) b stored in the 8-bit latch 167 b of the duty ratio driver 153 b are generated and transmitted by including these in an LED command (32 bits) .

Here, the gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time an LED command (32 bits) is transmitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the LED command. As a result, the discharged ball number display data (digit 0) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167 a of the discharged ball rate / discharged ball number driver 153 c. At the same time, according to the latch signal, the symbol ratio display data (see FIG.
The digit 0) b is stored.

Then, in accordance with the next latch signal, the discharged ball number display data (digit 1) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167 b of the discharged ball rate / discharged ball driver 153 c. At the same time, the item ratio display data (digit 1) b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167 b of the combination ratio driver 153 b.

Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 81, thereafter, the ball game rate display data (digit 2) c stored in the 8-bit latch 167 c of the game ball rate / discharge ball number driver 153 c for the gaming microcomputer 111
(8 bits) The character ratio display data (digit 2) b stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the duty ratio driver 153b is generated and transmitted in the form of including these in a command (32 bits), and then Ejection rate display data (digit 3) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the withdrawal rate / discharge ball number driver 153c 8-bit latch 167 of the duty ratio driver 153b
These are generated and transmitted in the form of being included in a command (32 bits) in the order of feature ratio display data (digit 3) b stored in d.

Therefore, the ball exit rate display data (digit 2) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167 c of the ball exit rate / discharge ball number driver 153 c according to the next latch signal. At the same time, with the latch signal, the symbol ratio display data (digit 2) to the 8-bit latch 167c of the driver 153b for the duty ratio
b is stored.

Further, the ball exit rate display data (digit 3) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167 d of the ball out rate / discharge ball number driver 153 c by the next latch signal. At the same time, the character ratio display data (digit 3) b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167 d of the duty ratio driver 153 b by the LED command (digit 3) b.

[LED data transmission process according to the first modification]
The LED driver transmission process according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a flowchart of an LED data transmission process according to a first modification of the sixth embodiment.

The gaming microcomputer 111 first executes an LED command (digit 0) c (carriage 0) c (8 bits) containing the discharged ball number display data (digit 0) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167 a of the payout rate / discharged ball driver 153 c. 16 bit) is generated (A16002), and an LED command (digit 0) b including the quotient ratio display data (digit 0) b stored in the 8-bit latch 176a of the duty ratio driver 153 b is generated (A16003), Write LED commands (digit 0) c, b (32 bits) concatenated in the order of LED command (digit 0) c and LED command (digit 0) b to the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit and send it along with the clock signal A16006).

The gaming microcomputer 111 is an 8-bit latch 16 of the driver 153 c for the payout rate / discharged ball number.
7b: An LED command (digit 1) c including the discharged ball number display data (digit 1) c is generated (A16008), and an accessory ratio display data (stored in the 8-bit latch 176 b of the duty ratio driver 153 b Generate LED command (digit 1) b including digit 1) b (A1600
9) LED commands (digit 1) c and b connected in the order of LED command (digit 1) c and LED command (digit 1) b are transmitted as described above (A16012).

The gaming microcomputer 111 is an 8-bit latch 16 of the driver 153 c for the payout rate / discharged ball number.
7c: An LED command (digit 2) c including the payout rate display data (digit 2) c is generated (A 16014), and an accessory ratio display data (stored in the 8-bit latch 176 c of the duty ratio driver 153 b) Generate an LED command (digit 2) b including digit 2) b (A 16015
The LED commands (digit 2) c and b connected in the order of LED command (digit 2) c and LED command (digit 2) b are transmitted as described above (A16018).

The gaming microcomputer 111 is an 8-bit latch 16 of the driver 153 c for the payout rate / discharged ball number.
7d, an LED command (digit 3) c including the payout rate display data (digit 3) c stored is generated (A 16020), and an accessory ratio display data (stored in the 8-bit latch 176 d of the duty ratio driver 153 b Generate LED command (digit 3) b including digit 3) b (A 16021
The LED commands (digit 3) c and b connected in the order of LED command (digit 3) c and LED command (digit 3) b are transmitted as described above (A16024).

[Game Control Device According to Second Modification]
FIG. 83 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system of a gaming machine according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment. The game control apparatus 100 of the sixth embodiment is the game control apparatus 100 of the first embodiment.
Similar to the above, the state display device 152 attached to the game control device 100 is incorporated in the collective display device 50. In addition, the game control device 100 of this embodiment
The batch driver 153a, the duty ratio driver 153b, and the payout rate / discharge ball number driver 153c are cascaded in that order by the data signal lines, and the data signal lines extending from the gaming microcomputer 111 are the batch driver 153a. It is connected to the.

[Cascade connection of LED drivers according to the second modification]
FIG. 84 is a diagram showing details of cascade connection of LED drivers according to a second modified example of the sixth embodiment. In the cascade connection, the batch driver 153a constitutes a first stage, the duty ratio driver 153b constitutes a second stage, and the ball-out rate / discharged ball number driver 153c constitutes a third stage. Serial data transmitted from gaming microcomputer 111 (initial setting command, LED command)
Is sent to the batch driver 153a, and from the batch driver 153a
It is sent to 53b as it is. Then, the serial data transmitted to the duty ratio driver 153 b is transmitted from the duty ratio driver 153 b to the ball withdrawal rate / discharged ball number driver 153 c as it is. That is, serial data such as initial setting data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code) and the like transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 are, in order, the batch driver 153a, the ratio driver 153b, the payout rate / discharge ball number It is transmitted to the driver 153c. Therefore, the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit initial setting data, lighting pattern data, and a character code in a serial manner using one serial communication circuit. The gaming microcomputer 111 has a clock signal and a latch signal (load signal) in parallel (parallel) to the batch driver 153a, the duty ratio driver 153b, and the payout rate / discharged ball count driver 153c.
Send to

The collective driver 153 a controls lighting of the collective display unit (not shown) in accordance with the lighting pattern data received from the gaming microcomputer 111. The collective driver 153a is a 7-segment type (8-segment type including point portion) display 900 (LED lamp), and the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (D1) is a display unit 900 of digit 0, the second Special figure fluctuation display part 52 (D2)
Are controlled as the display device 900 of the digit 1 (see FIG. 2B etc.).

The collective driver 153a originally controls the 4-digit 7-segment (including 8-point, including 8-point type) display unit 900 itself, but a variation display unit 53 for a common drawing variation display game, A segment (a-g) of the indicator 900 of the digit 2 of the round indicator 60 and the dotted eight LED lamps (D3-D7, D8, D10, D18) of the first gaming state indicator 57
, Dp) and control (see FIG. 2B etc.). In addition, the collective driver 153a includes a holding storage display unit (a special display 1 holding display 54, a special drawing 2 holding display 55, a general drawing holding display 56),
The dot-like eight LED lamps (D9 of the second game state display unit 58 and the third game state display unit 59)
D11 to D16, D17) are regarded as the segments (a-g, Dp) of the display 900 of digit 3 and controlled (see FIG. 2B and the like).

Note that, in the present embodiment, the batch driver 153a is actually a ratio driver 153a.
b is the same kind of LED driver 153 (same IC) as the driver 153c for the rate of balls out / number of balls discharged, but the driver for batch 153a does not use the decoded data by the character generator 185 even if it has the character generator 185 It is set (not used).

[Transmission timing chart of initial setting command according to the second modification]
FIG. 85 shows a batch driver, a ratio driver, and a driver according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment;
It is a timing chart which shows the initial setup command sent to the driver for the rate of balls out / number of balls discharged. In FIG. 85, the initial setting command is shown with the address portion (8 bits) omitted.

The gaming microcomputer 111 sets initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit number setting unit 175 of the payout rate / discharged ball number driver 153 c, and initial setting data for the digit number setting unit 175 of the duty ratio driver 153 b (8 Bit) and initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit number setting unit 175 of the batch driver 153a are transmitted in the form of being included in a command (48 bits) in order and duty setting of the driver for balls out / number of balls discharged 153c. Initial setting data (digits) c (8 bits) for the unit 176, initial setting data (digits) b (8 bits) for the duty setting unit 176 of the duty ratio driver 153b, and for the duty setting unit 176 of the batch driver 153a Initial setting data (digit) a (8
It transmits in the form included in the command (48 bits) in order of bit).

The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time an initial setting command (48 bits) is transmitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the initial setting command. Thus, the number-of-digits setting unit 1 of the driver 153c for the payout rate / discharged ball number
Initial setting data (digit) c is stored in 75. At the same time, initial setting data (digit) b is stored in the number-of-digits setting unit 175 of the duty ratio driver 153 b by the latch signal. Furthermore, at the same time, the initial setting data (digit) a is stored in the number-of-digits setting unit 175 of the batch driver 153a by the latch signal.

Then, in accordance with the next latch signal, the initial setting data (d) c is stored in the duty setting unit 176 of the driver for balls out / number of discharged balls 153 c. At the same time, the initial setting data (d) b is stored in the duty setting unit 176 of the duty ratio driver 153 b by the latch signal. Furthermore, at the same time, the initial setting data (due) a is stored in the duty setting unit 176 of the batch driver 153a by the latch signal.

[Initial setting process of driver for delivery rate / discharged ball number, driver for duty ratio, driver for batch]
The LED driver initial setting process according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 shows a batch driver, a ratio driver, according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment;
And it is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the initialization process of the driver for a ball out rate / discharge ball | bowl number.

First of all, the gaming microcomputer 111 sets the digit number setting unit 17 of the payout rate / discharged ball number driver 153 c.
Initial setting command including initial setting data (digit) c (8 bits) related to the number of used digits of 5
Digit) c (16 bits) is generated (A15006), and initial setting command (digits) including initial setting data (digits) b (8 bits) related to the number of digits used of digit number setting unit 175 of duty ratio driver 153b B) (16 bits) is generated (A15007), and an initial setting command (digit) a including initial setting data (digit) a (8 bits) related to the number of digits used by the digit number setting unit 175 of the batch driver 153a (16 bits) is generated (A15008), an initial setting command (digit) c,
Write the initial setting commands (digits) c, b and a (48 bits) concatenated in the order of the initial setting command (digit) b and the initial setting command (digit) a to the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit and transmit it with the clock signal (A15010).

Next, the gaming microcomputer 111 performs an initial setting command (initial setting data (due) c relating to a duty ratio of the duty setting portion 176 of the payout rate / discharged ball number driver 153 c (c).
Du) c (16 bits) is generated (A15011), and initial setting command (du) b (16 bits) including initial setting data (du) b related to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the duty ratio driver 153b Is generated (A15012), and an initial setting command (d) a (16 bits) including initial setting data (d) a related to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the batch driver 153a is generated (A15013), and initial Send the initial setting commands (d) c, b and a (48 bits) concatenated in the order of setting command (d) c, initial setting command (d) b and initial setting command (d) a in the same manner as described above (A15015
).

[Transmission timing chart of LED command according to the second modification]
FIG. 87 shows a batch driver, a ratio driver, and a driver according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment;
It is a timing chart which shows the LED command sent to the driver for the rate of balls out / number of balls discharged. Here, the character code stored in the duty ratio driver 153b is character product ratio display data (digit 0-digit 3), and the character code stored in the payout rate / discharged ball number driver 153c is discharged. It is the ball number display data (digit 0, digit 1) or the ball ratio display data (digit 2, digit 3). In addition, lighting pattern data (digit 0-digit 3) (hereinafter referred to as "lighting data") is stored in the collective driver 153a. In FIG. 87, the LED command is shown with the address portion (8 bits) omitted.

The gaming microcomputer 111 is an 8-bit latch 16 of the driver 153 c for the payout rate / discharged ball number.
Character code (digit 0) c (8 bits) stored in 7a, 8 of driver for ratio 153b
These are LED commands (digit 0) in the order of character code (digit 0) b (8 bits) stored in bit latch 167a and lighting data (digit 0) a (8 bits) stored in 8-bit latch 167a of batch driver 153a. C) Character code (digit 1) c (c 1 b) generated and transmitted in the form of c, b, a (48 bits), and then stored in the 8-bit latch 167 b of the drop rate / discharge ball number driver 153 c. 8-bit latch 1) for the driver 153 b for the duty ratio
The character code (digit 1) b (8 bits) stored in 67b and the lighting data (digit 1) a (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the batch driver 153a are sequentially L
It is generated and transmitted by being included in ED command (digit 1) c, b, a (48 bits).

Here, the gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time an LED command (48 bits) is transmitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the LED command. As a result, the discharged ball number display data (digit 0) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167 a of the discharged ball rate / discharged ball number driver 153 c. At the same time, according to the latch signal, the symbol ratio display data (see FIG.
The digit 0) b is stored. At the same time, the batch driver 153a is operated by the latch signal.
Lighting data (digit 0) a is stored in the 8-bit latch 167 a of

Then, in accordance with the next latch signal, the discharged ball number display data (digit 1) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167 b of the discharged ball rate / discharged ball driver 153 c. At the same time, the feature ratio display data (digit 1) is sent to the 8-bit latch 167b of the duty ratio driver 153b by the latch signal.
B) is stored. Furthermore, at the same time, with the latch signal, 8
Lighting data (digit 1) a is stored in the bit latch 167 b.

Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 87, thereafter, the gaming microcomputer 111 stores the character code (digit 2) c stored in the 8-bit latch 167 c of the payout rate / discharge ball number driver 153 c.
(8 bits), character code (digit 2) b (8 bits) stored in 8-bit latch 167 c of combination ratio driver 153 b, lighting data (digit 2) a (2 digits) stored in 8-bit latch 167 c of batch driver 153 a LED command (digit 2) c, b in the order of 8 bits)
, A (48 bits) to generate and transmit, then the driver for the rate of balls out / number of balls discharged 1
Character code (digit 3) c (8 bits) stored in the 53 c 8-bit latch 167 d
Character code (digit 3) stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the driver 153b
b (8 bits) and lighting data (digit 3) a (8 bits) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167 d of the batch driver 153 a are included in LED commands (digit 3) c, b, a (48 bits) in this order To generate and send.

Therefore, the outfall rate display data (digit 2) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the outfall rate / discharged ball number driver 153c by the next latch signal. At the same time, the driver for the ratio 1
Character ratio display data (digit 2) b is stored in the 53b 8-bit latch 167c. At the same time, lighting data (digit 2) a is stored in the 8-bit latch 167 c of the batch driver 153 a by the latch signal.

Further, in accordance with the next latch signal, the outfall rate display data (digit 3) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167 d of the outfall rate / discharged ball number driver 153 c. At the same time, with the relevant latch signal, the symbol ratio display data (digit 3) to the 8-bit latch 167 d of the driver 153 b for the duty ratio
b is stored. At the same time, lighting data (digit 3) a is stored in the 8-bit latch 167 d of the batch driver 153 a according to the latch signal.

[LED data transmission process according to the second modification]
The LED driver transmission process according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a flowchart of an LED data transmission process according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment.

The gaming microcomputer 111 first executes an LED command (digit 0) c (carriage 0) c (8 bits) containing the discharged ball number display data (digit 0) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167 a of the payout rate / discharged ball driver 153 c. 16 bits) are generated (A16002), and an LED command (digit 0) b including the character ratio display data (digit 0) b stored in the 8-bit latch 176a of the duty ratio driver 153b is generated (A16003), 8-bit latch 176 of the batch driver 153a
An LED command (digit 0) a including the lighting code (digit 0) a (display data of the special figure 1 LED) to be stored in a is generated (A16004). And LED command (digit 0) c, LE
Write LED commands (digit 0) c, b, a (48 bits) connected in the order of D command (digit 0) b and LED command (digit 0) a to the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit and transmit with the clock signal (A16007).

The gaming microcomputer 111 is an 8-bit latch 16 of the driver 153 c for the payout rate / discharged ball number.
LED command (Included ball number display data (digit 1) c (8 bits) stored in 7b
Digit 1) c (16 bits) is generated (A16008) and LED command (digit 1) b is generated including character ratio display data (digit 1) b to be stored in 8-bit latch 176 b of combination ratio driver 153 b The LED command (digit 1) a including the lighting code (digit 1) a (display data of the special figure 2 LED) stored in the 8-bit latch 176 b of the batch driver 153 a is generated (A 16010). And LED command (digit 1) connected in the order of LED command (digit 1) c, LED command (digit 1) b, and LED command (digit 1) a
c, b, a (48 bits) are transmitted as described above (A16013).

The gaming microcomputer 111 is an 8-bit latch 16 of the driver 153 c for the payout rate / discharged ball number.
The LED command (digit 2) c (16 bits) including the payout rate display data (digit 2) c (8 bits) to be stored in 7c is generated (A16014), and is sent to the 8-bit latch 176c of the ratio driver 153b. LED command (digit 2) that includes feature ratio display data (digit 2) to be stored b
LED command (digit 2) including lighting code (digit 2) a (display data of common / round / first gaming state) to generate b) (A 16015) and stored in 8-bit latch 176 c of batch driver 153 a A) is generated (A16016). And LED command (digit 2
The LED command (digit 2) c, b and a (48 bits) connected in the order of c) LED command (digit 2) b and LED command (digit 2) a are transmitted as described above (A16019).

The gaming microcomputer 111 is an 8-bit latch 16 of the driver 153 c for the payout rate / discharged ball number.
The LED command (digit 3) c (16 bits) including the payout rate display data (digit 3) c (8 bits) to be stored in 7 d is generated (A16020), and is sent to the 8-bit latch 176 d of the ratio driver 153 b. LED command (digit 3) that includes feature ratio display data (digit 3) to be stored b
LE that includes the lighting code (digit 3) a (display data for hold / second and third gaming states) to generate b) (A16021) and store it in the 8-bit latch 176d of the collective driver 153a
A D command (digit 3) a is generated (A16022). And LED command (digit 3) c
, LED commands (digit 3) b, and LED commands (digit 3) a connected in the order of LED commands (digit 3) c, b, a (48 bits) are transmitted as described above (A16025).

[Operation and effect of the sixth embodiment]
According to the sixth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a gaming control program storage unit (ROM 111 b) for storing a gaming control program (remaining information (program) for gaming control), and a gaming control program (for gaming control) Arithmetic processing means (gaming microcomputer 111) for performing predetermined arithmetic processing with unchanged information (program) and arithmetic processing means (gaming microcomputer 111)
Drive unit (LED driver 153) for driving the light emitting unit (object ratio display unit 68) based on the drive data (LED command) output by the. Drive means (LED
The driver 153) is provided with a setting unit (number-of-digits setting unit 175, duty setting unit 176) for setting a light emission mode in the light emission unit (character ratio display unit 68).
Main processing (A1001 to) to control the progression of the game, and main processing (A10 every predetermined time)
Interrupt processing (A1301) to be executed by interrupting (01 to), and the arithmetic processing means (the gaming microcomputer 111) sets the setting unit (number of digits setting unit 175, duty setting in the interrupt processing (A1301) Unit 176) After transmitting (A15001) initialization data for initializing (at least one of the plurality of setting units) to the drive unit (LED driver 153), the drive data (LED command) is transmitted to the drive unit (LED command) Send to the driver 153).

As a result, even after the main processing, even if the setting value of the LED driver 153 (driving means) becomes indefinite due to noise or the like, it becomes possible to return the LED driver 153 to normal in the interrupt processing, and the correct setting value After that, it is possible to output the drive data (LED command), and it is possible to avoid the light-off due to the noise and the like of the status display device 152 (and the batch display device 50).

In the interrupt process (A1301), after the driving data (LED command) is transmitted to the driving means (LED driver 153), at least one of the plurality of setting units (digit number setting unit 175, duty setting unit 176) Drive means (L
A configuration to transmit to the ED driver 153) is also possible. In this case, in order to transmit the driving data in the next interrupt process, the initial setting data is transmitted to the driving means in the current interrupt process to initialize the setting unit.

That is, in the interrupt processing (A1301), if the initial setting data is transmitted to the driving means together with the driving data, the status display device 152 (and the batch display device) is not based on the transmission order of the driving data and the initial setting data. It is possible to avoid turning off due to the noise of 50) and the like.

Further, according to the sixth embodiment, the arithmetic processing means (the gaming microcomputer 111) can transmit the initial setting data to the drive means (the LED driver 153) also in the main process (A1001 to A100). As a result, it is possible to prevent the state display device 152 from being turned off even before the interrupt processing is performed.

Further, according to the sixth embodiment, the setting unit (number of digits setting unit 175, duty setting unit 176)
The number setting unit 175 sets the number of light emitting elements (display 900) to be emitted in the light emitting section (character ratio display section 68), and the duty setting section sets the duty ratio in the light emitting element (display 900) And 176.

As a result, even if the setting value of the LED driver 153 (driving means) becomes indefinite due to noise or the like, the correct setting value (the number of light emitting elements and their duty ratio (emission intensity, brightness)) It becomes possible to output drive data (LED command), and it is possible to avoid turning off due to noise or the like of the status display device 152 (and the batch display device 50).

Further, according to the sixth embodiment, the light emitting unit is an accessory ratio display unit 68 that displays an accessory ratio. Thus, the item ratio display unit 68 can be reliably displayed in accordance with the game control program even after the main processing.

Seventh Embodiment
The seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 89 to 93. FIG. The seventh embodiment has the same configuration as that of the first embodiment, but in the procedure of changing the trial shot test signal (test signal) to be transmitted to the trial shot test apparatus and the probability setting value (setting value). Is different. The test shot testing device is an external device existing outside the gaming machine 10.

The apparatus configuration in which the present embodiment is performed is the same as that shown in FIG. 3, but mainly the game control apparatus 100 (game control means) and the relay board 70 are used. , Setting change device 42 (setting key switch 93, setting value change switch 102),
An input port 123, a data bus 140, a buffer 133, and a sixth output port 141 are provided. Further, in the game control device 100, a setting change device 42 (setting key switch 93, setting value change switch 102) and a probability setting value display device 143 (display unit) are attached. Note that
As described in the first embodiment, the buffer 133 is provided with an output port (corresponding to the test signal output ports 1 to 6 used in the output process of FIG. 7).

The input port 123, the buffer 133 (second output unit), and the sixth output port 141 (first output unit) are connected to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Input port 1
A setting key switch 93 and a setting value change switch 102 are connected to the reference numeral 23. The relay board 70 is connected to the buffer 133. The probability setting value display device 143 is connected to the sixth output port 141.

A dedicated address is allocated to each of the buffer 133 (second output unit) (test signal output port) and the sixth output port 141 (first output unit).
Can output information to any one of the buffer 133 (test signal output port) and the sixth output port 141 by specifying an address.

The probability setting value display device 143 has, for example, a 7-segment type (8 segment types including a dot display section) indicator (LED lamp) as in the state display device 152 shown in FIG. Lighting pattern data (probability setting value display data) representing the lighting pattern
It consists of a driver that converts it into In addition, the test shot testing apparatus can also be provided with a display and a driver similar to the probability setting value display device 143.

The gaming microcomputer 111 uses the sixth output port 141 for information on the probability setting value area (probability setting value display data corresponding to the fixed value of the probability setting value) or information on the operation probability setting value area (provisional of the probability setting value) Output the probability setting value display data) corresponding to the value. Meanwhile, the gaming microcomputer 11
1 outputs information of the probability setting value area to the buffer 133 (test signal output port) but does not output information of the operation probability setting value area.

As a result, on the probability setting value display device 143, the definite value and the provisional value of the probability setting value are displayed. In addition, when the test shot testing device is provided with the same display as the probability setting value display device 143, only the definite value of the probability setting value is displayed on the test shot testing device.

Probability setting value change processing of the seventh embodiment
FIG. 89 is a flowchart of a procedure of probability setting value change processing according to the seventh embodiment. The probability setting value changing process according to the seventh embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment (FIG. 10), but step A20002 is added between step A2413 and step A2414, and step A20003 between step A2420 and step A2421. Has been added.

In step A2002, the gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a test signal using lighting pattern data (probability setting value display data) corresponding to a definite value of the probability setting value identical to that output to the probability setting value display device 143 as a test shot test signal. Save to data area. For example, the lighting pattern data and the test signal output data are the same “10111110 B” ((a, b, c, d
, E, f, g, Dp) = (1, 0, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0)) (refer to the sixth embodiment for the lighting pattern data). As a result, the test injection test apparatus can collect data of the definite value of the probability setting value as a test injection test signal, and can display the definite value of the probability setting value when the test injection test apparatus is provided with a display.

In step A20003, the gaming microcomputer 111 saves the trial shot test signal once erased in step A2418 in the test signal output data area again. By this,
Even after the process of changing the probability setting value (main process), the test injection test apparatus can collect data as the test injection test signal as a definite value of the probability setting value, and when the test injection test apparatus is equipped with a display, the probability setting value The final value of can be displayed.

[Display Example of Probability Setting Values in Probability Setting Display Device and Projective Testing Device]
FIG. 90 is a seven-segment type (including a dot display unit) of lighting pattern data transmitted to the probability setting value display device 143 at the time of setting change of the seventh embodiment and a test shot test signal sent to the test shot testing device. 8) is a schematic view when displayed on an 8-segment type display. Here, the case of changing the probability setting value from 1 to 6 will be described as an example.

In this embodiment, regardless of whether the setting key switch 93 is turned on or off, probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value saved in the probability setting value area is saved as a test shot test signal in the test shot test display data area. It has become. The test injection test apparatus can constantly collect data of the determined value of the probability setting value as a test injection test signal, and can always display the determined value of the probability setting value when the test injection test apparatus is provided with a display.

In the initial state, the probability setting value display device 143 is extinguished, and on the display of the test shot test device, the probability setting value “1” is displayed by lighting pattern data (probability setting value display data) as a trial shot test signal. There is.

Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the setting variable state is entered, and the gaming microcomputer 111 loads the value of the probability setting value area, and is set to the operation probability setting value area as initial data when changing the probability setting value. Save (A1040). At this stage, in FIG. 89, step A2401 (= Y) → step A2406 (= N) → step A2407 (= N) → step A2411 (= N) are repeated. At this time, as shown in FIG. 90 (displayed by the output processing according to FIG. 7), “1” (provisional value) is displayed as lighting pattern data on the probability setting value display device 143. The display on the display remains "1" (final value before change).

Next, when setting value change switch 102 is pressed, step A2407 in FIG.
Since (= Y), step A2408-step A2410 are executed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 90, “2” (provisional value) is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 after the predetermined lighting blank period (lighting-off period), but the display of the test shooting tester Remains “1” (final value before change).

When setting value change switch 102 is further pressed, step A240 in FIG.
8-Step A2410 is repeated. At this time, as shown in FIG. 90, the display of the probability setting value display device 143 is “3” → “4” → “5” each time the setting value change switch 102 is pressed.
“→” (6) (all are provisional values), but the display on the display of the test shot testing device remains “1” (final value before change).

Then, when there is an input from the touch switch (step A 2411 (= Y)), step A 2412, step A 2413 and step A 20002 are executed to set the probability setting value “6” in the test signal output data area and the probability setting value display data area The probability setting value display data corresponding to the finalized value) is overwritten. At this time, as shown in FIG. 90, the probability setting value display device 14
The display of 3 changes from "6" (provisional value) to "6" (decision value), and the display on the display of the trial shooting test apparatus changes from "1" (provisional value) to "6" (decision value).

Also, by executing step A2406 (= Y) and step A2416 (= Y), step A2418 is executed, and the probability setting value display data (probability saved in the test signal output data area and the probability setting value display data area) Although the set value "6" is once deleted, it is restored at step A2420 and step A20003. In this case, the display of the probability setting value display device 143 and the display of the test shot testing device maintains “6” (final value).

Finally, by turning setting key switch 93 off, probability setting value display data corresponding to probability setting value "6" is saved in probability setting value display data area by step A2420 as shown in FIG. 89. A shot test signal (lighting pattern data) corresponding to the probability setting value “6” is saved in the test signal output data area by A20003. Since the probability setting value display permission flag is not set when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the probability setting value display permission flag is set in the subsequent setting change or setting confirmation (A
2405, A2502), the probability setting value display data is not displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 (step A1613 (= N)). On the other hand, test signal output data continues to be transmitted to the test shooting test apparatus (A1621, A1622, A1624). Therefore, as shown in FIG.
The probability setting value display device 143 is turned off, and the display of the probability setting value “6” is maintained on the display of the direct shot test device.

First Modification of the Seventh Embodiment
FIG. 91 shows the probability setting value display device 14 at the time of setting change of the first modified example of the seventh embodiment.
It is a schematic diagram at the time of displaying the lighting pattern data transmitted to 3 and the trial shot test signal sent to a trial shot test apparatus on a 7 segment type | mold (8 segment type if a dot display part is included) display.

The probability setting value display device 143 and the display of the test shot testing device can display 7 segments of lighting pattern data (a, b, c, d, e, f, g) and dot data (Dp) (additional information) (See FIG. 71). For example, the dot display unit attached to the 7-segment segment turns on when the dot data (Dp) is “1” and turns off when the dot data (Dp) is “0”.

As described above, the output process shown in FIG. 7 (step A1621, step A1622 (= Y
And steps A1623 and A1624), the test shot test signal and the setting key switch on information are synthesized and output. Step A1621 and step A162.
2 (= N), when there is no setting key switch on information, the test shot test signal is output as it is.

In the present embodiment, when the setting key switch 93 is in the on state, the setting key switch on signal is input to the gaming microcomputer 111. Here, the setting key switch on signal can be expressed as “1”, for example. On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is in the off state, it can be considered that the setting key switch off signal (state without the setting key switch on signal) is inputted to the gaming microcomputer 111. At this time, the setting key switch off signal can be expressed as “0”, for example.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the test shot test signal is used as lighting pattern data, the setting key switch on information as dot data (1), the setting key switch off information as dot data (0), and the lighting pattern data and dot data (Dp). It is made to output the data which synthesize | combined = 0 or 1) to a test injection test device. As a result, the determined value of the probability setting value is displayed on the basis of the lighting pattern data in the test shot testing device. In addition, it is possible to grasp whether the setting key switch 93 is on / off, that is, whether the setting is being changed, by turning on / off the dot display unit according to the presence or absence of dot data (1). In the present embodiment, it can be grasped that the dot display unit is turned on by the dot data (1) and the setting change is in progress, and it is understood that the dot display unit is turned off by the dot data (0) and the setting change is finished. can do.

In the present embodiment, the gaming microcomputer 111 uses the buffer 133 (data (a, b, c, d, e, f, g, Dp) including lighting pattern data (determination value of probability setting value) and dot data. The test signal output port) and the relay board 70 (FIG. 3) are configured to output to the test injection test apparatus. As a result, the shooting test apparatus can grasp not only the final value of the current probability setting value but also whether or not the setting is being changed.

As shown in FIG. 91, in the first modified example, the final value of the probability setting value is always displayed on the display of the test shot testing device, but when the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the dots are lit,
While switching the probability setting value (provisional value) from “1” to “6”, the lighting of the probability setting value and the dots is maintained. Then, when the new setting value is determined, the final value of the probability setting value after the update is displayed on the display of the flash testing device, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the dot is extinguished. It is the same as FIG. 90 except for the lighting and extinguishing of the dots.

Second Modification of Seventh Embodiment
FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting value change processing according to the second modified example of the seventh embodiment. In the second modification, dot data (Dp indicating that the setting is being changed)
“0 or 1” is also displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 so that an operator who changes the setting can visually determine whether the setting is being changed or not.

Compared to FIG. 90, in FIG. 92, step A20001 is added between step A2406 and step A2407, and accordingly, step A2409 is changed to step A2409a, step A2413 is changed to step 2413a, and step A2420 is step A2420a. Has been changed to.

At step A2406 (= N), at least the setting key switch 93 is in the on state. Therefore, in step A20001, the gaming microcomputer 111 saves probability setting value display data and dot data (Dp = 1) corresponding to the operation probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area. As a result, the probability setting value (provisional value) before the setting value change switch input can be displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 while the dot display portion is lit.

At step A2409a, the gaming microcomputer 111 saves the probability setting value display data and the dot data (Dp = 1) corresponding to the operation probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area. As a result, the probability setting value (provisional value) changed by the setting value change switch input can be displayed in the probability setting value display device 143 while the dot display portion is lit.

At step A2413a, the gaming microcomputer 111 saves the probability setting value display data and the dot data (Dp = 0) corresponding to the operation probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area. As a result, the probability setting value (fixed value) after the setting value change switch is input can be displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 while the dot display section is turned off.

In step A2420a, the gaming microcomputer 111 saves the probability setting value display data and the dot data (Dp = 0) corresponding to the operation probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area. Thus, the dot display unit can be kept off. Since the probability setting value display permission flag is not set when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, until the probability setting value display permission flag is set in the subsequent setting change or setting confirmation (A2405, A2502), The probability setting value display data is not displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 (step A 1613 (= N)). On the other hand, test signal output data continues to be transmitted to the test shooting test apparatus (A1621, A1622, A1624).

FIG. 93 shows the probability setting value display device 14 at the time of setting change of the second modified example of the seventh embodiment.
It is a schematic diagram at the time of displaying the lighting pattern data transmitted to 3 and the trial shot test signal sent to a trial shot test apparatus on a 7 segment type | mold (8 segment type if a dot display part is included) display.

In the initial state, the probability setting value display device 143 is extinguished, and the probability setting value “1” is displayed on the display of the trial shot test device as a test shot test signal (lighting pattern data). In addition, about the information displayed on the indicator of a test injection test device, since it is the same as that of said 1st modification, subsequent description is abbreviate | omitted.

Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on, probability setting value display data and dot data (1) corresponding to the working probability setting value are saved in the probability setting value display data area (step A20001). As a result, as shown in FIG. 93 (displayed by the output process according to FIG. 7), “1” (provisional value) is displayed as lighting pattern data on the probability setting value display device 143, and the dot display unit is lighted. .

Next, when setting value change switch 102 is pressed, step A2407 in FIG.
Since the judgment result of is "Y", step A2408-step A2410 are executed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 93, “2” (provisional value) is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 after a predetermined lighting blank period (lighting-off period), and the dot display portion is lit.

When setting value change switch 102 is further pressed, step A240 in FIG.
8, step A2409a and step A2410 are repeated. At this time, as shown in FIG. 93, every time the setting value change switch 102 is pressed, the display of the probability setting value display device 143 is “3” → “4” → “5” → “6” (all are provisional values) And the dot display unit also lights in conjunction with the display of the probability setting value.

Then, when the touch switch is input (step A 2411 (= Y)), step A
2412, step A2413a and step A20002 are executed, and probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value "6" (final value) is overwritten on the probability setting value display data area. At this time, as shown in FIG. 93, the display of the probability setting value display device 143 is “6” (provisional value)
When the dot display unit is lighted, “6” (final value) is lighted and the dot display unit is turned off. As a result, the worker can visually grasp that the probability setting value has been updated from “1” to “6”.

Finally, by turning off the setting key switch 93, as shown in FIG. 92, probability setting value display data and dot data (Dp = 0) corresponding to the probability setting value (decision value) are set at step A2420a. It is saved in the value display data area. Since the probability setting value display permission flag is not set when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the probability setting value display permission flag is set in the subsequent setting change or setting confirmation (A2
405, A2502), the probability setting value display data is not displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 (step A1613 (= N)). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 93, the probability setting value display device 143 is turned off. In addition, in FIG. 93, lighting of the dot display part of the indicator of a trial shot test apparatus can also be abbreviate | omitted.

[Operation / Effect of Seventh Embodiment]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is a gaming control means (the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100) capable of executing the variable display game in which the identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the start condition. If the stop result of the variable display game is a special result, the special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The gaming machine 10 has setting change means (setting change device 42) capable of changing setting values according to settings relating to a game, a display unit (probability setting value display device 143) capable of displaying the setting values, and display unit A first output unit (sixth output port 141) to which lighting pattern data (probability setting value display data) is output, and a second output unit (separate from the first output unit)
A buffer 133 and a test signal output port). Game control means (game microcomputer 1
11) generates lighting pattern data (probability setting value display data) based on the setting value, and outputs it to the display unit (probability setting value display device 143) via the first output unit (sixth output port 141) The lighting pattern data can be output to an external device (test fire test apparatus) via the second output unit (buffer 133, test signal output port) as a test signal (test fire test signal) for the gaming machine.

Therefore, by making the test signal (test fire test signal) output to the external device (test fire test device) the same data as the lighting pattern, it is possible to ensure that the test signal is raw correct information and display of the gaming machine 10 Even when the set value display is not performed in the unit (probability set value display device 143), the probability set value can be notified to an external device provided outside the gaming machine 10. In addition, when undecided setting information during setting change is output to the first output unit (sixth output port 141) while not output to the second output unit (buffer 133, test signal output port), undecided Setting information can be prevented from being output to the outside, and confusion due to unnecessary information can be prevented.

In the present embodiment, the display unit (probability setting value display device 143)
The setting value related to the probability setting value display data) and the additional information (dot data (Dp = 0 or 1)) different from the setting value can be displayed, and the setting changing means (setting changing device 42) changes the setting value. Switch for changing to the setting variable state where setting is possible (setting key switch 93)
When the switch is on, the additional information (dot data (Dp
= 1)), and it is possible to output additional information together with the test signal to an external device (testing test device).

Therefore, the final value of the set value is displayed on the basis of the lighting pattern data in the external device (test shooting test device). Also, the external device can grasp whether the switch (setting key switch 93) is on or off, that is, the setting is being changed, based on the presence or absence of the additional information (dot data (Dp = 1)). In the present embodiment, for example, in an external device (test shooting test device),
The dot display unit is turned on by the dot data (Dp = 1) as additional information, and it can be understood that the setting is being changed, and the dot display unit is turned off by the dot data (Dp = 0), and the setting change is completed. You can figure out that.

In the present embodiment, the display unit (probability setting value display device 143)
The setting value related to the probability setting value display data) and the additional information (dot data (Dp = 0 or 1)) different from the setting value can be displayed, and the setting changing means (setting changing device 42) changes the setting value. Switch for changing to the setting variable state where setting is possible (setting key switch 93)
When the switch is on, the game control means (game microcomputer 111) generates additional information (dot data (Dp = 1)) and displays the additional information together with the lighting pattern data (probability setting value) Output to the display device 143).

Therefore, by displaying additional information (dot data (Dp = 0 or 1)) on the display unit (depending on whether the dot display unit is lit), whether the operator who is performing the setting change is in the setting change or the setting change end. Can be judged visually.

Eighth Embodiment
FIG. 94A is a block diagram showing a configuration example (No. 1) of a game control system according to the eighth embodiment. The game control system according to the eighth embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment, but is simplified and displayed to the minimum necessary configuration to explain the effect of the invention. In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10
At least the game control apparatus 100 (game control means) and the power supply device 400 (power supply means) are provided. The power supply device 400 is supplied with an external rated voltage (for example, AC 24 V from Game Island) and generates a predetermined power supply voltage (for example, DC 32 V, DC 12 V, DC 5 V) to control the game control device 1
Output to 00.

In the game control device 100, the probability setting value display device 143A (probability setting value display device 143)
And the driver 143a is attached. The probability setting value display device 143A is a power supply device 4
It is driven by receiving electric power (for example, DC 5 V) from the normal power supply unit 410 constituting 00, and is connected to the sixth output port 141 via the driver 143a. Driver 14
3a is to convert the information of the probability setting value output by the gaming microcomputer 111 into lighting pattern data and output it. The probability setting value display device 143A can display the probability setting value by the lighting pattern data input from the driver 143a.

The probability setting value display device 143B is attached to the power supply device 400. The probability setting value display device 143B is driven by receiving power (for example, DC 5 V) from the normal power supply unit 410 without via the game control device 100, and is connected to the sixth output port 141 via the driver 143a. There is. Therefore, the probability setting value display device 143B is also the driver 143.
The probability setting value can be displayed by the lighting pattern data input from a. As described above, the probability setting value can be easily confirmed by arranging the probability setting value display device 143 </ b> B in the power supply apparatus 400. Further, since the probability setting value display device 143B receives and drives the power (for example, DC 5 V) from the normal power supply unit 410 without passing through the game control device 100, the game control device 100 supplies power to the probability setting value display device 143B. Since the wiring to perform can be omitted, the cost can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 94A (broken line), in the present embodiment, the setting value change switch 102 can also be attached to the power supply apparatus 400. As described above, the setting value change switch 102 is an RA.
It can also be used as an M clear switch. Therefore, with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the work efficiency at the time of setting change using the set value change switch 102 or clearing of the RAM.

The display of the probability setting value and the control of turning on / off the dot display portion in the probability setting value display device 143A and the probability setting value display device 143B are the same as in the seventh embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 94B is a block diagram showing a configuration example (No. 2) of the game control system according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 94B, in the eighth embodiment, the DC / DC converter 143b (voltage conversion means) is attached to the game control apparatus 100, and the output voltage thereof is displayed as the probability setting value display device 143A.
It is also preferable to supply to the probability setting value display device 143B.

In the arrangement of FIG. 94B, for example, the normal power supply unit 410 does not generate drive voltages (for example, DC 5 V) for the probability setting value display device 143A and the probability setting value display device 143B, or even if the drive voltage is generated. The arrangement is suitable when the setting of the probability setting value display device 143A and the probability setting value display device 143B can not be satisfied. At this time, the output voltage (for example, DC 12 V) of the normal power supply unit 410 is input to the input side of the DC / DC converter 143 b, and the output side (for example, DC 5 V) is the probability setting value display device 143A and the probability setting value display device 143B.
Connected to

Here, the wiring 143c for outputting lighting pattern data from the driver 143a to the probability setting value display device 143B, and the probability setting value display device 143 from the DC / DC converter 143b.
In wiring 143d for supplying a driving voltage to B, a harness is formed by a portion straddling between game control device 100 and power supply device 400, and is connected to the harness by a portion disposed in game control device 100 and power supply device 400. These connectors may be respectively formed, and two connectors may be connected by the harness. Thereby, the wiring 143c and the wiring 1
It is possible to reduce the occurrence of disconnection of any one of 43 d, and to prevent malfunction of the probability setting value display device 143B.

[Operation and Effect of Eighth Embodiment]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment includes the game control means (game control apparatus 100) capable of executing the variable display game in which the identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the start condition. When the game stop result is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The gaming machine 10 can change a set value according to settings relating to the setting regarding the power supply means (power supply device 400) that generates a predetermined power supply voltage from the rated voltage supplied from outside the gaming machine and supplies it to the game control means. Setting change means (setting change device 42). The game control means (game control apparatus 100) generates lighting pattern data (probability setting value display data) according to the probability setting value. The power supply means (power supply device 400) displays a probability setting value based on the lighting pattern data (probability setting value display data) (probability setting value display device 143B)
Equipped with

Therefore, by disposing the display unit (probability setting value display device 143B) in the power supply means (power supply device 400), confirmation of the setting value can be easily performed, and the opportunity for confirmation of the setting value can be increased. .

In the present embodiment, the display unit (probability setting value display device 143B) is a power supply voltage of a predetermined voltage value (power supply device 400) without passing through the game control means (game control device 100).
Drive voltage is supplied. As a result, the wiring for supplying power from the game control means to the display unit can be omitted, so that the cost can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) is a power supply means (power supply device 4).
The voltage conversion means (DC / DC converter 143b) which converts the voltage supplied from 00) and supplies it to the display unit (probability setting value display device 143B) is provided.

Therefore, even if the power supply means (power supply device 400) does not generate the drive voltage (for example, DC 5 V) of the display unit (probability setting value display device 143B) or even if the drive voltage is generated Voltage conversion means (DC / DC converter 143b)
Can reliably supply the power supply voltage to the probability setting value display device 143B.

In the present embodiment, the display unit (probability setting value display device 143B) can display the setting value relating to the lighting pattern data and the additional information (dot data (Dp = 0 or 1)) different from the setting value. The means (setting change device 42) includes a switch (setting key switch 93) for shifting to the setting variable state where the setting value can be changed, and the game control means (game control device 100) is a switch (setting key When the switch 93) is on, additional information (dot data (Dp = 1)) is generated, and additional information (dot data (Dp = 1)) is output to the display unit together with the lighting pattern data.

Therefore, by displaying additional information (dot data (Dp = 0 or 1)) on the display unit (depending on whether the dot display unit is lit), whether the operator who is performing the setting change is in the setting change or the setting change end. Can be visually judged by the display content of the display unit arranged in the power supply means (power supply device 400).

[Ninth embodiment]
The ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 100. FIG. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to eighth embodiments. The ninth embodiment relates to external information output at the time of setting change.

[Timing chart of external information output at the time of setting change]
First, the timing of external information output at the time of setting change according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of external information output at the time of setting change according to the ninth embodiment.

After the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off at time u1, the setting key switch 93 (setting key) of the setting changing device 42 (setting changing means) is turned on (first mode) at time u2, and then time u
At 3, the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on.

When the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on at time u3, the gaming control apparatus 100 sets the probability setting value changing flag since the setting key switch 93 is turned on (A1
038) The probability setting value display permission flag is set (A2405), and the setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 (setting display device) that has been turned off (setting value display, A1615)
.

In the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the character ratio display section 68 (FIG. 78) of the state display device 152 for displaying the character ratio is used as the probability setting value display device 143. That is, during the setting change or during setting confirmation, the probability is given to any one of the four 7-segment (including 8-point) display units 900 of the character ratio display 68 (FIG. 78). The set value may be displayed. Note that the character ratio is displayed on the character ratio display section 68 except during setting change or setting confirmation. Therefore, the combination ratio display unit 68 is used in combination of the combination ratio display and the setting value display. Further, the present invention is not limited to the use of the character ratio display unit 68 of the state display device 152 as the probability setting value display device 143, and the contents relating to the external information output described in the ninth embodiment may be other embodiments (especially the first embodiment). To the probability display value display device 143 in the eighth embodiment).
The present invention may be applied to the case where it is provided independently of 2.

Then, when the probability setting value change flag is set, the gaming machine state shifts from the game mode to the setting change mode (setting variable state). The game mode indicates the state of the gaming machine other than the setting change mode (setting variable state) and the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state, setting value confirmation mode) described later.

In addition, when the game machine 10 is powered on at time u3, the game control apparatus 100 executes external information editing processing (A1317, FIG. 33A and FIG. 33B) in timer interrupt processing (FIG. 6). Then, as described above in the description of the external information editing process, the setting change mode (setting variable state)
The game control apparatus 100 sets the initial value of the security signal control timer (A1037) and outputs external information (predetermined signal) including the security signal to the external device (external information output on, A1611). ). The external device (external various devices) is a device provided outside the gaming machine 10, and is, for example, an information collecting terminal or a game arcade internal management device (hall computer). In the present embodiment, a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) is set as the initial value of the security signal control timer when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by the on operation of the setting key switch 93 (A1037). The predetermined time set as the initial value of the security signal control timer may be, for example, an extremely long time (24 hours or the like) as shown by the external information output of FIG. As described above, the game control apparatus 100 can output information on the external device as the external information by including information on the setting (for example, the setting change mode or information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has been described later). It functions as an external signal output means.

When the setting value changing switch 102 (setting switch, setting value changing button) of the setting changing device 42 (setting changing means) is operated (pressed) by the operator, setting 1 changes to setting 2 at time u4 and time u5 In this case, setting 2 to setting 3 are made, and at time u6, setting 3 to setting 4 are made. Thus, every time the setting value change switch 102 is operated, the setting value (setting) is changed by +1 each, and after setting 6, the setting value changing switch 102 is operated to change to setting 1. Specifically, every time the setting value change switch 102 is operated, setting value 1 → setting value 2 →
The setting values (settings) are changed as follows: setting value 3 → setting value 4 → setting value 5 → setting value 6 → setting value 1 → setting value 2 →.

Thereafter, when the touch switch signal of the operation handle 24 is turned on at time u7, the probability setting value changed flag is set (A2414), and the probability setting value is changed (A).
The result of 2406 is “Y” (setting confirmed). At that time, in the present embodiment, in order to output information as external information (predetermined signal) by including information that the setting is decided in the setting change mode in the security signal, the game control device 100 is outputting the predetermined signal Turn off once. That is, even when the initial value of the security signal control timer is set to an extremely long predetermined time at time u3, the output of the predetermined signal (external information output) is temporarily interrupted.

Then, when the output of the predetermined signal (external information output) is interrupted at time u8, the game control apparatus 100 outputs the new predetermined signal (external information output) for a predetermined time (predetermined pulse width, By turning on, for example, for 256 msec, the information that the setting has been determined in the setting change mode is included in the security signal, and then the output of the new predetermined signal is turned off. Thereafter, the game control device 100 ends the interruption of the external information output, and turns on the external information output again. The interruption time is a time to turn on the output of a new predetermined signal for a predetermined time (a predetermined pulse width, for example, 256 msec) when interrupted, and a time to turn on the output of the new predetermined signal. Time to turn off external information output (eg 256 msec)
And a time (for example, 768 msec) which is later combined with a time for which the output of the new predetermined signal is to be turned off (for example, 256 msec).

Thereafter, at time u9, the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned off (the second mode), and the clear target RAM area is cleared to 0 (A2417). The timer is forcibly cleared regardless of whether a predetermined time has elapsed, the external information output is turned off, the gaming machine state changes from the setting change mode to the game mode, and the setting change is completed. In addition, when the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A2417), the probability setting value display permission flag is also cleared, and the probability setting value display device 143 in which the setting value was displayed (in this embodiment, the state display device The item ratio is displayed on the item ratio display unit 68 of 152 (also shown in item ratio display). In addition, the probability setting value display device 143
Instead of displaying information on the character ratio, the status display device 152 may also display information on the payout rate, the number of discharged balls, and the base value (the payout rate in the normal gaming state). Display rate of balls, display number of balls discharged, display of base value).

[Modification of timing chart of external information output at the time of setting change]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, a modification of the timing of the output (external information output) of the predetermined signal at the time of setting change in FIG. 95 will be described. FIG. 96 is a timing chart showing a modification of the timing of external information output at the time of setting change according to the ninth embodiment. In FIG. 96, only the timing of the external information output of FIG. 95 is extracted and described.

First, FIG. 96A is a timing chart showing the timing of output (external information output) of a predetermined signal at the time of setting change in FIG.

As described above, when the game machine 10 is powered on with the setting key switch 93 (setting key) turned on at time u3, the game control apparatus 100 outputs an external information (security signal). turn on.

Then, when the setting is determined at time u7 (setting determined), game control device 100 temporarily interrupts external information output, and includes information that the setting is determined in the setting change mode at time u8 in the security signal. After the external information output is turned on for a predetermined time (a predetermined pulse width, for example, 256 msec) to output information (predetermined signal), the external information output is turned off.

Thereafter, after an interruption time (for example, 768 msec) has elapsed from time u7, the game control device 1
In 00, after turning on the external information output again, the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned off at time u9 to turn off the external information output, and the gaming machine state is changed from the setting change mode to the gaming mode Migrate to

Next, with reference to FIG. 96 (b), a first modified example of the timing of the output (external information output) of a predetermined signal at the time of setting change will be described.

When the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on at time u3 with the setting key switch 93 turned on, the game control apparatus 100 turns on the external information output as in FIG. 96 (a).

Then, with the setting determined at time u7, the game control device 100 turns off the external information output.

Thereafter, at time u8, the game control apparatus 100 includes external information (predetermined signal) including information that the setting has been determined in the setting change mode in the security signal and outputs the external information as a predetermined time (predetermined pulse) After turning on the width, eg 256 msec)
Turn off the relevant external information output. Thereafter, the external information output is kept off, and at time u9
The setting key switch 93 is turned off. As described above, in the first modification, external information output is not temporarily interrupted but terminated at the time of setting confirmation of time t7, and then external information output is turned on for a predetermined time at time t8.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 96C, a second modified example of the timing of the output of the predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of setting change will be described.

In the case where the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on with the setting key switch 93 turned on at time u3, the external information output is kept off in the second modification.

Then, when the setting is determined at time u7, the game control device 100 turns on the external information output for a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec). Thereafter, the external information output is kept off again, and the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time u9. As described above, in the second modification, the external information output is turned on for a predetermined time when the setting of the time t7 is decided, and the off state is maintained except when the setting is decided.

Furthermore, with reference to FIG. 96 (d), a third modified example of the timing of external information output at the time of setting change will be described.

When the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on with the setting key switch 93 turned on at time u3, the game control apparatus 100 outputs the external information, as in FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b). turn on.

Thereafter, when the setting is determined at time u7, the game control device 100 turns off the external information output. As described above, in the third modification, the on state of the external information output is maintained from the power-on of the time t3 to the setting finalization of the time t7, and after the setting finalization, the external information output is off.

[Timing chart of external information output at the time of setting confirmation]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the timing of the output (external information output) of a predetermined signal at the time of setting determination according to the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of external information output at the time of setting decision according to the ninth embodiment.

After the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off at time u10, the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on at time u11. Then, the probability setting value display device 143 (the item ratio display unit 6 of the state display device 152
8 is also used in the game mode when the game machine 10 is powered on at time u11, the character ratio is displayed (character ratio display).

Thereafter, when the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on with the power of the gaming machine 10 turned on at time u12, the game control apparatus 100 sets the probability setting value confirmation mode flag (A2505). Then, the probability setting value display permission flag is set (A2506), and the setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 (setting display device) in which the character ratio is displayed (setting value display, A1615).

Then, the probability setting value confirmation mode in-progress flag is set to shift the gaming machine state from the game mode to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state).

Further, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on at time u12, the game control apparatus 100
External information editing process (A1317, FIG. 33A and FIG. 33B) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 6)
Is running. Then, since the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) is entered as described above in the description of the external information editing process, the initial value of the security signal control timer is set (A25
07) Output external information (predetermined signal) including a security signal to an external device (external information output on, A1611). In the present embodiment, a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) is set as the initial value of the security signal control timer when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by the on operation of the setting key switch 93 (A2507). The predetermined time set as the initial value of the security signal control timer may be, for example, an extremely long time (such as 24 hours) as shown by the external information output in FIG.

Thereafter, the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time u13 so that the security signal control timer is forcibly cleared regardless of whether the probability setting value confirmation mode in progress flag has passed or not (A 2510). The external information output is turned off, the gaming machine state changes from the setting confirmation mode to the game mode, and the setting confirmation ends. At the same time, the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (A 2511), and the bonus item ratio is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 (setting display device) in which the setting value was displayed (practice ratio display ). In addition, it is good also as not only a character thing ratio display but an amount-of-balls-out display, the number of discharge balls display, and a base value display.

[Modification of timing chart of external information output at the time of setting confirmation]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, a modification of the timing of the output (external information output) of a predetermined signal at the time of setting confirmation in FIG. 97 will be described. FIG. 98 is a timing chart showing a modification of the timing of external information output at the time of setting confirmation according to the ninth embodiment. In FIG. 98, only the timing of the external information output of FIG. 97 is extracted and described.

First, FIG. 98A is a timing chart showing the timing of external information output at the time of setting decision shown in FIG.

As described above, after the power is turned on at time u11, the setting key switch 93 is
When the (setting key) is turned on, the game control device 100 turns on the external information output (security signal).

Then, when the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned off at time u13, the gaming control device 100 turns off the external information output, and shifts the gaming machine state from the setting confirmation mode to the gaming mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98 (b), a modification of the timing of external information output at the time of setting confirmation will be described.

When the setting key switch 93 is turned on at time u12 after the power is turned on at time u11, the game control apparatus 100 includes information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has been entered into the security signal and the external information (predetermined signal External information output for a predetermined time (eg 2
56 ms) After turning on, turn off the external information output. Thereafter, when the external information output is maintained in the off state and the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time u13, the game control device includes information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended and the game mode has been entered into the security signal. To output external information (predetermined signal) for a predetermined time (for example, 25)
6 msec) After turning on again, turn off the said external information output. Thus, in a modification of the timing of external information output at the time of setting confirmation, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on or off, the external information output is turned on for a predetermined time, and the setting key switch 93 is turned on or off The external information output is maintained in the off state except when being turned off.

[Timing chart of external information output at the time of setting change of modification]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100, the timing of the output (external information output) of a predetermined signal at the time of setting change according to the modification of the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of external information output at the time of setting change according to the modification of the ninth embodiment. In the following description of FIGS. 99 and 100, the description overlapping with FIG. 95 is appropriately omitted.

In this modification, a RAM initialization switch is provided independently of the setting value change switch 102. When the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch are on at the time of power on (power restoration), the setting change mode (setting variable state) is set. Specifically, after the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the gaming machine 1 is turned on while the RAM initialization switch is turned on (pressed).
When the power supply of 0 is turned on, it shifts to the setting change mode (setting variable state).

After the game machine 10 is powered off at time w1, the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on at time w2. Then, the RWM clear switch is pressed at time w3, and while the pressed state is maintained, the game machine 10 is powered on at time w4,
The probability setting value changing flag is set (A1038), and the process shifts to the setting change mode according to the modification of the ninth embodiment. When shifting to the setting change mode according to the modification of the ninth embodiment, the setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 (setting display device) which has been turned off (setting value display, A1615). Thereafter, the pressed state of the RWM clear switch is released at time w5, and the set value (setting) is changed each time the set value change switch 102 (set switch) is operated at times w6, w7 and w8.

Then, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time w9, the probability setting value changed flag is set (A2414), and the probability setting value is changed (the result of A2406 is "Y", setting is confirmed). Thus, in the present modification, the setting is determined by turning off the setting key switch 93 instead of the touch switch signal of the operation handle 24.

Also, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time w9, the RA to be cleared is cleared.
The M area is also cleared to 0 (A2417). Therefore, the security signal control timer is cleared together with the probability setting value changing flag, the external information output is turned off, the gaming machine state changes from the setting change mode to the game mode, and the setting change is completed. When the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A2417), the probability setting value display permission flag is also cleared, and the probability ratio value display device 143 (setting display device) in which the setting value was displayed is displayed To be displayed (feature ratio display).

After that, at time w10, the game control apparatus 100 includes external information (predetermined signal) in the setting change mode in order to output information as external information (predetermined signal) for a predetermined time (predetermined pulse). After turning on the width, for example, 256 msec, the external information output is turned off. As described above, at the timing of external information output at the time of setting change according to the present modification, external information output is ended at the time of setting confirmation of time w9, and then external information output is turned on for a predetermined time at time w10.

Subsequently, FIG. 100 is another example in which the timing of the output (external information output) of a predetermined signal at the time of setting change according to the modification of the ninth embodiment is changed. In FIG. 100, only the timing of the external information output of FIG. 99 is extracted and described.

FIG. 100 (a) is a timing chart showing the timing of output (external information output) of a predetermined signal at the time of setting change in FIG.

As described above, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on while the RWM clear switch is pressed while the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on at time w4, the game control apparatus 100 receives external information Turn on the output.

Then, when the setting is determined by setting key switch 93 being turned off at time w9 (setting is confirmed), game control apparatus 100 turns off the external information output (security signal).

Thereafter, at time w10, the game control apparatus 100 includes external information (predetermined signal) including information that the setting has been determined in the setting change mode in the security signal and outputs the external information as a predetermined time (predetermined pulse) After turning on the width, for example, 256 msec, the external information output is turned off. Thereafter, the external information output is kept off.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100 (b), a first modified example will be described in which the timing of the output (external information output) of the predetermined signal at the time of setting change according to the modified example is changed.

In the first modification, the external information output is off in the first modified example when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on while the RWM clear switch is pressed while the setting key switch 93 is on at time w4. Maintained.

Then, when the setting is confirmed by turning off the setting key switch 93 at time w9, the game control apparatus 100 turns on the external information output for a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec). Thereafter, the external information output is kept off again. Thus, in the first modification, the external information output is turned on for a predetermined time when the setting of the time w9 is decided, and the off state is maintained except when the setting is decided.

Furthermore, with reference to FIG. 100 (c), a second modification in which the timing of the output (external information output) of a predetermined signal at the time of setting change according to the modification will be described.

At time w4, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on while the RWM clear switch is pressed while the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the gaming control apparatus 100, as shown in FIG.
As in 0 (a), the external information output is turned on.

Thereafter, when the setting is determined by turning off the setting key switch 93 at time w9, the game control apparatus 100 turns off the external information output. As described above, in the second modification, the on state of the external information output is maintained from the time of power-on of time w4 to the time of setting determination of time w9, and after the setting is decided, the external information output is turned off.

[Operation and effect of the ninth embodiment]
In the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the display result of the variation display game (special pattern variation display game) in which the identification information (identification symbol, decoration special symbol, decoration first symbol A to C) is variably displayed is a special result ( It is possible to generate a special gaming state for giving a player a gaming value when the jackpot result mode, the jackpot stop symbol or the special result mode is reached. The gaming machine 10 includes setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing settings (setting values, probability setting values) relating to gaming conditions, and an external device (for example, an information collecting terminal or a game provided outside the gaming machine 10). Internal control device (hall computer)
And external signal output means (game control apparatus 100) capable of outputting a predetermined signal as external information. The setting change means includes setting transition means (setting key switch 93, setting key) capable of shifting to a setting variable state (setting change mode) in which setting can be changed by being set to the first mode (on). The external signal output unit outputs a predetermined signal (for example, an external signal output (for example, output of a security signal)) in response to the transition to the setting variable state by the setting transition unit.

According to such a gaming machine 10, when transitioning to the setting variable state (setting change mode), information on setting (for example, setting changing mode) from the external signal output unit (game control apparatus 100) to the external device Since information indicating that is outputted as external information (predetermined signal), it is possible to notify the game arcade manager through the external device. As a result, the game arcade manager 10 operates the game machine 10 at a timing (for example, fraud, machine trouble, etc.) not intended by the game arcade manager.
When the mode shifts to the setting change mode, it is possible to notice immediately that the mode has shifted.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the setting changing means (the setting changing device 42) is capable of changing the setting by being operated when shifting to the setting variable state (setting changing mode). An operation means (setting value change switch 102, setting switch, setting value change button) is provided. After the external signal output unit (game control device 100) changes the setting (setting value, probability setting value) by the change operation unit, the setting transition unit (setting key switch 93, setting key) is in the second mode (off). Output a predetermined signal (external signal output) corresponding to the output. Therefore, according to such a gaming machine 10, when the setting is changed, it is possible to notify the game arcade manager through the external device, so the game arcade administrator can set the gaming machine 10 at an unintended timing. You can quickly notice the change.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the external signal output unit (game control device 100
) Start outputting a predetermined signal (external signal output) in response to transition to the setting variable state (setting change mode) by the setting transition means (setting key switch 93, setting key), and the setting transition means Ends the output (external signal output) of a predetermined signal in response to the second mode (off). According to such a gaming machine 10, while the setting variable state is in, the on state of the output of the predetermined signal (the external signal output) is maintained, and the notification to the game arcade manager through the external device can be continued. Since it is possible, the game arcade manager can immediately notice that the gaming machine 10 has shifted to the setting variable state at an unintended timing. In addition, when the game arcade manager intentionally changes the setting, it is possible to take a history (log) with the external device as to how long the working time related to the setting change is. It can be used as statistical information for drawing.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the external signal output means (game control apparatus 100)
Corresponds to the setting transition means (setting key switch 93, setting key) being turned to the second mode (off), and after the output of the predetermined signal (external signal output) is finished, the predetermined pulse width ( For example, a signal of 256 msec) is output. According to such a gaming machine 10, the external signal output is output with a predetermined pulse width not only during the setting variable state but also when the setting transition means is set to the second mode and the setting is determined. Therefore, after the gaming machine 10 shifts to the setting variable state at an unintended timing, the game arcade manager can immediately notice that the setting has been decided.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, setting is performed by being set to the first mode (on) under conditions (for example, after power on) different from the conditions for shifting to the setting variable state (setting change mode). And a setting confirmation unit (setting key switch 93, setting key) capable of shifting to a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) capable of confirming. The external signal output means (game control apparatus 100) outputs a predetermined signal (external signal output) while shifting to the setting confirmation state by the setting confirmation means. According to such a gaming machine 10, the game arcade manager can notify the game arcade manager through the external device not only when transitioning to the setting change state but also when transitioning to the setting confirmation state. It is possible to quickly notice that Aoki 10 has shifted to the setting confirmation state at an unintended timing. Although the setting key switch 93 (setting key) functions as a setting confirmation means as well as the setting transition means, the setting key switch 9 as the setting transition means
A switch other than 3 may be provided as setting confirmation means.

Tenth Embodiment
A tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 103. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to ninth embodiments. Tenth
The embodiment relates to a display mode of probability setting values.

[Display of batch display device]
FIG. 101 shows the stop pattern number (A4004, A4013, A4016, A7510) and the lighting pattern of the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 of the batch display device 50 corresponding to the stop symbol number, and the lighting pattern of the probability setting value. FIG. The lighting pattern corresponds to the stop symbol pattern (A4006, A4014, A4017).

First, FIG. 101 (a) shows the stop symbol number and the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 (7-segment type (or 8-segment type) for the special view 1 change display game of the batch display device 50 corresponding to the stop symbol number. 34A is a diagram illustrating the lighting pattern of the LED lamp D1 (FIG. 34A etc.) of the

In the special view 1 variation display game (first special view variation display game), the game control device 100
After the identification information (special symbol, special figure) is variably displayed on the special view 1 display unit 51, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. As the predetermined result mode after the identification information is variably displayed, for example, the lighting pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number (0 to 50) of the predetermined result mode is selected among the lighting patterns shown in FIG. 101 (a).

  Next, FIG. 101 (b) is a diagram illustrating a lighting pattern of the probability setting value.

In response to the setting key switch 93 (setting key) being turned on and setting values being changeable (setting change mode, setting variable mode), the identification information of FIG. 101 (a) is variably displayed. The lighting pattern showing the later predetermined result mode is switched to the lighting pattern of the probability setting value of FIG. 101 (b).

The display of each display unit of the batch display device 50 during probability setting change (in the setting variable state where setting change is possible) according to the present embodiment, that is, each light emitting unit (LED lamp D1- of the batch display device 50)
The light emission mode (lighting / lighting-off mode) of D18) is the same as that described with reference to FIG.
It can carry out similarly to the mode concerning an embodiment. Specifically, based on the probability setting value display data (A2409) corresponding to the probability setting value for work and the probability setting value display data (A2413) corresponding to the probability setting value in the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51. , Numbers 1 to 6 indicating the working probability setting value and the probability setting value are lighted or blinked (A1603-A1608 of output processing)
.

In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can not play a game (for example, a variation display game) by displaying the first special figure variation display unit 51 with a different display (a different display from the normal) during the probability setting change. Can be clearly indicated on the front of the gaming machine 10. In the stop display (lighting pattern in FIG. 101A) of the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 at the time of the fluctuation stop, the numerals 1 to 6 indicating the probability setting value are not used. As a result, the display mode of the probability setting value,
It is possible to easily distinguish the display mode related to the game such as the result mode of the special view 1 variable display game.

Subsequently, FIG. 101C is a diagram illustrating another lighting pattern of the probability setting value. First
As shown in FIG. 101 (c), the special figure fluctuation display unit 51 lights up a decimal point (dot display unit Dp) and turns on numbers 1 to 6 indicating work probability setting values and probability setting values, or It may be displayed blinking. As described above, when the numbers 1 to 6 indicating the operation probability setting value and the probability setting value are displayed on or blinked, the gaming machine 10 sets the probability by lighting the decimal point (Dp). It can be suggested in front of the gaming machine 10 that the change is in progress.

In addition, the stop symbol number shown to Fig.101 (a) is shown to the 2nd special figure fluctuation display part 52 (7 segment type (or 8-segment type LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of the package display apparatus 50). The lighting pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number may be displayed as a predetermined result mode after the identification information is variably displayed in the special view 2 variation display game. Further, the probability setting values shown in FIGS. 101 (b) and 101 (c) may be displayed in a lit or blinking manner in the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52. Here, also in the stop display (lighting pattern of FIG. 101 (a)) of the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 at the time of fluctuation stop, similarly to the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51, numbers 1 to 1 indicating probability set values 6 shall not be used.

Furthermore, each time the set value change switch 102 (set switch, set value change button) is pressed to change the probability set value, the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 of the collective display device 50 and the second special view fluctuation display The probability setting value may be alternately switched and displayed on the part 52. As described above, the probability setting value is changed by alternately switching the probability setting value to the first special image fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special image fluctuation display unit 52 and pressing the setting value change switch 102. It can be made easier to recognize what has been done.

In addition, although the lighting pattern of the probability setting value is different from the lighting pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number illustrated in FIG. 101 (a), the lighting symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number is displayed. What is different from the lighting pattern corresponding to the symbol number may be displayed. That is, although the lighting pattern of the probability setting value may overlap with the lighting pattern of the big hit symbol, the probability that the lighting pattern of the big hit symbol is displayed is low and is rarely displayed. In addition, since it is considered that the player continues playing the game until the special gaming state ends when the player wins the jackpot, the probability that the lighting pattern of the jackpot symbol is displayed when it is changed is extremely small. Therefore, even in the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is changing the probability setting even when the lighting pattern different from the lighting pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number of the shifting symbol is displayed as the probability setting value It can be suggested.

In addition, while the probability setting value is being displayed on the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 or the second special view fluctuation display unit 52 of the batch display device 50 during the probability setting change, the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 Alternatively, all the light emitting units (LED lamps D3-D18) of the collective display device 50 other than the second special view fluctuation display unit 52 may be displayed in a blinking manner. As described above, the gaming machine 10 can also display the light emitting units of the batch display device 50 other than the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special view fluctuation display unit 52 in a manner different from the normal mode. It can be suggested on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the probability setting change is in progress.

[Display of status display device]
FIG. 102 is a diagram showing details of the state display device 152 that displays information on the payout rate. The status display device 152 is a display in which four 7-segment type (8-segment types including point portions) display 900 are arranged side by side, and shows 0 digit, 1 digit, 2 digits and 3 digits from the right It is a 4-digit 7-segment display. The status display device 152 is for the entire payout rate (for example, "bL. 35" shown in FIG. 102) from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present and the number of balls discharged immediately before the predetermined number (for example, 60,000). It is possible to switch and display the ball exit rate (for example, "b6.36"). The state display device 152 may display not only the ball exit rate but also the base value and the character ratio. Further, in the present embodiment, the state display device 152 is a probability setting value display device 1.
It is also used as 43 and can display the probability setting value.

Then, FIG. 103 is a figure which shows the detail of the state display apparatus 152 which displays the number which shows probability setting value.

FIG. 103 (a) is an example of the state display device 152 in which a number (for example, 3) indicating the probability setting value is displayed in the leftmost digit 3. The third digit is a digit on which characters other than numerals (for example, "b") are displayed in the rising rate display shown in FIG. Therefore, by displaying the probability setting value in the third digit, the numeral part and the probability setting value in the display other than the probability setting value, that is, the display relating to the game (for example, ball passing rate display) will not be covered. In addition, unlike the ball throwing rate display shown in FIG. 102, the digits other than the digit 3 displaying the probability setting value are turned off. As a result, it is possible to easily distinguish between the display mode of the probability setting value and the other display mode such as the display of the ball exit rate.

FIG. 103 (b) is an example of the state display device 152 in which a digit (for example, 3) indicating the probability setting value is displayed in the digit 2. As in FIG. 103 (a), the digits other than the digit 2 displaying the probability setting value are turned off. Therefore, according to such a display mode, it can be easily recognized that the probability setting value is displayed.

FIG. 103 (c) shows the state display device 1 in which a digit (for example, 3) indicating the probability setting value is displayed in the digit 1.
FIG. 103 (d) is an example of the state 52, and FIG. 103 (d) is an example of the state display device 152 in which a digit indicating the probability setting value is displayed on the digit 0. Digits other than digit 1 or digit 0 for displaying the probability setting value are turned off.
Therefore, according to these display modes, it is possible to obtain the same effect as an example of FIG. 103 (b) in which the digits other than the digit 2 are turned off, and it is easy to recognize that the probability setting value is displayed. it can.

FIG. 103 (e) is an example of the state display device 152 in which numerals (for example, 3) indicating the probability setting value are displayed on all of the digit 0 to the digit 3. As described above, since the same number indicating the probability setting value is arranged in all the digits of the state display device 152, a display mode different from the display related to other games is provided, so the display mode of the probability setting value and the ball exit rate It is possible to easily distinguish the display mode regarding other games such as display.

The probability setting value displayed on the status display unit 152 is changing the probability setting (setting change mode)
In the case of the probability setting value for work in, it is preferable to blink and in the case where it is the probability setting value for displaying the decided setting, it is set to be lit.

Also, when the working probability setting value (probability setting value) is displayed in the setting change mode, each time the setting value changing switch 102 (setting switch, setting value change button) is pressed to change the probability setting value, The digit of the probability setting value displayed on the status display device 152 may be shifted one by one. Specifically, for example, when the probability setting value is displayed as 3 in digit 3, pressing the setting value change switch 102 displays the probability setting value as 4 in digit 2, and the setting value change switch 102 The probability setting value can be displayed as 5 in digit 1 by being pressed again. When the setting value change switch 102 is pressed with the digit 0, the probability setting value can be displayed in the digit 3. The mode of shifting the digit of the probability setting value displayed on the status display device 152 is not limited to the mode of shifting from left to right, but may be shifted from right to left.

Modification of the tenth embodiment
Further, in the tenth embodiment, the display device (the collective display device 50 and the state display device 152) also functions as the probability setting value display device 143, and displays the game (for example, as a display result after variably displaying the identification information) It was possible to display each of the predetermined result mode, the ball exit rate, the base value, the character ratio and the set value (probability set value) related to the game condition. However, the present invention is not limited to a mode in which the display device (the batch display device 50 or the state display device 152) is also used as the probability setting value display device 143 in this manner, and the display device (the batch display device 50 or the state) as in the first embodiment. The probability setting value display device 143 may be provided on the gaming machine 10 as an independent second display device different from the display device 152 (first display device). In addition, when display is performed by one display device, the display of the other display device may be turned off. Specifically, for example, when the probability setting value is displayed on the second display device (probability setting value display device 143), the first display device (collective display device 50) is displayed.
, The display concerning the game of the state display device 152) can be hidden.

[Operation and Effect of Tenth Embodiment]
In the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the display result of the fluctuation display game (special pattern fluctuation display game) in which the identification information (identification symbol, decoration special symbol, decoration first symbol A to C) is variably displayed is a special result ( A control means (game control apparatus 100) capable of generating a special gaming state for giving a player a game value when a big hit result mode, a big hit stop symbol and a special result mode) is obtained. The gaming machine 10 can display a display related to a game (for example, a predetermined result mode as a display result after displaying the identification information in a variable manner, a ball exit rate, a base, and a prize ratio) (collective display device 50, state The display device 152) and setting change means (setting change device 42) capable of changing the set value (probability set value) regarding the game conditions. The control means displays the setting value on the display device in a mode different from the display relating to the game in response to the setting change means being brought into the changeable state (setting change mode, setting change state). .

According to such a gaming machine 10, the probability setting value is different from the display relating to the game, such as the predetermined result mode after the variable display of the identification information in the variable display game, the bowling rate, the base, and the prize ratio. Will be displayed on the display device (collective display device 50, status display device 152). Therefore, it is possible to easily distinguish between the display mode of the probability setting value and the display regarding the game.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the control means (game control apparatus 100) displays the variable display game (for example, a predetermined result mode after fluctuating display of the identification information) regarding the game.
The display result of the special figure variation display game is displayed on the display unit (collective display unit 50), and the setting change unit (setting change unit 42) can change the setting value (probability setting value) (setting change mode, setting) In response to the variable state) being made, the display of the display device is switched from the display relating to the game to the setting value. According to such a gaming machine 10, when the setting value is switched to the changeable state, the setting value is displayed on the display device in a mode different from the display related to the game. It can be clearly indicated on the front of the gaming machine 10 that it is impossible to play a game (for example, a variable display game).

In addition, the display mode of the display device (the collective display device 50 and the state display device 152) is not limited to only during the probability setting change, and during the probability setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) And a display mode different from the display related to

The gaming machine 10 according to the modification of the tenth embodiment displays a display related to a game (for example, a predetermined result mode as a display result after displaying the identification information in a variable manner, a bowling rate, a base value, a prize ratio). Possible display devices (collective display device 50, status display device 152), setting change means (setting change device 42) capable of changing set values (probability set values) relating to gaming conditions, and set values can be displayed And a second display device (probability setting value display device 143). The control means (game control apparatus 100) sets the setting values in a manner different from the display relating to the game, in response to the setting changeable state (setting change mode, setting variable state) being set by the setting changing means. Is displayed on the second display device. According to such a gaming machine 10, since the display related to the game and the display related to the game condition are displayed on different display devices, the display related to the game and the display related to the game condition can be easily distinguished. .

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the modification of the tenth embodiment, the control means (game control apparatus 100
Is a display related to a game (for example, a predetermined result mode as a display result after fluctuating display of identification information, a bowling rate, a base value, a prize ratio) as a first display device (collective display device 50, status display The first display is displayed in response to the setting change means (the setting change device 42) displaying on the device 152) and setting values (probability setting values) being changeable (setting change mode, setting change state) The display regarding the game of the device is not displayed, and the setting value is displayed on the second display device (probability setting value display device 143). According to such a gaming machine 10, when the setting value is displayed on the second display device, the display relating to the game on the first display device is not displayed, so that the gaming machine 10 plays a game (for example, the variable display game It can be easily distinguished that it can not be.

Eleventh Embodiment
The eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 108. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to tenth embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as the first to tenth embodiments, and redundant descriptions will be appropriately omitted. The eleventh embodiment relates to a small hit and the like.

Big hit probability and small hit probability
FIGS. 104A and 104B show the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the special view fluctuation display game determined as a result of the big hit judgment process (FIG. 22) and the small hit judgment process (FIG. 23) in each setting (each set value). It is a table illustrated to the contrary.

In the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the small hit occurs as a result of the special view 2 change display game and does not occur as a result of the special view 1 change display game (in the special view 1 change display game, small). The hit probability is 0 at each setting). In the first embodiment, a small hit occurs only as a result of the special view 1 change display game (in the special view 2 change display game, the small hit probability is 0 in each setting).
Is).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 104C and FIG. 104D, in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process, the control contents are replaced from those in the first embodiment. That is, the big hit flag 1 setting process (FIG. 104C) of the present embodiment is the big hit flag 2 setting process (FIG. 2) of the first embodiment.
Step 1) corresponds to the replacement of “big hit flag 2” and “special figure 2” with “big hit flag 1” and “special figure 1” respectively, and steps A17001 to A17006 in FIG. 104C are steps A3701 to A3706 in FIG. Corresponds to In addition, the big hit flag 2 setting processing of this embodiment (
FIG. 104D corresponds to the big hit flag 1 setting processing (FIG. 20) of the first embodiment in which “big hit flag 1” and “special figure 1” are replaced with “big hit flag 2” and “special figure 2” respectively. Steps A 18001 to A 18010 in FIG. 104D correspond to steps A 3601 to A 36 in FIG.
Corresponds to 10.

In the table of pattern I in FIG. 104A, the small hit probability, which is the probability that a small hit occurs, is
In the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6, the order increases. Similarly, the big hit probability, which is the probability of occurrence of a big hit, also increases in the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6. That is, as the set value increases, the big hit probability and the small hit probability increase, and the big hit state (first special game state) and the small hit state (second special game state) are more likely to occur, and the special fluctuation winning device 39 The number of balls acquired by winning in (big winning opening) increases, which is advantageous to the player.

In addition, in setting 1 of pattern I, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is 0 (0%), and a small hit does not occur. However, in setting 6, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is approximately 1
Close to (100%). For this reason, in setting 6 of pattern I, a small hit occurs every time in the special figure 2 variation display game in the general power support state (time saving state, definite variation state) in which the execution frequency of the special figure 2 variation display game increases. It becomes a state called "small hit RUSH" (small hit rush). In addition, in setting 6, since the sum of the big hit probability and the small hit probability at the high probability is 100%, either the big hit or the small hit occurs in the special figure 2 variation display game at the high probability (not Not).

In the regular charge support state, the execution frequency of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is increased by increasing the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 or prolonging the time of occurrence of the easy-to-winning state. . Further, since the common drawing start gate 34 is located on the right side of the game area 32, in the common power support state, it is advantageous to hit the right, and the player should hit the right.

In settings I and 5 of pattern I, the small hit probability is 1⁄4 and 1⁄2, respectively, and “1⁄4 small hit RUSH” and “1⁄2” in the common power support state (short time state, positive change state) It will be in a state called small hit RUSH. "1/4 small hit RUSH" and "1/2 small hit RUSH
In "," about 1/4 and 1/2 of the number of acquisition balls of "small hit RUSH" is obtained.

In the setting 2 of the pattern I, the small hit probability is almost the same as the hit probability of a general spread pattern variation display game, and there are almost no balls obtained by the small hit. In the setting 3 of the pattern I, the small hit probability is almost the same as the big hit probability at the high probability, and the number of balls obtained by the small hit exists to such an extent that the player can notice.

In the present embodiment, regardless of the set value, the ratio of the big hit probability at the high probability to the big hit probability at the low probability is a constant value (here, 10 times), and the control of the probability is simplified. There is.

In the pattern II table of FIG. 104A, contrary to the pattern I, the small hitting probability increases in the order of setting 6 <setting 5 <setting 4 <setting 3 <setting 2 <setting 1. As with pattern I, the jackpot probability of pattern II increases in the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6. That is, in the pattern II, as the setting value increases, the big hit probability increases but the small hit probability decreases, and the difference in the number of acquired balls by setting (setting difference) is smaller than that of the pattern I, and the balance is improved.

In the table of pattern III in FIG. 104A, the small hit probability is set 4 <set 5 <set 6
It increases in the order of <setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3>. As with pattern I, the jackpot probability of pattern III increases in the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6. Even in the pattern III, the difference in the number of acquired balls by setting (setting difference) is smaller than that of the pattern I, and the balance is improved.

In the table of pattern IV in FIG. 104A, the small hit probability is set 3 <setting 2 <setting 1 <
Setting 6 <setting 5 <setting 4 increases in the order. The jackpot probability of the pattern IV increases in the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6 as in the pattern I. Even in the pattern IV, the difference in the number of acquired balls by setting (setting difference) is smaller than that of the pattern I, and the balance is improved.

In the table of pattern V in FIG. 104A, the small hitting probability increases in the order of setting 6 <setting 5 <setting 4 <setting 3 <setting 2 <setting 1. The jackpot probability of the pattern V is the same in setting 1 and setting 4, the same in setting 2 and setting 5, and the same in setting 3 and setting 6. In the pattern V, it is difficult to estimate the setting (setting value) from the jackpot probability. Therefore, the player is
In order to estimate the set value from the occurrence of the small hit, attention will be paid to the occurrence of the small hit.

In the table of pattern VI in FIG. 104A, the small hit probability is 0% in settings 1, 2, 4, and 5.
It is close to 100% in settings 3 and 6. In settings 3 and 6, since the sum of the big hit probability and the small hit probability at high probability is 100%, either the big hit or the small hit occurs in the special figure 2 variation display game at high probability (There is no break). The jackpot probability of the pattern VI is the same for setting 1 and setting 4, the same for setting 2 and setting 5, and the same for setting 3 and setting 6.
In pattern VI, it becomes easy to estimate a specific setting (setting 3 and setting 6) from the jackpot probability and the small hitting probability.

As another pattern, the jackpot probability at the low probability of the settings 1 to 3 is usually the probability of the spec (for example, a predetermined range around the probability 1/200), and the jackpot probability at the low probability of the settings 4 to 6 is called A pattern having a probability near sweet sweet spec (for example, a predetermined range around probability 1/99) is also conceivable. In such a pattern, it is possible to apparently provide two types of models by changing settings (setting values).

As described above, it can be said that the gaming machine 10 has different game characteristics (characteristics of the game) and specifications (specifications) for each setting, and there is no need to develop a plurality of specifications of gaming machines, reducing development costs Lead to That is, only by changing the setting value by the setting change device 42 (the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102), it is possible to substantially provide a game machine of a plurality of specifications to the player. For example, a setting with a small hit probability of 0% and a small hit probability of approximately 10
At settings close to 0%, there is a big difference in playability as to whether or not a small hit occurs, and it can be said that this is a completely different spec. Furthermore, by changing the big hit probability and the small hit probability according to the setting (set value), the player enjoys estimating the setting (set value) from the big hit probability and the small hit probability, and the interest of the game is improved. .

[Small hit opening form]
FIG. 105 shows an example of the open mode (small hit open mode, small hit open pattern) of the special variation winning device 39 in the small hit state (second special game state). In the example of FIG. 105, in one small hit, the special variation winning device 39 (ie, the large winning opening) is opened four times, and one opening time is 20 times.
The waiting time is 1500 ms at 0 ms. In addition, special change winning a prize device 39 (ie big winning a prize mouth)
A small hit open mode is also possible, such as when the key is opened only once.

The game control apparatus 100 sets the small hit opening mode the same regardless of the setting (setting value). Therefore, control of the small hit state is simplified. However, small hit opening mode itself setting (setting value)
It becomes difficult to estimate the player, and the player will estimate the setting from the small hit probability.

[Probability per map]
In FIG. 106, in the eleventh embodiment, the hitting probability (at the time of low probability and at the time of high probability) of the common drawing fluctuation display game determined as a result of the common drawing normal processing (FIG. 32) is set to each setting (each setting value). It is a table illustrated to the contrary.

In the table of pattern I in FIG. 106, the probability per common drawing, which is the probability of occurrence per common drawing, is set 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <both in low probability and high probability. Increase in the order of setting 6. That is, as the set value increases, the probability per map increases and the map becomes more likely to occur, and the number of balls acquired by winning to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 and the execution frequency of the special display 2 fluctuation display game increase , It is advantageous to the player. In this case, as in pattern I of FIG. 104A, the small hitting probability of the small hitting that occurs only in the special view 2 variation display game is set 1 <setting 2 <
When setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6 is increased in the order, it is synergistically advantageous to the player.
Also, by changing the probability per common drawing according to the setting (set value), the player has the pleasure of estimating the setting (set value) from the probability per common drawing, and the interest of the game is improved.

In the pattern II table of FIG. 106, the probability per common drawing, which is the probability of occurrence per common drawing, is set 1 <setting 2 <only in one of the low probability time and the high probability (here only in the low probability). Setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6 increases in the following order. That is, at one of the low probability time and the high probability time, the probability per common drawing increases as the set value becomes larger, and the common hit per drawing tends to occur, and the special ball 2) The execution frequency of the variable display game increases, which is advantageous to the player.

[Display screen of waiting for customers]
FIGS. 107A and 107B are views exemplifying the display screen (waiting for customer) of the display device 41 while waiting for a customer (waiting for customer). The effect control device 300 displays an image according to the setting (setting value) on the display device 41 while waiting for a customer who is not displaying the effect related to the variable display game.

In order to do this, the presentation control device 300 performs, for example, customer waiting demo setting processing (B130
In 8), an image corresponding to the set value is displayed on the display device 41 before the animation of the customer waiting demo starts. When the animation of the customer waiting demo is repeatedly displayed, an image corresponding to the setting value is displayed on the display device 41 before the animation of the customer waiting demo ends and starts next.

For example, in the table of pattern I in FIG. 104A, no small hit occurs in setting 1,
It is better to aim the game ball at the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second start winning opening) rather than the special fluctuation winning device 39 (large winning opening) in the normal power support state when right-handed. For this reason, in setting 1, as shown in FIG. 107 (A), the first character image 501 (in the case of a right-hand hit, "Aim at the common station!". Is displayed. The first character image 501 explicitly shows a winning opening to be awarded when the player hits the right.

And in the table of pattern I in FIG. 104A, small hit RUSH can be generated at setting 6 and therefore, special fluctuation winning than the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second start winning opening) in the common power support state at the time of right-handed It is better to aim at the device 39 (big winning opening) and win a game ball. For this reason, in the setting 6, as shown in FIG.
Of the character image 502 (when hitting right, "small hit RUSH !!") is displayed. The second character image 502 implicitly indicates a winning opening to be awarded when the player hits the right. Also, setting 4 of pattern I
In 5, the character image on the display screen while waiting for customers (when hitting right "1/4 small hit RUSH !!"
And "1/2 small hit RUSH !!" may be displayed.

In FIGS. 107 (A) and (B), simultaneously with the first character image 501 or the second character image 502, an image 503 indicating right-turning in the power transmission support state is a display screen (a customer waiting screen).
Is displayed on.

As in the case of pattern I, patterns II, III, IV, V of FIGS.
, VI tables, setting 6, setting 4, setting 3, setting 6, setting 1-2 and 4 respectively
At -5, no small hit occurs, and the first character image 501 ("Aim for Common Power" when right-handed) is displayed as shown in FIG. 107 (A). In addition, patterns II, III, and I of FIGS.
In the V, V, and VI tables, setting 1, setting 3, setting 4, setting 1, setting 3, 6
Since small hit RUSH can be generated, the second character image 50 as shown in FIG. 107 (B).
2 (“Right hit: small hit RUSH !!”) is displayed.

As described above, while waiting for a customer (in the customer waiting state), an image according to the setting (setting value) can be displayed on the display device 41 to show the player the game characteristics under the setting. Then, the playability indicated by the image becomes a standard for the player to select a game machine.

Setting (setting value) on the display screen (waiting customer screen) of the display device 41 waiting for a customer
According to the configuration, it is also possible to display an image of effect introduction and an image of the game flow on the display device 41.

[Display according to the setting of the display unit]
FIG. 108A shows the light emission mode of the first special view change display unit 51 and / or the second special view change display unit 52 (light emitting unit) used to execute the special view change display game in the collective display device 50,
An example of changing according to setting (setting value) is shown.

For example, as shown in FIG. 108A (I), the gaming control device 100 performs the first special view change display unit 51 and / or the second special display while the special view change display game is not being executed (here, waiting for customers). The display mode (light emission mode) of the removal symbol displayed on the figure fluctuation display unit 52 may be different between setting 1 and setting 6.

For example, as shown in FIG. 108A (II), during non-execution of the special figure variation display game (here, waiting for a customer), the game control device 100 performs the first special figure variation display unit 51 and / or the second special feature. The light emission mode may be changed in accordance with the setting by making the figure fluctuation display unit 52 blink and displaying and changing the blinking cycle between setting 1 and setting 6. The blinking cycle is, for example, 256 ms in setting 1 and 12 in setting 6
It is 8 ms. Although the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 and / or the second special view fluctuation display unit 52 is blinked also as the fluctuation display of the special view fluctuation display game, the blinking cycle may be changed according to the setting. .

In addition, during the non-execution (waiting for customers) of the special figure variation display game, the first special figure variation display unit 51
And / or other display parts 53 to 6 of the collective display device 50 as well as the second special view fluctuation display part 52
A configuration is also possible in which the light emission mode of 0 is changed according to the setting (setting value).

FIG. 108B is a diagram showing an external device connected to the external information terminal 71. As external devices, an external display 864 (display) and a game arcade internal control device 866 (hall computer) are provided. The game control apparatus 100 may change the display mode of the external display 864 provided outside the gaming machine 10 according to the setting value.

The game control device 100 outputs a control command according to the setting value to the external display device 864 via the external information terminal 71 at a predetermined timing, and controls the display mode of the external display device 864 according to the setting value.

For example, the external display device 864 (display) is a light-emitting pulsable card 864a and an information display 864d capable of displaying a moving image or a still image. The pad lamp 864 a emits light (rotational light emission) when the control command is received. When receiving the control command, the information display 864d can display data such as the number of games display (rotational speed display) or the like, and can display a moving image or a still image corresponding to the control command on the display unit 868.

When the set value information of the gaming machine 10 is included in the control command, the padlock 864a can emit light in a light emission mode (e.g., a light emission color) corresponding to the set value, and the information display 864d corresponds to the set value. A moving image or a still image can be displayed on the display portion 868.

As described above, the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 and / or the second special view fluctuation display unit 52 (light emitting unit)
The player can estimate the setting (setting value) on the basis of the light emission mode of the above and the display mode of the external display device 864 (display) provided outside.

[Operation and Effect of Eleventh Embodiment]
According to the eleventh embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is provided with a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed based on establishment of the start condition.
When the stop result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. In the special gaming state, the variable winning device (special variation winning device 39) can convert the closed state where the gaming ball can not win, to the open state where the gaming ball can win. The setting change means (the setting change device 42) can change the set value regarding the game condition (the condition for the player to play the game). The game control means generates a first special gaming state (big hit state) when the stop result of the variable display game is the first special result, and the stop result of the variable display game is the second special result. The second game player has less game value that can be acquired than the first special game state
Generate a special gaming state (small hit state). The game control means sets the probability that the stop result of the variable display game will be the second special result (small hit) according to the set value, and the release mode (open pattern) of the variable winning device in the second special game state Set the same regardless of the setting value.

Therefore, since the probability that the variation display game stop result will be the second special result (small hit) can be set according to the set value, the game characteristics of the gaming machine 10 can be changed according to the set value. Furthermore, the second
Since the release mode (opening pattern) of the variable winning device in the special gaming state can be set the same regardless of the set value, the control of the variable winning device in the second special gaming state is simplified.

According to the eleventh embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying effects associated with the variable display game on the display device. The effect control means displays an image according to the setting value on the display device in the customer waiting state in which the effect related to the variable display game is not displayed. Therefore, it is easy for the player to select a game machine in the game arcade (game arcade) by showing the player the game property with the current setting value in the customer waiting state.

According to the eleventh embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, the game control means (game control device 100)
During the non-execution of the variable display game, the light emission mode of the light emitting unit (the special view 1 display 51 or the special view 2 display 52) used to execute the variable display game according to the set value Can be changed. Therefore, the player can estimate the setting (setting value) based on the light emission mode of the light emitting unit (the special view 1 display 51 or the special view 2 display 52) used to execute the variable display game.

According to the eleventh embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, the gaming control means can set the display mode of the indicator (the playing card 864a, the information indicator 864d) provided outside the gaming machine 10 according to the setting value. . Therefore, the player can estimate the setting (setting value) based on the display mode of the display provided outside.

[12th embodiment]
The twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 118. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to eleventh embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as the first to eleventh embodiments, and redundant descriptions will be appropriately omitted.

In the twelfth embodiment, part identification information of the removable part (part, member) 510 (first
When the identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10 do not match, the fact that they do not match is notified as an error.

[Parts of gaming machine]
FIG. 109 shows that the detachable part 510 is attached to the gaming machine 10.
The part 510 is assigned electrically readable part identification information. For example,
The part 510 may be a plate-like member on which model information (model logo, etc.) of the gaming machine 10 to be attached is displayed, and a frame effect device or a movable role constituting the panel effect device 44 may be frame decoration It may be a decoration member having the LED of the device 18 or the panel decoration device 46. The parts 510 can be attached to the game machine 10 in the game arcade for reasons such as being in the way of being carried into the game arcade (game arcade), and there is a possibility that unskilled attendants can attach them to the wrong model.

As shown in FIG. 109 (A), for example, no problem occurs when the part 510A for the model A is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 109 (B),
Since a problem occurs when the part 510 B for the model B is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10, the effect control device 300 notifies an error via the speakers 19 a and 19 b and the display device 41.

FIG. 110 is a schematic configuration view schematically showing a configuration example of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment. The game control apparatus 100 transmits a model specification command indicating the model (type) of the gaming machine 10 to the effect control apparatus 300 when powering on the gaming machine 10 or the like (A1035, A1045). The effect control device 300 receives the model specification command (B) received from the reference table (FIG. 118 described later).
Select and set model identification information corresponding to 1301). Also, the effect control device 300
The part identification information read from the part 510 is compared with the set model identification information. Furthermore, when the part identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) do not match, the effect control device 300 notifies that there is an error as an error.

The part 510 has an identification substrate 513 holding part identification information. Identification board 513
In the part identification information, one or more wires 519 (electric wires) to which a predetermined voltage is applied.
Set by In FIG. 109, the wiring 519 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage via a pull-up resistor, but the pull-up resistor may not be provided. The power supply (voltage) to the part 510 is, for example, the effect control device 300 when the part 510 is attached.
Alternatively, it is supplied from the power supply device 400.

In FIG. 110, the plurality of wires 519 (a plurality of wires) are connected to predetermined ones of a plurality (eight) of terminals (ports) in the parallel-serial conversion unit 516, respectively. Thus, a predetermined terminal to which a predetermined voltage is input is a bit of value “1”, and a terminal to which a predetermined voltage is not input (wiring 519 is not connected) is a bit of “0”, for example
Part identification information such as “01111100” can be transmitted via the parallel-serial conversion unit 516.

That is, the identification substrate 513 is assigned part identification information as parallel data by the plurality of wires 519. Then, the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 converts the input part identification information (parallel data) into serial data, and transmits the serial data (here, I ² C) to the effect control device 300.

FIG. 111 shows another example of the identification substrate 513. In FIG. 111, the part identification information is set by the dip switch 521. Each of the plurality of wires 519 is a dip switch 5
21 becomes a predetermined voltage or ground voltage, and information of each bit (“1” or “0”) of parts identification information is input to a plurality (eight) terminals (ports) in parallel-serial conversion unit 516 . In the example of FIG. 111, the wiring 5 in which the dip switch 521 is on.
The terminal connected to 19 becomes the ground voltage (bit of value “0”), and dip switch 52
The terminal connected to the wiring 519 in which 1 is off has a predetermined voltage (bit of value “1”).
It becomes.

[Parallel-to-serial converter]
FIG. 112 shows the configuration of the parallel-serial converter 516 when the parallel-serial converter 516 is a normal parallel-serial converter IC.

The parallel-serial converter 516 includes a plurality of D-type flip flops 516 a (D-FF).
And a conventional parallel-to-serial conversion IC. Parallel serial converter 51
6 converts parallel data (for example, “01111100”) as part identification information input from terminals 0 to 7 (ports 0 to 7) into serial data, and connects by serial communication (here, I ² C communication) It transmits to the production | presentation control apparatus 300 via line SDA (data line). The effect control device 300 has a master IC 300 a in I ² C communication, and inputs clock signals for a plurality of D-type flip flops 516 a to the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 via a connection line SCL (timing signal line).

The plurality of D-type flip flops 516 a (D-FF) constitute a shift register in which each bit data of parallel data moves from right to left in synchronization with a clock signal. The bit data of each D-type flip-flop 516a at one clock timing moves to the next D-type flip-flop 516a at the next clock timing. Each bit data of parallel data is taken into a plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a at certain clock timing, and sequentially output as serial data from the D-type flip-flop 516a at the left end. That is, the output of serial data is completed eight clocks after the parallel data is fetched.

First Modified Example of Identification Substrate
FIG. 113 shows a first modification of the identification substrate 513 of the part 510. As shown in FIG. In the first modification, the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 of the identification substrate 513 is not a normal parallel-serial conversion IC but an I ² CI / O expander 815 (slave IC) for input. I ² for input
The CI / O expander 815 has ports 0 to 0 on the master IC 300 a of the effect control device 300.
The part identification information input from 7 is input as data.

The I ² CI / O expander 815 (slave IC) is connected to the transistor 830 connected to the connection line SDA, the filter 831 connected to the connection line SDA, the driver 832 connected to the connection line SDA, and the connection line SCL Filter 833 and bus controller 834,
And a reset signal generation circuit 839. Furthermore, the other I ² CI / O expander 81
5. A bus monitoring WDT (watchdog timer) 840 for determining whether or not the connection line SDA is occupied by 5 and whether or not the I ² CI / O expander 815 itself occupies the connection line SDA In order to have a self-occupied WDT 841.

The connection line SDA is a connection line for exchanging data signals between the master IC 300 a of the effect control device 300 and the I ² CI / O expander 815 (slave IC), and functions as a data line. The connection line SCL is a connection line for inputting and outputting a clock signal used for data communication in the connection line SDA, and functions as a timing signal line.

The filter 831 is connected to the connection line SDA, removes noise of data (here, response signal, address data, and the like) input from the connection line SDA, and outputs the data from which the noise has been removed to the bus controller 834.

When the driver 832 outputs data (here, part identification information or the like) from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a, the voltage at which the transistor 830 can operate is set to the transistor 83.
Apply to 0.

The transistor 830 uses a field effect transistor (FET) to reduce power consumption, the gate of the transistor 830 is connected to the driver 832, and the drain is a connection line SDA to which a predetermined voltage is applied by the pull-up resistor R. And the source is grounded.

The driver 832 connects data (part identification information and the like) to the master IC 300 a.
In the case of the output from the transistor 830, a voltage of an operable value is applied to the gate of the transistor 830 in order to flow a current between the drain and the source in the transistor 830. Then, the driver 832 outputs data from the connection line SDA by repeatedly changing the voltage of the connection line SDA from HIGH to LOW.

The filter 833 is connected to the connection line SCL, removes noise of data input from the connection line SCL, and outputs the data from which the noise is removed to the bus controller 834.

In ^addition, the I 2 CI / O expander 815, is set a unique address by the address setting terminals A0~A3 provided in the ^I 2 CI / O expander 815 is input to the bus controller 834. Furthermore, an address for resetting the I ² CI / O expander 815 is also preset.

The unique address (8 bits) of the I ² CI / O expander 815 is constituted by a fixed address portion consisting of upper 3 bits and a variable address portion consisting of lower 5 bits. The fixed address portion has a predetermined value (for example, “110”) set in advance and can not be changed by the I ² CI / O expander 815.

The variable address unit is a 4-bit I ² CI / O expander address corresponding to the pattern set to the terminals A0 to A3 of the I ² CI / O expander 815 and whether the data is a read request or a write request And 1-bit R / W identification data. In the input I ² CI / O expander 815, “1” is normally registered in the R / W identification data in response to the read request.

The bus controller 834 determines that the address of the data input from the connection line SDA is I ² CI.
It is determined whether the address matches the unique address set in the / O expander 815. If the address matches, the data (part identification information) is output from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a. A plurality of wires 519 are connected to a predetermined port (five in this case) of eight ports 0 to 7 (terminals 0 to 7) in the I ² CI / O expander 815 to thereby set a predetermined voltage. Is applied. Therefore, 8-bit part identification information (for example, “01111100”) is input as parallel data to the bus controller 834 via eight ports 0 to 7. A predetermined port to which a predetermined voltage is input corresponds to a bit of value "1", and the other terminals (the wiring 519 is not connected) correspond to a bit of value "0".

In addition, the bus controller 834 sets the address of the data input from the connection line SDA to I.
^{2 It} is determined whether or not the address matches the reset address set in the CI / O expander 815. If the address matches, the data is fetched as initialization instruction data (initialization command RES), and the I ² Initialize the CI / O expander 815.

Also, the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH 8 times, and 8
After the bus controller 834 outputs data of the bit (part identification information), the connection line S
When the signal level of CL changes from HIGH to LOW, the master IC 300a outputs a reply signal to the bus controller 834 from the connection line SDA. Further, it is confirmed that the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH, and when the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from HIGH to LOW again, the connection line SDA is released. In other words, master IC 30
0a outputs a response signal at the timing when the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH 9 times.

The reset signal generation circuit 839 receives the Vcc terminal connected to the connection line Vcc for supplying power to the I ² CI / O expander 815, and RES that receives an external reset signal.
ET terminal is connected.

The reset signal generation circuit 839 supplies power to the I ² CI / O expander 815,
When the voltage rises to a predetermined value, a reset signal is generated, and the generated reset signal is initialized by being input to the bus controller 834.

Therefore, when the harness is removed, the connection line Vcc for supplying power for logic is temporarily disconnected, and when the harness is reinserted, the power supply is restored, and the reset signal generation circuit 83
9 will output a reset signal. Note that a bundle of a connection line Vcc, a connection line SDA, a connection line SCL, a ground line GND, and the like for supplying power for logic is referred to as a harness.

The bus monitoring WDT 840 is used to detect that the other I ² CI / O expander 815 occupies the connection line SDA. The bus monitoring WDT 840 is connected to the reset signal generation circuit 839, and when a predetermined time elapses after the connection line SDA is occupied,
Its reset signal generating circuit 839 is operated, the ^I 2 CI / O expander 815
Initialize

Self-occupied WDT 841 is connected with its own (I ² CI / O expander 815) SD
Used to detect A's occupation. When the self-occupied WDT 841 operates continuously for a fixed time, the self-occupied WDT 841 generates a reset signal to the reset signal generation circuit 839 to initialize the I ² CI / O expander 815.

Second Modification of Identification Substrate
FIG. 114 shows a second modification of the identification substrate 513 of the part 510. As shown in FIG. In the second modification, the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 of the identification substrate 513 is not a normal parallel-serial conversion IC but an I ² CI / O expander 815 (slave IC) for output. Further, in the second modification, the part 510 includes a rendering device and can perform rendering. The effect device is, for example, an LED
Although it is a decoration apparatus such as (light emitting unit), it may be a movable combination.

The I ² CI / O expander 815 for output is a master IC 300 of the effect control device 300.
Based on the effect control data received from a, the output state (here, light emitting state) of the rendering device (here, LED, light emitting unit) provided in the part 510 is controlled through the output ports 0 to 15. The I ² CI / O Expander 815 is an I ² CI / O Expander 815.
The unique address (8 bits) of is used as part identification information, and is input to the master IC 300 a of the effect control device 300.

The I ² CI / O Expander 815 for Output is an I ² CI / O Expander 81 for Input
5 (FIG. 113), the driver 8 connected to the output setting register 835, the output controller 836, and the ports 0 to 15 (terminals 0 to 15) on the output side of the I ² CI / O expander 815
37, transistors 838A to 838P connected to the ports 0 to 15 are added. Therefore, the description of the same configuration as that of the input I ² CI / O expander 815 (FIG. 113) will be omitted as appropriate.

The filter 831 is connected to the connection line SDA, removes noise of data (here, effect control data, response signal, etc.) input from the connection line SDA, and outputs the data from which the noise has been removed to the bus controller 834.

The driver 832 applies, to the transistor 830, a voltage at which the transistor 830 can operate when outputting data (here, part identification information, a response signal, etc.) from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a.

When the driver 832 outputs data (part identification information, response signal, etc.) from the connection line SDA, the transistor 830 can operate at the gate of the transistor 830 in order to flow current between the drain and the source in the transistor 830. Apply a voltage of value. Then, the driver 832 outputs data from the connection line SDA by repeatedly changing the voltage of the connection line SDA from HIGH to LOW.

The bus controller 834 determines that the address of the data input from the connection line SDA is I ² CI.
It is determined whether the address matches the unique address set in the / O expander 815. If the address matches, the data (part identification information, response signal, etc.) is output from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a. The part identification information output to master IC 300a is I ² as described above.
This is a unique address (8 bits) of the CI / O expander 815. Note that it is not always necessary to output the part identification information from the bus controller 834 to the master IC 300 a, and the effect control device 300 recognizes the address of the transmitted data as the part identification information when the reply signal from the bus controller 834 is received. It may be configured to

In addition, the bus controller 834 changes the signal level of the connection line SCL from LOW to HIGH eight times, and takes in the effect control data of the eighth bit from the connection line SDA, and then the signal level of the connection line SCL When changing from HIGH to LOW, the response signal is connected to the connection line SD
Output from A to the master IC 300a. Furthermore, it is confirmed that the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH, and the signal level of the connection line SCL is again from HIGH to LO.
When it changes to W, the connection line SDA is released. That is, the bus controller 834 outputs a response signal at the timing when the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from low to high nine times.

In the output setting register 835, the operation mode of the I ² CI / O expander 815 and the output state of the ports 0 to 15 are set. When the bus controller 834 takes in initialization instruction data from the connection line SDA and the I ² CI / O expander 815 is initialized, the output setting register 835 causes current to flow to all the ports 0 to 15. It is set to the initial state so as not to.

Output controller 836 sets data based on the data set in output setting register 835.
A rendering device (here, LE connected to each of ports 0 to 15 via port driver 837)
D, the output state (here, the light emission state) of the rendering device is actually controlled by supplying a current to the light emitting portion (output of lighting data). This output state is updated to the content specified in the effect control data when the bus controller 834 takes in the effect control data from the connection line SDA.

That is, the output setting register 835 is set based on the effect control data received from the master IC 300a, and when the stop condition is received, the output states of the ports 0 to 15 are updated and reflected on the effect device.

The driver 837 applies a voltage to which the transistors 838A to 838P, which are connected to the port through which current flows, can operate when the current flows through the port.

The gates of the transistors 838A to 838P are connected to the driver 837, the drain is connected to the port terminal connected to the connection line to which the voltage for operating the rendering device is applied, and the source is grounded.

If the voltage applied to the gates of the transistors 838A to 838P is equal to or higher than the predetermined value for operating the transistor 838, the predetermined voltage applied to the gate from the driving power source is grounded via the drain of the transistor 838 By the flow of current to
The output state of the rendering device (here, LED) connected to the port terminal can be controlled.

Third Modified Example of Identification Substrate
FIG. 115 shows a third modification of the identification substrate 513 of the part 510. As shown in FIG. In the third modification, the parallel-to-serial conversion unit 516 of the identification substrate 513 does not exist, and a predetermined voltage is input from the plurality of wires 519 as part identification information (for example, “01111100”) of 8 bits. It is directly input to port 300 b (ports 0 to 7). Input port 30
Parts identification information input to 0b is sent to the microcomputer for main control (CP
U) Incorporated into 311 Note that a predetermined terminal to which a predetermined voltage is input corresponds to a bit of value "1", and the other terminals (the wiring 519 is not connected) correspond to a bit of value "0".

Then, when the parts identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) do not match, the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 notifies of an error as an error. Execute the process to

[Main processing (effect control device)]
FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure of main processing (main program) according to the twelfth embodiment. The main processing is executed by the effect control device 300 (main control microcomputer 311) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on (restored).

The main processing of the twelfth embodiment is the part collation processing (B5) with respect to the main processing of FIG.
Since the other processes are the same as those in FIG. 36, the same step numbers are given and the description thereof is omitted.

In parts collation processing, parts identification information (first identification information) is compared by comparing parts identification information read from parts 510 with model identification information corresponding to a model designation command (B1301).
When the device identification information (second identification information) and the device identification information (the second identification information) do not match, a warning is issued by an error notification.
In the present embodiment, the part collation process (B5000) is a reception command check process (B00).
It is executed after 14).

The parts collation process (B5000) is first executed when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, and then repeatedly executed by the loop process from step B0008 to B0021.

[Parts matching process]
Next, referring to FIG. 117, the part collation process (B50) in the main process (FIG. 116) is performed.
The details of 00) will be described. FIG. 117 is a flow chart showing the procedure of part collation processing executed by the effect control device 300.

If the matching time timer (clocking means) is not 0, the effect control device 300 first updates -1 (B5001). The collation time timer reads parts identification information and collates with model identification information (
The comparison timing or comparison time interval to be compared is determined. Then, it is determined whether the collation time timer is 0 (B5002). If the collation time timer is not 0 (B5
Since the result of 002 is "N", it is not the collation timing, the parts collation processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the matching time timer is 0 (the result of B5002 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 reads the part identification information from the part 510 because it is the matching timing (B5)
003). And parts identification information (1st identification information) and model identification information (2nd identification information) are compared (collation) (B5004). The model identification information is set based on a model designation command as information indicating the type (model) of the gaming machine in a model setting process (B1302) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on.

The effect control device 300 stores the reference table of FIG. 118 in a memory (for example, the program ROM 321). In the reference table of FIG. 118, a model specification command is associated with model identification information. Thus, the effect control device 300 holds model identification information (second identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether the part identification information and the model identification information match (B5005). If the parts identification information and the model identification information do not match (the result of B5005 is "N"), an error notification informs that the parts identification information and the model identification information do not match (B5006). That is, it informs that the part 510 is attached to the wrong model that does not fit (correspond to) the part 510. The effect control device 300 may execute error notification (warning) by generating sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b or displaying characters on the display device 41. Also, here, the effect control device 300 may notify of the correct model that matches (corresponds to) the part 510 together with the error notification with reference to the reference table of FIG. 118. The correct model is a model that becomes the same model identification information as the part identification information of the part 510.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 sets an initial value of the matching time timer (B5007), and ends the parts matching process. Therefore, the parts identification information and the model identification information are periodically compared (collated) every time when the time corresponding to the initial value of the collation time timer elapses, with the power on as the first time. The initial value of the matching time timer is, for example, a time corresponding to several minutes, but is not limited thereto.

On the other hand, when the part identification information and the model identification information match (B5
Since the result of 005 is “Y” and the part 510 is attached to the correct model that matches (corresponds to) the part 510, the initial value of the collation time timer is set without notifying the error (B50
07) Finish the part matching process.

For example, when the part 510B for the model B is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10 (FIG. 109 (B)), the model identification information (for example, “0111” is displayed.
1100 ") and the part identification information (for example," 01111101 ") do not match, and an error notification is performed. The correct model (model B) that conforms to part 510B with error notification
May be notified. On the other hand, for example, when the part 510A for the model A is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10 (FIG. 109 (A)), model identification information (for example, “01111100”).
And the part identification information (for example, “01111100”) match, and the error notification is not performed.

Note that, as a modification, the effect control device 300 has a memory (for example, the program ROM 321).
) May not be stored, and only model identification information (second identification information) corresponding to one type of model may be stored. Also in this case, the effect control device 300 is the part 510
Part identification information by comparing the part identification information read from the machine with the held model identification information
If the first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) do not match, an indication that they do not match is notified as an error.

[Operations and effects of the twelfth embodiment]
According to the twelfth embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, a game control unit (game control device 100) capable of executing a game (for example, a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed based on establishment of the start condition), Effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing an effect to be
Equipped with The gaming machine 10 includes a removable part (part 510) to which electrically readable first identification information (part identification information) is assigned. The effect control means holds the second identification information (model identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10, reads the first identification information of the part and compares it with the second identification information to obtain the first identification information (part identification Information) and second identification information (model identification information)
In the case of non-coincidence, the non-coincidence is notified.

Therefore, even when the wrong part (part 510) is attached, notification can be appropriately made.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation of the gaming machine 10 in which there was a mounting error of the parts (parts 510) in the game arcade (game arcade).

According to the twelfth embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, the effect control means includes at least the gaming machine 1
At the time of power-on of 0, the first identification information of the part (part 510) is read and compared with the second identification information, and if the first identification information and the second identification information do not match, there is no match Inform. Therefore, even when the wrong part (part 510) is attached, notification can be made when the power is turned on. For this reason, it is possible to reliably prevent early operation of the gaming machine 10 in which there was a mounting error of the parts (parts 510) in the game arcade (game arcade).

According to the twelfth embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, the effect control means receives information on the model of the gaming machine 10 from the gaming control means when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and corresponds to the model of the gaming machine 10. The second identification information (model identification information) is selected from the table (reference table), and the first identification information of the part (part 510) is compared with the selected second identification information. Therefore, the gaming machine 1
If the wrong part (part 510) is attached to various models of 0, this can be notified. Also, it can notify the correct model that the wrong part should be attached.

According to the twelfth embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, the parts (parts 510)
The identification information (part identification information) can be set by one or more wires pulled up to a predetermined voltage, so that the first identification information can be set easily.

According to the twelfth embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, the parts (parts 510)
The identification information can be set by the dip switch, so the first identification information can be set easily.

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and alterations are possible within the scope of the technical idea, and it is apparent that they are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. It is. For example, it is also possible to combine several embodiments. Also, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of game machines (slot machines and the like). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the claims.

10 game machine 12 front frame (play slot)
25 effect button 30 game board 32 game area 36 first starting winning opening (first starting winning area)
37 Regular fluctuation winning device (2nd start winning area)
39 special fluctuation winning device 40 center case 41 display device 42 setting change device 44 board effect device 44a, 44b internal part (inner movable member)
46 panel decoration device 50 collective display device (LED)
51 1st special figure fluctuation display part (special figure 1 display)
52 2nd special figure fluctuation display part (special figure 2 display)
80 Lamp Display Device 93 Setting Key Switch 95a External Part (External Movable Member)
102 Set value change switch 143 Probability set value display device 150 Driver 152 State display device 153 LED driver 100 Game control device (main board)
200 payout control device 300 effect control device (sub board)
400 Power supply 510 Parts 513 Identification board 516 Parallel-serial converter 519 Wiring (electric wire)
630 reserve display section 640 reserve digestion area 640 A start memory display background 641 effect display area 815 I2CI / O expander

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising control means capable of generating a special gaming state for giving a gaming value to a player when a display result of a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed becomes a special result,
A first display device capable of displaying a display regarding a game;
Setting change means capable of changing the set value relating to the game conditions;
A second display device capable of displaying the setting value;
External information output means capable of outputting a predetermined signal as external information to an external device provided outside the gaming machine;
Equipped with
The control means displays the setting value on the second display device in a mode different from the display relating to the game in response to the setting changeable state in which the setting value can be changed by the setting changing means. A game machine characterized in that the external information display means outputs the predetermined signal in response to the setting variable state.

Images